03 00 00 to 14 00 00 - Los Angeles World Airports

03 00 00 to 14 00 00 - Los Angeles World Airports
Guide Specification
SECTION 05 70 00 - DECORATIVE METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
Decorative wall protection.
Metal base.
NOTE: All walls within the public areas are to receive stainless steel wall and corner
protection including a 12 inch high stainless steel base. This protection is deemed
necessary for the walls of the public areas in order to protect the wall finish from luggage
carts and other sources of high impact.
1.2
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for decorative metal.
1.
2.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
1.
2.
1.3
Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachments to other work.
Indicate materials and profiles of each decorative metal member, fittings, joinery,
finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.
Sections of linear shapes.
Samples of welded joints showing quality of workmanship.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing decorative metal similar to that
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative metal items. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
DECORATIVE METAL
05 70 00 - 1
Wall Guards
Guide Specification
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. Provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains,
discolorations, or blemishes.
STAINLESS STEEL
A.
Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20.
B.
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
2.3
FASTENERS
A.
Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1.
Stainless-Steel Items: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
B.
Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Unless otherwise indicated, select fasteners of
type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring indicated items to
other types of construction indicated.
C.
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting components and for attaching decorative metal
items to other work unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable.
1.
D.
2.4
Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise
indicated.
Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the
load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in
concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive recommended by metal fabricator that will fully bond metal to
metal and that will prevent telegraphing and oil canning and is compatible with substrate and
noncombustible after curing.
1.
Contact Adhesive: VOC content of not more than 80 g/L when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
DECORATIVE METAL
05 70 00 - 2
Wall Guards
Guide Specification
2.5
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Assemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.
Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units
for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of
joined pieces.
B.
Form decorative metal to required shapes and sizes, true to line and level with true curves and
accurate angles and surfaces. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and
arris.
C.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing the Work.
D.
Form simple and compound curves in bars by bending members in jigs to produce uniform
curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire
bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces.
E.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
F.
Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit.
G.
Grind smooth and polish exposed metal edges and corners.
H.
Provide necessary rebates, lugs, and brackets to assemble units and to attach to other work. Cut,
reinforce, drill, and tap as needed to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items unless
otherwise indicated.
I.
Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding. Weld behind finished surfaces
without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded joints of flux, and dress
exposed and contact surfaces.
1.
J.
2.6
Where welding cannot be concealed behind finished surfaces, finish joints to comply
with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 Welds: no evidence of a
welded joint.
Provide castings that are sound and free of warp, cracks, blowholes, or other defects that impair
strength or appearance. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate
marks, casting flash, and other casting marks.
DECORATIVE WALL PROTECTION
A.
Bumper Rail: Assembly consisting of continuous metal bars and wall brackets; designed to
withstand impacts.
1.
Rail: Stainless steel flat bar, in dimensions and profiles indicated on Drawings.
DECORATIVE METAL
05 70 00 - 3
Wall Guards
Guide Specification
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Wall Bracket: Cast stainless-steel shape, in dimensions and profiles indicated on
Drawings
Finish: Directional satin, No. 4.
Accessories: Anchors to connect bumper rail to other work.
Mounting: Surface mounted directly to wall.
Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards: Fabricated from metal bars welded to two mounting
brackets. Interconnect corner guard components with full-length, full penetration welds. Use
welding method that is appropriate for metal and finish indicated and that develops full strength
of members joined. Finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth, flush, and blended to match
adjoining surfaces.
1.
2.
3.
Material: Stainless steel, Type 304.
Bar: 1/2-inch-diameter stainless-steel bar.
Mounting Brackets: Fabricated from one-piece, formed or extruded stainless steel with
formed edges; with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition
a.
b.
c.
2.7
Wing Size: 1-1/2 inches high by 1 inch wide.
Corner Radius: 1/8 inch.
Mounting: Flat-head, countersunk screws through factory-drilled mounting holes.
METAL BASE
A.
2.8
Form metal base from stainless-steel sheet, No. 4 finish, thickness as indicated on Drawings.
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
2.9
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A.
Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
B.
Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
1.
Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
C.
Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
D.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter
and leave surfaces chemically clean.
DECORATIVE METAL
05 70 00 - 4
Wall Guards
Guide Specification
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of decorative metal.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where needed to secure decorative metal to in-place
construction.
B.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install decorative metal. Set products
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels.
C.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where indicated,
uniform reveals. Where cutting, welding, and grinding are required for proper shop fitting and
jointing of decorative metal, restore finishes to eliminate evidence of such corrective work.
D.
Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with
such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide
new units as required.
E.
Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or installation. Remove
protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other work yet to be
performed at same location.
1.
3.3
Retain protective coverings intact; remove coverings simultaneously from similarly
finished items to preclude nonuniform oxidation and discoloration.
DECORATIVE WALL PROTECTION INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install decorative wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without
distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be
visible in the finished Work.
1.
2.
Install decorative wall protection units in locations and at mounting heights indicated on
Drawings.
Provide mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete
installation.
DECORATIVE METAL
05 70 00 - 5
Wall Guards
Guide Specification
3.4
METAL BASE INSTALLATION
A.
Install metal base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
B.
Tightly adhere metal base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
C.
On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of metal base
with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap,
rinsing with clean water, and drying with soft cloths.
B.
Protect finishes of decorative metal from damage during construction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by decorative metal fabricator. Remove protective covering at
time of Substantial Completion.
C.
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required
alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
END OF SECTION 05 70 00
DECORATIVE METAL
05 70 00 - 6
Wall Guards
Guide Specification
SECTION 05 75 30.13 – COLUMN COVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Column covers with metal and glass finish with LED Light Panel System.
NOTE: LAWA has developed this specification standard for column covers in order to provide a unifying design for the public areas of the terminals while providing long term durability and ease of maintenance.
1.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.3
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include finishing materials.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for column covers.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
1.4
Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachments to other work.
Indicate materials and profiles of each column cover, fittings, joinery, finishes, fasteners,
anchorages, and accessory items.
Indicate LED light panel.
Stainless Steel: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 12-inch square
Samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.
Laminated Glass with Colored Interlayer: 18 inches square.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Show dimensions of structural columns, fireproofing (if any),
attachments, and necessary clearances.
B.
Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.
COLUMN COVERS
05 75 30.13 - 1
Column Covers
Guide Specification
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: For stainless-steel finish to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B.
Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain laminated glass from single source from single
manufacturer.
C.
Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
fabrication and installation.
1.
2.
3.
Construct one mockup of each type of column cover.
Approved mockups may not become part of the completed Work.
All mockups shall be constructed at the jobsite.
D.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
E.
Column Cover installation shall commence only upon receiving written LAWA approval of the
Mock Up.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver column covers wrapped in protective coverings and strapped together in suitable packs
or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they stain or bond to finished
surfaces.
B.
Store products on elevated platforms in a dry location.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, beams, and other construction
contiguous with column covers by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for column covers. Installation of anchors shall not
damage the column reinforcement. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for
installing anchorages, including concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors,
that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
COLUMN COVERS
05 75 30.13 - 2
Column Covers
Guide Specification
B.
1.10
A.
Coordinate installation of column covers with adjacent construction to ensure that wall
assemblies, flashings, trim, and joint sealants, are protected against damage from the effects of
weather, age, corrosion, and other causes.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which
laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed
from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning
laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge
separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding
those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SHEET METAL
A.
General: Provide sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations,
or other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units.
B.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled
standard of flatness.
2.2
GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
Bent Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1464, Kind BL, and ASTM C 1172, Kind LA (laminated
annealed), Condition A (uncoated), Type I (transparent), Quality-Q3 with two plies of glass and
polyvinyl butyral interlayer not less than 0.060 inch thick.
1.
2.
3.
Glass Color: Clear.
Interlayer Color: White.
Glass Plies: 6.0 mm thick, each.
NOTE: The bent glass is comprised of 3/16 inch Starphire / .060 #4640/ 3/16 Starphire, flat
polish all edges. Glass shall comply with CPSC CFR 1201 Cat II.
B.
Glazing Cement and Accessories for Structural Glazing: Glazing cement, setting blocks, shims,
and related accessories as recommended or supplied by column cover manufacturer for
installing structural glazing.
COLUMN COVERS
05 75 30.13 - 3
Column Covers
Guide Specification
2.3
ILLUMINATION
A.
LED Light Panel System: Molded clear acrylic (PMMA) .3125" thick lens, .125" channel
around edge, edges, or perimeter, .0625" x .0625" wire, mesh grid overlay, strings of LEDs in
channel around edge, edges, or perimeter with flat metal led covers, flat white plastic sheet on
top sides covered with white plastic tape, and low-voltage wire extruding from corner, side, ore
rear of panel with barrel connector.
B.
Manufacturer:
1.
E Connect: 740 Flower Avenue, Venice, CA 90291, Telephone: 310.616.5055
C.
UL Approved.
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Sealants, Interior: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834;
of type and grade required to seal joints in column covers; and as recommended in writing by
column covers manufacturer.
1.
B.
Sealants shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless otherwise
indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with materials joined.
1.
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting column covers items and for attaching
them to other work unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Nonstructural Anchors: Provide metal expansion sleeve anchors of type, size, and material
necessary for type of load and installation indicated, as recommended by manufacturer, unless
otherwise indicated.
D.
Anchor Materials for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Isolation Coating: Manufacturer's standard bituminous paint.
2.5
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble column covers items in shop to greatest extent possible to
minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and
handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B.
Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of column covers items with those of adjoining
construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with edges and
surfaces aligned unless otherwise indicated.
COLUMN COVERS
05 75 30.13 - 4
Column Covers
Guide Specification
C.
Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat, flush
surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends. Fold back exposed edges of
unsupported sheet metal to form a 1/2-inch wide hem on the concealed side, or ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1/32 inch and support with concealed stiffeners.
D.
Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as
needed to provide surface flatness equivalent to stretcher-leveled standard of flatness and
sufficient strength for indicated use.
1.
Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining
sheets in flush alignment.
E.
Build in straps, plates, and brackets as needed to support and anchor fabricated items to
adjoining construction. Reinforce column covers items as needed to attach and support other
construction.
F.
Provide support framing, mounting and attachment clips, splice sleeves, fasteners, and
accessories needed to install column cover items.
2.6
GLAZING PANEL FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate to sizes and shapes required; provide for proper edge clearance and bite on
glazing panels.
1.
2.
B.
2.7
Clean-cut or flat-grind edges at butt-glazed sealant joints to produce square edges with
slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces
Grind smooth exposed edges, including those at open joints, to produce square edges
with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
Glass Column Covers: Factory-bond glass to base and top-rail channels in manufacturer's plant
using glazing cement to comply with manufacturer's written specifications.
COLUMN COVERS
A.
Snap-Together Type: Form column covers to shapes indicated from metal of type and
minimum thickness indicated below. Return vertical edges and bend to form hook that will
engage continuous mounting clips.
1.
304 Stainless-Steel Sheet: 11 gauge
a.
2.
3.
4.
Finish: custom decorative/textured.
Form returns at vertical joints to provide hairline V-joints.
Fabricate column covers with reveals at horizontal joints produced by forming returns on
mating ends of metal column cover sections. Provide snap-in metal filler strips at
reveals. Locate horizontal joints as indicated.
Fabricate base rings, intermediate reveals, and ceiling rings to match column cover metal
finish.
COLUMN COVERS
05 75 30.13 - 5
Column Covers
Guide Specification
B.
2.8
Glass Column Covers: Factory-bond glass to base and top-rail channels in manufacturer's plant
using glazing cement to comply with manufacturer's written specifications.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Complete mechanical finishes of flat sheet metal surfaces before fabrication where possible.
After fabrication, finish all joints, bends, abrasions, and other surface blemishes to match sheet
finish.
C.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
D.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of column
covers.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Locate and place column covers level and plumb and in alignment with adjacent construction.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install column covers.
1.
Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return
items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete
refinishing, or provide new units as required.
B.
Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where
needed to protect metal surfaces.
C.
Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together.
D.
Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, sealants, and insulation, as the Work progresses, to make
interior column covers soundproof and lightproof as applicable to type of fabrication indicated.
COLUMN COVERS
05 75 30.13 - 6
Column Covers
Guide Specification
E.
3.3
Corrosion Protection: Apply bituminous paint or other permanent separation materials on
concealed surfaces where metals would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials
that are incompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or finish.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap,
rinsing with clean water, and drying with soft cloths.
B.
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required
alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
C.
Clean and polish glass as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Wash exposed surfaces in
each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish
date of Substantial Completion.
3.4
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finishes of column covers from damage during construction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by column cover manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at
time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05 75 30.13
COLUMN COVERS
05 75 30.13 - 7
Column Covers
Guide Specification
SECTION 06 40 23 − INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes interior woodwork for the following applications:
1.
2.
3.
Wood cabinets.
Plastic-laminate cabinets.
Solid-surfacing-material countertops.
NOTE: The Architect of Record shall prepare and sign a letter addressed to LAWA certifying that the installed millwork, either stand alone or combined with any equipment that
is integrated into the millwork or sitting on top of the millwork, is in compliance with
ADA Standards.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
Cabinet hardware and accessories.
Handrail brackets.
Finishing materials and processes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include location of each item, plans and elevations, large-scale details,
attachment devices, and other components.
C.
Samples:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Lumber and panel products for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on
one side and one edge.
Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, for each finish system and
color, with exposed surface finished.
Plastic-laminate-clad panel products, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
Thermoset decorative-overlay surfaced panel products, for each type, color, pattern, and
surface finish.
Solid-surfacing materials.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products or licensee of WI's Certified Compliance
Program.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 40 23 - 1
Millwork
Guide Specification
B.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and
other requirements.
1.
2.
This project has been registered as AWI/QCP Number.
Provide AWI certification labels or compliance certificate indicating that woodwork
complies with requirements of grades specified.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated,
provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by
testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to the Los Angeles Department of Building and Safety.
D.
Forest Certification: Provide interior architectural woodwork produced from wood obtained
from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001,
"FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
E.
Mockups: Construct mockups at the jobsite to verify compliance with the construction
documents and the written comments issued during the LAWA submittal reviews. Include the
following mockups:
a.
Functional Mock Up: Fabricate from plywood or particle board in configuration
indicated to confirm podium configuration, coordination and integration of all
equipment including, but not limited to, computers, ticket spitters, monitors, and
dynamic signage displays.
NOTE: Whenever practical, the millwork is to be designed with integral cable raceways
with future expansion in mind. Within this millwork, discretely locate any access panels
that are to be provided for ease of cable and wiring maintenance. Such millwork installations will require coordination with electrical and communication disciplines. Underlying
floor mounted electrical outlets are to be fully recessed with cover plates and smoothly
aligned with the adjacent floor finishes.
b.
2.
3.
F.
1.4
Aesthetic Mock Up: Fabricated from specified and indicated materials; incorporate
all requested modifications from the Functional Mock Up.
Construct all mock ups at jobsite.
Approved mock ups may not become part of the completed work.
Conduct pre-installation conference at the jobsite.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 40 23 - 2
Millwork
Guide Specification
humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction
period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOODWORK FABRICATORS
A.
2.2
Fabricators: Subject to LAWA review.
MATERIALS
A.
Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard with surface of
thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.
B.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with LAWA requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Solid-Surfacing Material (SSM): Provide material that meets or exceeds ISSFA-2-01
performance standards, consisting of reacted monomers and resins, mineral fillers and pigments
and manufactured in sheets of specific thicknesses. SSM shall be solid, non-porous,
homogeneous, hygienic, renewable, and, when applicable, may feature inconspicuous hygienic
seams. SSM shall be free from conspicuous internal strengthening fibers.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with LAWA requirements, provide one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
D.
Formica Corporation.
Laminart.
Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
Nevamar Company
Avonite, Inc.; Avonite.
DuPont Polymers; Corian.
Wilsonart International, Div. of Premark International, Inc.; Gibraltar.
Nevamar Company
Hanstone
Formica Corporation
Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled
standard of flatness..
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 40 23 - 3
Millwork
Guide Specification
2.3
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials for a complete installation of
architectural woodwork.
NOTE: Coordinate all cabinet hardware with the Door Hardware schedule.
B.
Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA
numbers or items referenced to this standard.
C.
Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type):
1.
Provide 170 degree minimum opening capabilities. For end doors perpendicular to walls,
provide 90 degree type.
D.
Drawer Slides: Unless noted otherwise, provide positive stop, side-mounted, full-extension,
zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball bearings.
E.
Door and Drawer Locks:
1.
2.
3.
F.
2.4
Pin and tumbler slide bolt lock, two keys each.
Key all locks inside one room alike and provide masterkey for all locks in project to
LAWA.
Finish to match adjacent pull, or as selected by LAWA.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: Complying with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number
indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain added urea formaldehyde.
B.
Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C.
VOC Content for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Comply with the following limits when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
NOTE: All adhesives shall be compliant with South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) requirements.
2.5
SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A.
Grade: Premium.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 40 23 - 4
Millwork
Guide Specification
B.
Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 3/4 inch.
C.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As preselected and indicated in Division 09 Section “Colors and
Finishes.”
D.
Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material
manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
1.
2.
Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated.
Fabricate tops with indicated backsplash.
E.
Install integral sink bowls in countertops in shop.
F.
Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in shop.
2.6
FABRICATION
A.
General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site.
Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
B.
Provide Premium grade interior woodwork unless otherwise noted. Subject to LAWA approval.
NOTE: Any grade below premium has been determined not be suitable for the public areas
and therefore will not be allowed.
2.7
SHOP FINISHING
A.
Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and
polishing until after installation.
B.
Finishing Materials: Products shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services "Standard Practice for the Testing Of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas and
examine and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming before
installation.
B.
Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Standards.
C.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. Shim as
required with concealed shims.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 40 23 - 5
Millwork
Guide Specification
D.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and
matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
E.
Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Fill gaps, if any,
between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood
base, if finished.
F.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation.
1.
G.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than
16 inches o.c..
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant.
END OF SECTION 06 40 23
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06 40 23 - 6
Millwork
Guide Specification
SECTION 08 11 13 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes hollow metal doors and frames.
NOTE: The integration of the existing LAWA Security System into the new steel door and
frame may be required. The Contractor shall be responsible for the total and complete coordination of the security system components of the work.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit product data for each product indicated. Include material descriptions,
core descriptions, label compliance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes for each type
of door and frame specified.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit door and frame schedule using same reference designations indicated
on Drawings. Include opening size(s), handing of doors, frame throat dimensions, details of
each frame type, elevations of door design types, details of construction, location and
installation requirements of door hardware and reinforcements, hardware group numbers, details
of joints and connections, fire label requirements including fire rating time duration, maximum
temperature rise requirements, and smoke label requirements.
NOTE: On the shop drawings, indicate the routing of electrical conduit with related dimensions and locations of required cutouts in doors and frames that are to accept electric hardware devices.
C.
Construction Samples: Submit approximately 18 by 24 inches (450 by 600 mm) construction
samples, representing the required construction of doors and frames for Project.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Doors: Show vertical-edge, top, and bottom construction; insulation; face stiffeners; and
hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement. Include glazing stops if applicable.
Welded Frames: Show profile, welded corner joint, welded hinge reinforcement, dustcover boxes, floor and wall anchors, stops, and silencers. Include glazing stops if
applicable.
Frames: Show profile, corner joint, welded hinge reinforcement, wall anchors, stops, and
silencers.
Certificate of Compliance for Fire Rated Doors: Provide copies of Certificate of Compliance
for all fire rated door assemblies, all smoke and draft control door assemblies, and all
temperature rise rated door assemblies.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 13 - 1
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
E.
1.3
Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire rated and
exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit certification of a testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to
comply with design, materials, and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled
construction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Hollow Metal Door and Frame Standard: Comply with the applicable provisions and
recommendations of the following publications by Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
(HMMA) Div. of National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM),
unless more stringent requirements are indicated in the Contract Documents:
1.
2.
HMMA “Hollow Metal Manual”.
HMMA 861 “Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing hollow metal doors and
frames similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fireprotection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C “Standard for
Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies”. Fire classification labels at all doors with fire
ratings greater than 20 minutes shall indicate the temperature rise developed on the unexposed
surface of the door after the first 30 minutes of fire exposure.
1.
2.
3.
Provide metal labels permanently fastened on each door which is within the size
limitations established by the LADBS.
Temperature-Rise Rating: Where indicated, provide doors that have a temperature-rise
rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C) maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.
Positive Pressure Rated Door Assemblies: Where indicated provide positive pressure
rated fire rated door assemblies. Sizes and configurations as shown on the drawings.
Installed door assemblies shall be in accordance with door manufacturers certified
assemblies.
a.
4.
Test Pressure: Test according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. After 5 minutes into the
test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches (1000 mm)
or less above the sill.
Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies,
provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated
door assemblies except for size.
D.
Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire
ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.
E.
Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 13 - 2
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver doors and frames palleted, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project site storage.
B.
Inspect doors and frames, on delivery, for damage. Tool marks, rust, blemishes, and other
damage on exposed surfaces will not be acceptable. Remove and replace damaged items as
directed by Architect. Store doors and frames at building site in a dry location, off the ground,
and in such a manner as to prevent deterioration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide doors and frames by one of
the following:
1.
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group Company.
Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group Company.
Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
MATERIALS
A.
Specified Gage Thickness: All specified gauge thicknesses are Manufacturer’s Standard Gauge.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS (commercial steel), Type B; free of
scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS (commercial steel), Type B, free from
scale, pitting, coil breaks, surface blemishes, buckles, waves, or other defects, exposed (matte)
dull finish, suitable for exposed applications.
D.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Galvanized steel.
1.
2.
E.
2.3
Expansion Bolts and Shields: FS FF-S-325, Group III, Type 1 or 2.
Machine Screws: FS FF-S-92, carbon steel, Type III cross recessed, design I or II recess,
style 2C flat head.
Filler: Sound deadening and heat retarding mineral fiber insulating material.
DOORS
A.
General: Provide flush-design doors, 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick, of seamless hollow
construction, unless otherwise indicated. Construct doors with sheets joined at their vertical
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 13 - 3
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
edges by continuous welding the full height of the door, with no visible seams on their faces or
vertical edges, and all welds ground and finished flush.
1.
2.
3.
Visible joints or seams around glazed panel inserts are permitted.
For single-acting swing doors, bevel both vertical edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50
mm).
For double-acting swing doors, round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch (54-mm) radius.
NOTE: For the doors, make provisions for the installation of electrical items specified
elsewhere; arrange so wiring can be readily removed and replace. Provide all cutouts and
reinforcements required for these steel doors to accept security system components.
B.
Interior Door Core Construction: Doors shall be stiffened by continuous vertically formed steel
sections which, upon assembly, shall span the full thickness of the interior space between door
faces. These stiffeners shall be 0.026-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness, spaced so that the
vertical interior webs shall be not more than 6 inches (150 mm) apart and spot welded to face
sheets a maximum of 5 inches (127 mm) o.c. Place filler between stiffeners for full height of
door.
C.
Fire Door Cores: A continuous mineral fiberboard core permanently bonded to the inside face
of the outer face sheet unless otherwise required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise
ratings indicated.
D.
Astragals: As required by NFPA 80 to provide fire ratings indicated.
E.
Top and Bottom Channels: Spot weld metal channels, having a thickness of not less than
thickness of face sheet, not more than 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. to face sheets.
1.
F.
Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with inverted horizontal channels of same material
as face sheet so flanges of channels are even with bottom and top edges of face sheets.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcing from the same material as door to comply with
the following. Offset reinforcement so that faces of mortised hardware items are flush with
door surfaces.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Hinges and Pivots: 7 gauge (0.167 inch) (4.2 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide
by 9 inches (229 mm).
Lock Front, Strike, and Flushbolt Reinforcements: 12 gauge (0.093 inch) (2.3 mm) thick
by size as required by hardware manufacturer.
Lock Reinforcement Units: 14 gauge (0.067 inch) (1.7 mm) thick by size as required by
hardware manufacturer.
Closer Reinforcements: 12 gauge (0.093 inch) (2.3 mm) thick one piece channel by size
as required by hardware manufacturer.
Other Hardware Reinforcements: As required for adequate strength and anchorage.
In lieu of reinforcement specified, hardware manufacturers recommended reinforcing
units may be used.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 13 - 4
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
7.
G.
Exit Device Reinforcements: 0.250 inch (6.35 mm) thick by 10 inches (245 mm) high by
4 inches (101 mm) wide centered on exit device case body, unless otherwise
recommended by exit device manufacturer.
Electrical Requirements: Make provisions for installation of electrical items specified
elsewhere; arrange so wiring can be readily removed and replaced.
1.
2.
Provide all cutouts and reinforcements required for hollow metal doors to accept security
system components.
Doors with Electric Hinges and Pivots: Provide with metal conduit or raceway to permit
wiring from electric hinge or pivot to other electric door hardware.
a.
H.
Interior Hollow Metal Doors:
1.
2.
2.4
Hinge Location: Center for doors less than 90 inches (2286 mm) tall or second
hinge from door bottom for doors greater than 90 inches (2286 mm); top or bottom
electric hinge locations shall not be permitted.
Typical Interior Doors: Flush design with 18 gauge (0.042-inch-) (1.06-mm-) thick coldrolled stretcher-leveled steel face sheets and other metal components from hot- or coldrolled steel sheets.
Extra Heavy Use Doors: Flush design with 14 gauge (0.067-inch-) (1.7-mm-) thick coldrolled, stretcher-leveled steel face sheets and other metal components from hot- or coldrolled steel sheets. Provide only where indicated.
FRAMES
A.
Fabricate hollow metal frames, formed to profiles indicated, with full 5/8 inch (16 mm) stops,
and of the following minimum thicknesses.
1.
For interior use, form frames from cold- rolled steel sheet of the following thicknesses:
a.
b.
Openings up to and Including 48 Inches (1200 mm) Wide: 16 gauge (0.053 inch)
(1.3 mm).
Openings More Than 48 Inches (1200 mm) Wide: 14 gauge (0.067 inch) (1.7
mm).
NOTE: For the frames, make provisions for installation of electrical items specified elsewhere; arrange so wiring can be readily removed and replace. Provide all cutouts and reinforcements required for steel frames to accept security system components. Provide welded
sheet metal boxes with metal conduit or raceway to permit wiring from electric hinge to other
electric door hardware.
B.
Provide frames either saw mitered and full (continuously) profile welded, or machine mitered
and full (continuously) profile welded, on back side at frame corners and stops with edges
straight and true. Grind welds smooth and flush on exposed surfaces.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 13 - 5
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
C.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcements from same material as frame to comply
with the following. Offset reinforcement so that faces of mortised hardware items are flush with
surface of the frame.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Hinges and Pivots: 7 gauge (0.167 inch) (4.2 mm) thick by 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide
by 10 inches (254 mm).
Strike, Surface Mounted Hold Open Arms, and Flushbolt Reinforcements: 12 gauge
(0.093 inch) (2.3 mm) thick by size as required by hardware manufacturer.
Closer Reinforcements: 12 gauge (0.093 inch) (2.3 mm) thick one piece channel by size
as required by hardware manufacturer.
Other Hardware Reinforcements: As required for adequate strength and anchorage.
Electrical Requirements: Make provisions for installation of electrical items specified
elsewhere; arrange so wiring can be readily removed and replaced.
1.
2.
Provide all cutouts and reinforcements required for hollow metal frames to accept
security system components.
Frames with Electric Hinges and Pivots: Provide welded on UL listed back boxes with
metal conduit or raceway to permit wiring from electric hinge or pivot to other electric
door hardware.
a.
Hinge Location: Center for doors less than 90 inches (2286 mm) tall or second
hinge from door bottom for doors greater than 90 inches (2286 mm); top or bottom
electric hinge locations shall not be permitted.
E.
Mullions and Transom Bars for Sidelights, Transoms, and Borrowed Light Frames: Provide
closed or tubular mullions and transom bars where indicated. Fasten mullions and transom bars
at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. Reinforce joints between frame members with
concealed clip angles or sleeves of same metal and thickness as frame.
F.
Jamb Anchors: Locate jamb anchors above hinges and directly opposite on strike jamb as
required to secure frames to adjacent construction. At metal stud partitions locate the additional
jamb anchor below the top hinge.
1.
Masonry Construction: Adjustable, corrugated or perforated, anchors to suit frame size;
formed of same material and gauge thickness as frame; at non-rated frames use friction fit
T-shaped anchors, at rated frames use anchors consisting of spot welded strap and
adjustable anchor; with leg not less than 2 inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm)
long. Furnish at least the number of anchors per jamb according to the following frame
heights:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1500 mm) in height.
Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1500 to 2250 mm) in height.
Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2250 to 2400 mm) in height.
One additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (600 mm) or fraction thereof
more than 96 inches (2400 mm) in height.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Metal channel stud zee anchor sized to match stud width, welded
to back of frames, formed of same material and gauge thickness as frame. Provide at
least the number of anchors for each jamb according to the following heights:
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 13 - 6
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1500 mm) in height.
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1500 to 2250 mm) in height.
Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2250 to 2400 mm) in height.
One additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (600 mm) or fraction thereof
more than 96 inches (2400 mm) in height.
In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Anchor frame jambs with minimum 3/8-inch- (9-mm-)
diameter countersunk flat head bolts into expansion shields or inserts 6 inches (150 mm)
from top and bottom of each jamb with intermediate anchors spaced a maximum of 26
inches (650 mm) o.c. Soffit face of frame shall be punched and dimpled to accept
countersunk bolt head. Reinforce frame with spacer to prevent bowing. Bolt head shall
be set slightly below soffit face, filled and ground smooth at time of installation.
G.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, formed
of same material as frame, 12 gauge (0.093 inch) (2.3 mm) thick, and punched with two holes to
receive two (2) 0.375 inch (9.5 mm) fasteners. Where floor fill or setting beds occur support
frame by adjustable floor anchors bolted to the structural substrate. Terminate bottom of frames
at finish floor surface. Weld floor anchors to frames with at least 4 spot welds per anchor.
H.
Head Strut Supports: Provide 3/8-by-2-inch (9-by-50-mm) vertical steel struts extending from
top of frame at each jamb to supporting construction above. Bend top of struts to provide flush
contact for securing to supporting construction above by bolting, welding, or other suitable
anchorage. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members to permit
height adjustment during installation. Adapt jamb anchors at struts to permit adjustment.
I.
Head Reinforcement: For frames more than 48 inches (1200 mm) wide in masonry wall
openings, provide continuous steel channel or angle stiffener, 12 gauge (0.093 inch) (2.3 mm)
thick for full width of opening, welded to back of frame at head. Head reinforcements shall not
be used as a lintel or load bearing member for masonry.
J.
Spreader Bars: Provide removable spreader bar across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs
and mullions to serve as bracing during shipment and handling and to hold frames in proper
position until anchorage and adjacent construction have been completed.
K.
Door Silencer Holes: Drill strike jamb stop to receive three silencers on single door frames and
for two silencers on double door frames. Insert plastic plugs in holes to keep holes clear during
installation.
L.
Plaster Guards and Removable Access Plates: Provide 26 gauge (0.016-inch-) (0.4-mm-) thick
plaster guards or dust-cover boxes of same material as frame, welded to frame at back of
hardware cutouts to close off interior of openings and prevent mortar or other materials from
obstructing hardware operation. Provide removable access plates in the heads of frames to
receive overhead concealed door closers.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 13 - 7
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
2.5
STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A.
Provide continuous stops and moldings around glazed panels where indicated.
B.
Form fixed stops and moldings integral with frame, on the exterior (non-secured) side of the
frame.
C.
Provide removable stops and moldings formed of 20 gauge (0.032-inch-) (0.8-mm-) thick steel
sheets matching hollow metal frames. Secure with countersunk oval head machine screws
spaced uniformly not more than 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. Form corners with butted or mitered
hairline joints.
D.
Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glass or panel and type
of installation indicated.
2.6
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A.
Provide hollow metal door frames to be used as both door buck and trim, formed to profiles
shown, of minimum 16 gauge (0.053 inch) (1.3 mm) thick cold rolled steel.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.7
Frames shall be splined, tabbed, and miter fit, knockdown type compatible with adjacent
construction conditions.
Accurately machine, file, and fit exposed connections with hairline joints.
Typical Anchorage: Frames shall be provided with concealed mechanical compression
anchors at top of each jamb and each jamb shall be prepared and provided with provision
for anchorage at floor line of jamb return face.
Miter and anchorage type subject to acceptance of Architect.
Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap frames for mortise type hardware. Provide internal
reinforcement for surface type hardware which is to be field drilled and tapped per requirements
hereinbefore specified for welded frames and including silencers. Locate hardware in frames to
match location specified and in accordance with the hardware schedule and templates.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate doors and frames rigid, neat in appearance, and free of defects, warp, wave, and
buckle. Accurately form metal to sizes and profiles indicated. Accurately machine, file, and fit
exposed connections with hairline joints. Weld exposed joints continuously; grind, fill, dress,
and make smooth, flush, and invisible.
B.
Exposed Fasteners: Provide countersunk flat heads for exposed screws and bolts, unless
otherwise indicated.
C.
Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware, including cutouts,
reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to final hardware schedule and
templates provided by hardware supplier. Secure reinforcement by spot welding. Comply with
applicable requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.115 and A156.115W specifications for door and
frame preparation for hardware. Factory reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 13 - 8
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
hardware. Factory drill and tap for surface-applied hardware, except at pushplates and
kickplates provide reinforcing only.
1.
2.8
Locate hardware according to HMMA 831, "Recommended Hardware Locations for
Custom Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" or otherwise directed by LAWA.
STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A.
General: Clean, treat and prime surfaces of fabricated hollow metal door and frame work,
inside and out, whether exposed or concealed in the construction.
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning"; remove
dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale,
shavings, filings, and rust, if present, complying with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning,"
C.
Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after surface
preparation and pretreatment. Apply a sufficient number of coats, baked on, to obtain
uniformly smooth exposed surfaces. Touch up surfaces having runs, smears, or bare spots.
1.
Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, corrosion-inhibiting,
lead- and chromate-free, universal primer complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance
criteria; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install doors and frames according to the referenced standards, the Architect reviewed
shop drawings, and manufacturer's written recommendations and installation instructions.
B.
Frames: Install frames where indicated. Extend frame anchorages below fills and finishes.
Coordinate the installation of built-in anchors for wall and partition construction as required
with other work.
1.
2.
Frames: Install frames in locations shown, in perfect alignment and elevation, plumb,
level, straight and true, and free from rack.
Welded Frames:
a.
Set masonry anchorage devices where required for securing frames to in-place
concrete or masonry construction.
1)
b.
Set anchorage devices opposite each anchor location as specified and
anchorage device manufacturer's written instructions. Leave drilled holes
rough, not reamed, and free of dust and debris.
Placing Frames: Set frames accurately in position; plumb; align, and brace
securely until permanent anchors are set.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 13 - 9
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
1)
2)
3)
4)
3.
4.
C.
At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
Existing Frames (Salvaged from Alteration Work): Install salvaged existing frames in
locations indicated.
Doors:
1.
Non-Fire Rated Doors: Fit non-fire-rated doors accurately in their respective frames,
with the following clearances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Jambs and Head: 3/32 inch (2 mm).
Meeting Edges, Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Bottom: 3/8 inch (9 mm), if no threshold or carpet.
Bottom: 1/8 inch (3 mm), at threshold or carpet.
Fire-Rated Doors: Install with clearances as specified in NFPA 80.
Smoke Control Doors: Install according to NFPA 105.
Existing Doors (Salvaged from Alteration Work): Install salvaged existing doors in
locations indicated.
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section “Glazing” and with
hollow metal manufacturers written instructions.
1.
E.
At concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure in place with
machine screws and masonry anchorage devices. Countersink anchors, and
fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Anchor bottom of frames to floors through floor anchors with threaded
fasteners.
Field splice only at approved locations indicated on the shop drawings.
Weld, grind, and finish as required to conceal evidence of splicing on
exposed faces.
Remove spreader bars only after frames are properly set and secured.
Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to
make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Secure stops with countersunk flat or oval head machine screws spaced uniformly not
more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. from each
corner.
Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer’s instructions. Drill and tap for
machine screws as required. Do not use self tapping sheet metal screws. Adjust door
installation to provide uniform clearance at head and jambs, and to contact stops uniformly.
Adjust hardware items just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper
operating condition.
1.
Field cut existing hollow metal doors and frames indicated to receive new hardware.
Field cutting shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and shall not void the existing
door and frame labeling.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 13 - 10
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
3.2
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items just before final inspection.
Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work,
including doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
C.
Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or
otherwise defective.
D.
Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to
ensure that hollow metal doors and frames will be without damage or deterioration, at time of
substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 08 11 13
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 13 - 11
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
SECTION 08 11 19 - STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
Stainless-steel, hollow-metal doors.
Stainless-steel, hollow-metal frames.
NOTE: The integration of the existing LAWA Security System into the steel door and frame
work may be required. The Contractor shall be responsible for the total and complete coordination of the security system components of the work.
1.2
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Elevations of each door design.
Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.
Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
Details of each different wall opening condition.
Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
Details of accessories.
Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
Finishes: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than
3 by 5 inches (75 by 125 mm).
Doors: Include section of vertical-edge, top, and bottom construction; core construction;
glazing; and hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement.
Frames: Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include
separate section showing fixed hollow-metal panels and glazing if applicable.
Schedule: Provide a schedule of stainless-steel, hollow-metal work prepared by or under the
supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on
Drawings. Coordinate with a door hardware schedule.
STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 19 - 1
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding
limitations of labeled assemblies.
B.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each type of stainless-steel, hollow-metal door and frame assembly.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain stainless-steel, hollow-metal work from single source from single
manufacturer.
B.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1.
2.
C.
Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies,
provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard
construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for
size.
Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors
that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250
deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.
Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: At corridors, smoke barriers, and smoke
partitions, provide assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with
NFPA 105.
1.
Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) at
the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa) of water.
D.
Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies that are listed and labeled, by a
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated,
based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite. Install in
compliance with NFPA 80.
E.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
B.
Shipping Spreaders: Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of
frames, tack welded or mechanically attached to jambs and mullions.
STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 19 - 2
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
C.
Store doors and frames under cover at Project site. Place units in a vertical position with heads
up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- (100-mm-) high wood blocking. Avoid using
nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber.
1.
1.6
If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before
fabrication.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for stainless-steel frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ambico Limited.
Ceco Door Products; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
CURRIES Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
NOTE: Make provisions for installation of electrical items specified elsewhere; arrange so
wiring can be readily removed and replace. Provide all cutouts and reinforcements required
for steel doors to accept security system components.
2.2
STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS
A.
Description: Stainless-steel doors, not less than 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick, of seamless,
hollow-metal construction. Construct doors with smooth, flush surfaces without visible joints
or seams on faces.
1.
2.
Face Sheets: Fabricate from 0.078-inch- (1.98-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet.
Core Construction: Fabricate doors with core indicated.
STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 19 - 3
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Welded Steel-Stiffened Core: vertical stiffeners extending full-door height, spaced
not more than 6 inches (152 mm) apart, spot welded to face sheets a maximum of 5
inches (127 mm) o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with mineral-fiber insulation.
Laminated Core: foam-plastic insulation fastened to face sheets with waterproof
adhesive.
Fire-Rated Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise
ratings indicated.
Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch (54-mm)
radius.
Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: 0.038-inch- (0.95-mm-) thick stainless steel.
Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Doors: 0.038-inch- (0.95-mm-) thick stainless steel.
Top and Bottom Channels: Closed with continuous channels, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-)
thick stainless steel.
a.
Securely fastened using adhesive.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 866 with
reinforcing plates from stainless steel.
Electrical Hardware Enclosures: Provide enclosures and junction boxes within doors for
electrically operated door hardware, interconnected with UL-approved, 1/2-inch- (12.7mm-) diameter conduit and connectors.
a.
Where indicated for installation of wiring, provide access plates to junction boxes,
fabricate from same material and thickness as face sheet and fasten with at least
four security fasteners spaced not more than 6 inches (152 mm) o.c.
B.
Performance: Level A, ANSI A250.4.
C.
Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, austenitic stainless steel, Type 304 or 316
as indicated.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel
(CS), Type B.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
Foam-Plastic Insulation: Manufacturer's standard polystyrene board insulation with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively,
according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within door.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or
glass fibers.
Stainless-Steel Finishes:
1.
2.
Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross
scratches.
a.
Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 19 - 4
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
b.
c.
2.3
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
STAINLESS-STEEL PANELS
A.
Provide stainless-steel panels of same construction, materials, and finish as specified for
adjoining stainless-steel doors.
NOTE: Make provisions for installation of electrical items specified elsewhere; arrange so
wiring can be readily removed and replace. Provide all cutouts and reinforcements required
for steel doors to accept security system components. Provide welded on sheet metal boxes
with metal conduit or raceway to permit wiring from electric hinge to other electric door
hardware.
2.4
STAINLESS-STEEL FRAMES
A.
Description: Fabricate stainless-steel frames of construction indicated, with faces of corners
mitered and contact edges closed tight.
1.
Door Frames: Saw mitered and full (continuously) welded.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Weld frames according to HMMA 820.
Sidelight Transom and Borrowed-Light Frames: Saw mitered and full (continuously)
welded.
Door Frames for Openings 48 Inches (1219 mm) Wide or Less: Fabricate from 0.078inch- (1.98-mm-) 0.109-inch- (2.78-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet.
Door Frames for Openings More Than 48 Inches (1219 mm) Wide: Fabricate from
0.109-inch- (2.78-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet.
Borrowed-Light Frames: Fabricate from 0.078-inch- (1.98-mm-) thick, stainless-steel
sheet.
Sidelight and Transom Frames: Fabricate from stainless-steel sheet of same thickness as
adjacent door frame.
Glazing and Panel Stops: Formed integral with stainless-steel frames, minimum 5/8 inch
(16 mm) high, unless otherwise indicated.
Loose Stops for Glazed Lites and Panels: 0.038-inch- (0.95-mm-) thick stainless steel.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 866 with
reinforcing plates from stainless steel.
Head Reinforcement: 0.109-inch- (2.78-mm-) thick, stainless-steel channel or angle
stiffener for openings widths more than 48 inches (1219 mm).
Jamb Anchors:
a.
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame
size, not less than 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) thick stainless steel with corrugated or
perforated straps not less than 2 inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long;
or wire anchors not less than 0.156 inch (4.0 mm) thick.
STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 19 - 5
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
b.
c.
d.
12.
Floor Anchors: Not less than 0.078-inch- (1.98-mm-) thick stainless steel, and as
follows:
a.
b.
13.
14.
Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than
0.050-inch- (1.27-mm-) thick stainless steel.
Compression Type for Slip-on Frames: Fabricate adjustable compression anchors
from stainless steel.
Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter, stainless-steel bolts with expansion shields or inserts.
Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to
frame at each anchor location.
Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,
allowing not less than 2-inch (50-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of
frames at finish floor surface.
Ceiling Struts: Minimum 3/8-inch-thick by 2-inch- (9.5-mm-thick by 50-mm-) wide
from stainless steel.
Plaster Guards: Not less than 0.019-inch- (0.48-mm-) thick stainless steel.
B.
Performance: Level A, ANSI A250.4.
C.
Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, austenitic stainless steel, Type 304 or 316
as indicated.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel
(CS), Type B.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
Frame Anchors: Stainless-steel sheet. Same type as door face.
Frame Anchors: Steel sheet, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Stainless-steel components complying with
ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and
ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group 1 or 4) for bolts and nuts.
Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
Finishes:
1.
2.
Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross
scratches.
a.
b.
c.
Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 19 - 6
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
2.5
ACCESSORIES
A.
Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
B.
Grout: Comply with ASTM C 476, with a slump of not more than 4 inches (102 mm) as
measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
C.
Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm)
dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,
sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
D.
Mineral Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass
fibers.
2.6
FABRICATION
A.
Stainless-Steel Door Fabrication: Stainless-steel doors to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or
buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for
thickness of metal.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Seamed Edge Construction: Both vertical door edges joined by visible, continuous
interlocking seam (lock seam) full height of door.
Seamed Edge Construction: Both vertical door edges joined by visible seam that is
projection, spot, or tack welded on inside edges of door at minimum 6 inches (152 mm)
o.c.
Seamless Edge Construction: Door face sheets joined at vertical edges by continuous
weld extending full height of door; with edges ground and polished, providing smooth,
flush surfaces with no visible seams.
Exterior Doors: Close top edges flush and seal joints against water penetration. Provide
weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape.
Stops and Moldings: Factory cut openings in doors. Provide stops and moldings around
glazed lites. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
a.
b.
6.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare stainless-steel doors to receive templated
mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping,
according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in
Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
a.
7.
8.
Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of door.
Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing
and type of installation indicated.
Reinforce doors to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door
hardware.
Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to HMMA 831,
"Recommended Hardware Locations for Custom Hollow Metal Doors and Frames."
Tolerances: Fabricate doors to tolerances indicated in ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 866.
STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 19 - 7
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
B.
Stainless-Steel Frame Fabrication: Fabricate stainless-steel frames to be rigid and free of
defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum
radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant.
To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently
factory assembled before shipment.
1.
2.
Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and
invisible. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated from same
thickness metal as frames.
Mullions Rails and Transom Bars: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face
seams or joints. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding according to
joint designs in HMMA 820.
a.
3.
4.
5.
Provide false head member to receive lower ceiling where frames extend to finish
ceilings of different heights.
Provide countersunk, flat-, or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
c.
Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) in height.
Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) in height.
Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) in height.
Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24
inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof more than 96 inches (2438 mm) in
height.
Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) in height.
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) in height.
Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) in height.
Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24
inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof more than 96 inches (2438 mm) in
height.
Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and
mounted in metal-stud partitions.
Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb.
STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 19 - 8
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
d.
6.
7.
Head Reinforcement: For frames more than 48 inches (1219 mm) wide, provide
continuous head reinforcement for full width of opening, welded to back of frame at
head.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers
as follows. Provide plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction.
a.
b.
8.
b.
c.
b.
11.
Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of
door or frame.
Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings such that
each lite is capable of being removed independently.
Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of
glazing or panel and type of installation indicated.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare stainless-steel frames to receive templated
mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping,
according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in
Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
a.
10.
Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and solid panels
where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline
joints.
a.
9.
Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm)
from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm)
o.c.
Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door
hardware.
Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to HMMA 831,
"Recommended Hardware Locations for Custom Hollow Metal Doors and
Frames."
Plaster Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises and mounting holes
in frames to be grouted.
Tolerances: Fabricate frames to tolerances indicated in ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 866.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stainlesssteel doors and frames.
STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 19 - 9
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
B.
Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of stainlesssteel, door-frame connections before frame installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B.
Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely brace stainlesssteel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
3.3
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line
from head to floor.
Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door
hardware.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install stainless-steel doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely
fastened in place; comply with ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 866 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Stainless-Steel Frames: Install stainless-steel frames of size and profile indicated.
1.
Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations,
field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill,
dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 19 - 10
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
g.
2.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor
and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors, if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion
anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to supporting
construction above, unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at
each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting
construction above. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb
members.
Grouted Frames: Solidly fill space between frames and substrate with grout. Take
precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged
by grout forces.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust stainless-steel frames for squareness, alignment, twist,
and plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Apply corrosion-resistant coating to backs of grout-filled frames.
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line
90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal
line parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
Stainless-Steel Doors: Fit non-fire-rated doors accurately in frames with the following
clearances:
1.
Non-Fire-Rated Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6
mm).
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch (19 mm).
Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.
STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 19 - 11
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
D.
Glazing: Install glazing in sidelights, transoms, and borrowed lights to comply with installation
requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
1.
3.4
Secure stops with countersunk, flat-, or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not
more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c., and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. from each
corner.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work including stainless-steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise
unacceptable.
B.
Clean grout and other bonding material off stainless-steel doors and frames immediately after
installation.
C.
Stainless-Steel Touchup: Immediately after erection, smooth any abraded areas of stainless
steel and polish to match undamaged finish.
END OF SECTION 08 11 19
STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 19 - 12
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes door hardware.
NOTE: All door hardware for public rest rooms shall be stainless steel.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit product data including installation details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Samples: Submit samples of exposed door hardware for each type indicated below, in
specified finish. Tag with full description for coordination with the Door Hardware Schedule.
1.
Door Hardware: As follows:
a.
b.
2.
C.
Locks and latches.
Operating trim.
Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain
undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final
check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying
requirements.
Door Hardware Schedule: Submit door hardware schedule prepared by or under the
supervision of door hardware supplier. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with
doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of
door hardware. The Architect’s review of schedule shall neither be construed as a complete
check nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors, deviations, or omissions
from the specified requirements to provide complete door hardware for the project.
1.
Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating
complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.
2.
Content: Include the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 1
Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item.
Manufacturer of each item.
Fastenings and other pertinent information.
Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor
plans and in door and frame schedule.
Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
f.
g.
h.
Mounting locations for door hardware. Supply templates to door and frame
manufacturer(s) to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cutouts for
hardware. Detail conditions requiring custom extended lip strikes, or other
special or custom conditions.
Door and frame sizes and materials.
Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location,
sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems.
1)
Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions that
occur in the following situations: authorized person wants to enter;
authorized person wants to exit; unauthorized person wants to enter;
unauthorized person wants to exit.
D.
Keying Schedule: Submit keying schedule prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,
detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and
index each key set to unique door designations.
E.
Warranties: Submit special warranties specified in this Section.
F.
Fire-Rated Door Assembly Testing: Submit a written record of each fire door assembly to
LAWA and to the LADBS for future building inspections.
NOTE: Perform a field survey of each opening prior to submitting shop drawings. Verify the
appropriateness of the assigned hardware group for the designated opening.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier, who has completed a minimum of three (3)
projects over the last 5 years which were similar in material, design and extent to that indicated
for the project and which have resulted in construction with a record of successful in service
performance, and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available
during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door
hardware and keying.
1.
Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless
otherwise indicated.
D.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following:
1.
Provide hardware items complying with the applicable provisions for accessibility and
usability by the disabled and handicapped in compliance with Americans with
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 2
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
2.
3.
4.
E.
Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
(ADAAG),".
NFPA 101: Comply with applicable provisions for means of egress doors.
Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and classified by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. or
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, as suitable for the
purpose indicated.
LADBS requirements.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80
that are listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. for fire ratings indicated, based
on testing according to NFPA 252. Provide only door hardware items that are identical to
items tested by UL for the types and sizes of doors required. In case of conflict between type
of hardware specified and type required for accessibility or fire protection, furnish type
required by NFPA and UL. Doors indicated in fire rated partitions and walls shall be positive
latching and self-closing, with smoke gaskets where required by applicable codes.
1.
Wherever exit device hardware is required on doors, comply with UL 305. Furnish
hardware to door manufacturer for installation at factory. Provide supplementary label,
"Fire Exit Hardware", on each exit device to certify that panic hardware has been panic
load tested with door.
F.
Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with LAWA requirements.
Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door
hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
The degree of security required,
2.
Preliminary key system schematic diagram.
3.
LAWA Requirements for key control system.
4.
Address for delivery of keys to LAWA.
G.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with LAWA keying
and security requirements. Review methods and procedures related to electrified door hardware
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by
other trades.
Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware.
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to
Project site. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door
Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 3
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Templates: Furnish templates and door hardware schedules, coordinated for the application of
door hardware items with door and frame details, to door opening fabricators and trades
performing door opening work to permit the preparation of doors and frames to receive the
specified door hardware. Where the door hardware item scheduled is not adaptable to the
finished size of door opening members requiring door hardware, submit an item having a
similar operation and quality to the Architect for review. Each door hardware item shall be
fabricated to templates.
NOTE: Coordinate the layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections
to power supplies, fire alarms systems and detection devices, access control system, security
system and the building control system.
B.
1.6
Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing
construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify
existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and
to provide proper door operation.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace
components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
Faulty operation of door hardware.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
B.
Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Warranty Period for Manual Closers: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
D.
Warranty Period for Concealed Floor Closers: Five years from date of Substantial
Completion.
E.
Warranty Period for Exit Devices: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
F.
Warranty Period for Other Hardware: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
G.
Warranty for Mortised Mechanical Lock and Latchsets: Ten years from date of Substantial
Completion.
H.
Warranty for Heavy Duty Cylindrical Mechanical Lock and Latchsets: Seven years from date
of Substantial Completion.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 4
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A.
General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section,
door hardware sets are keyed to each scheduled door in the door and frame schedule, and the
Door Hardware Schedule.
1.
2.
Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named
manufacturer's products.
The hardware supplier shall review each hardware set and compare it with the door
types, details, and sizes as shown and verify each hardware item for function, hand,
backset, and method of fastening through shop drawing submittals.
ITEM
Hinges and Electric Hinges
Key System
Locks
Exit Devices
Flush Bolts/Dust Proof Strike
Coordinator
Closers
Push & Pull Plates
Kickplates/Moplates
Magnetic Catches
Magnetic Holder
Stops & Holders
Power Supply
Power Transfer
Thresholds
Astragals/Seals/ Bottoms
Silencers
Decals
Door Contacts
Electric Strike
Cyberlock Cylinder
Bottom Rail Lock
Floor Stop & Miscellaneous
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 5
MANUFACTURER
(STN) Stanley
(SCH) Schlage
(SCH) Schlage
(VON) Von Duprin
(IVE) Ives
(IVE) Ives
(LCN) LCN
(IVE) Ives
(IVE) Ives
(ROC) Rockwood
(RIX) Rixson
(IVE) Ives
(VON) Von Duprin
(VON) Von Duprin
(PEM) Pemko
(PEM) Pemko
(IVE) Ives
(VON) Von Duprin
(GES) General Electric Security
(FAS) Folger Adam Security
(VID) Videx Key System
(ARC) Adams Rite
(TRM) Trimco
ACCEPTABLE SUB
Hager, Zero, Select
Owner’s Standard
Owner’s Standard
Owner’s Standard
Owner’s Standard
Rockwood, Trimco
Rockwood, Trimco
Or Equal
Rockwood, Trimco
Zero, NGP,
Zero, NGP
Flair
Von Duprin
Rockwood
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
2.2
HINGING METHODS
A.
Conventional Hinges: High strength stainless steel pins with concealed bearings.
2.3
LOCKS AND LATCHES
A.
Mortise Lock and Latch Sets: Heavy duty, commercial, mortise bodies complying with
BHMA A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1, with throughbolted lever trim. Furnish mortise type,
field reversible without disassembly, field multifunctional without opening lock cases, lock
and latch sets with 1 or 2 piece anti-friction deadlocking stainless steel latchbolts having a
minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) throw, 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset, and UL listed for 3 hour
doors. All lock and latch sets, to be furnished complete with heavy 0.109 inch (2.77 mm) (12
gage) wrought steel zinc dichromate or chrome plated case, trim, adjustable beveled square
cornered armored fronts, cold forged steel or stainless steel hubs, and 6 pin cylinders. Conceal
fastenings, washers and bushings. Provide wrought, or black plastic, box strikes for each lock
and latch set. Provide brass, bronze or stainless steel strikes with curved lips of sufficient
length to protect frames. Provide solid forged or cast levers with wrought roses. Where
electro-mechanical locksets are scheduled provide transformers properly sized for conversion
of power supply to the power characteristics of the electromechanical locksets. Where electromechanical locksets are scheduled provide request to exit (REX) monitoring feature.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.4
Chassis: cold-rolled steel, handing field-changeable without disassembly.
Latchbolts: 3/4 inch throw stainless steel anti-friction type.
Lever Trim: through-bolted, accessible design, cast lever or solid extruded bar type levers
as scheduled. Filled hollow tube design unacceptable. Provide security design independent breakaway spindles. Breakage of outside lever shall not allow access to inside lever’s
hubworks to gain wrongful entry.
Thumbturns: accessible design not requiring pinching or twisting motions to operate.
Deadbolts: stainless steel 1-inch throw.
Electric operation: Manufacturer-installed continuous duty solenoid.
Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with 1 inch deep box construction, lips of
sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing.
Scheduled Lock Series and Design: Schlage L series, 03A design.
Certifications:
a) ANSI A156.13, 1994, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security.
b) ANSI/ASTM F476-84 Grade 31 UL Listed.
EXIT DEVICES
A.
Exit Devices: Exit devices and exit device accessories shall conform to BHMA A156.3, Grade
1. Trim shall be wrought construction and commercial plain design with straight, beveled or
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 6
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
smoothly rounded sides, corners and edges. Keyed devices shall be furnished less cylinders.
Cylinders shall be as herein specified keyed to building system.
B.
Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to the
LADBS, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Specific features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.5
Independent lab-tested 1,000,000 cycles.
Push-through push-pad design. No exposed push-pad fasteners, no exposed cavities
when operated. Return stroke fluid dampeners and rubber bottoming dampeners, plus
anti-rattle devices.
0.75-inch throw deadlocking latchbolts.
End caps: impact-resistant, flush-mounted. No raised edges or lips to catch carts or other equipment.
No exposed screws to show through glass doors.
Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all functions, no
extra parts required to effect change of function.
Releasable in normal operation with 15-lb. maximum operating force per UBC Standard
10-4, and with 32 lb. maximum pressure under 250-lb. load to the door.
Flush end cap design as opposed to typical "bottle-cap" design end cap.
Comply with CBC Section 1003.3.1.9.
Non-Fire Rated Devices: cylinder dogging.
Lever Trim: Breakaway type, forged brass or bronze escutcheon min .130” thickness,
compression spring drive, match lockset lever design.
Rod and latch guards with sloped full-width kickplates for doors fitted with surface vertical rod devices with bottom latches.
Fire-Labeled Devices: UL label indicating “Fire Exit Hardware”. Vertical rod devices
less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise scheduled.
Delayed Egress Devices: Function achieved within single exit device component, including latch, delayed locking device, request-to-exit switch, nuisance alarm, remote alarm,
key switch, indicator lamp, relay, internal horn, door position input, external inhibit input plus fire alarm input. NFPA 101 “Special Locking Arrangement” compliant.
Electrically Operated Devices: Single manufacturer source for electric latch retraction
devices, electrically controlled trim, power transfers, power supplies, monitoring switches and controls.
CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A.
Cores for Bored Cylindrical Locksets: Provide key-in lever 6 pin cores for all bored
cylindrical locksets, keyed into base building system, as manufactured by the bored lockset
manufacturer.
B.
Cylinders: Full faced cylinders with square shouldered (not tapered) compression rings, 6 pin
cylinders, standard threaded, keyed into building system, with cams to suit lock functions.
Provide cylinders for installation into all locks.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 7
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
1.
2.
3.
C.
Keying System: Final keying to determine lock cylinders, keyed alike sets, level of keying,
master key groups, grandmaster keying system shall be as directed by the LAWA. Supplier
and Contractor shall meet with the LAWA and obtain final instructions in writing. Provide 2
nickel silver keys for each lock, and 6 keys for each grandmaster and masterkey system.
Provide 2 blank keys for each lock for the LAWA’s convenience in making additional keys.
1.
D.
2.6
Temporary Cylinders: Provide temporary cylinders in locks during construction and as
may be necessary for security or as may be requested by the LAWA. All temporary
cylinders shall be individually keyed as required and subject to a single master key.
Key Control System: Furnish a key control system with complete accessories including key
gathering envelopes, labels, reserve pattern key tags with self-locking key clips, key receipt
forms, key receipt holders, 3 way visible card index, temporary key markers and permanent
key markers.
STRIKES
A.
Strikes for Locks and Latches: All strikes for locks and latches shall be provided by the lock
and latch manufacturer unless otherwise specified or scheduled, refer to Article ‘Locks and
Latches’.
B.
Dustproof Floor Strikes: Complying with BHMA A156.16, Type L04251, L04021 or L14021,
one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
No. 80; Door Controls International.
DP2; H.B. Ives.
3910; Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. (TBM).
570; Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).
Electric Strikes: Complying with BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. Mortised type for devices
mounted in hollow metal frames. Unless otherwise required to interphase with the security
access system furnish in 24 volt DC continuous voltage for silent operation. Provide each
strike with extended lips as required to suit jamb conditions and fail secure function. Remote
electrical control from card reader or control panel will unlock strike jaw, releasing latchbolt of
the deadlatch, so door can be opened without operating latch by key cylinders from outside of
secured room. Electric strikes shall be UL listed for up to 3 hour fire door assemblies.
1.
2.7
1100 Series Flexible Head Mortise Cylinder; Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware
(CR).
Series 40 Adjustable Front Cylinder; Sargent Manufacturing Company (SGT).
30-001 full-faced mortised cylinder with 36-083 compression rings; Schlage Lock
Company (SCH).
6200 Series Electric Strikes; Von Duprin.
CLOSERS
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 8
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
A.
Surface-Mounted Closers: Closers shall be certified by ETL laboratories and the manufacturer
to a minimum of 8,000,000 cycles and meet BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. Closers used in
conjunction with overhead stops and holders shall be templated and coordinated to function
properly. Properly detail closers to meet application requirements by providing drop plates,
brackets, etc. to meet application and installation requirements as indicated. Comply with
manufacturers recommendations for size of door closer depending on size of door, stack
pressure conditions, and anticipated frequency of use. Closers shall have adjustable spring
power, full rack and pinion, independent closing speed and latch regulating V-slotted valves,
fully hydraulic with a high strength cast iron cylinder and solid forged steel arms, bore
diameter of 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm), pinion shaft diameter of 5/8 inches (15.87 mm), adjustable
back check, cushion and built-in stop feature where scheduled, hold open arms where
scheduled, delayed action where scheduled, arm finish to match closer cover finish scheduled.
Provide metal covers of clean line design with plated or primed for paint finish as scheduled
and that require removal in order to make adjustments to closer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
2.8
Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover and cast iron
body. Double heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece forged piston, chrome-silicon steel
spring.
ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date-of-manufacture code.
Independent lab-tested 10,000,000 cycles.
Non-sized, non-handed, and adjustable. Place closer inside building, stairs, and rooms.
Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with particular
header, door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware.
Adjustable to open with not more than 5.0lbs pressure to open at exterior doors and
5.0lbs at interior doors. As allowed per California Building Code, Section 1133B.2.5,
local authority may increase the allowable pressure for fire doors to achieve positive
latching, but not to exceed 15lbs.
Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and backcheck, fourth valve
for delayed action where scheduled.
Extra-duty arms (EDA) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units.
Exterior door closers: tested to 100 hours of ASTM B117 salt spray test, furnish data on
request.
Exterior doors do not require seasonal adjustments in temperatures from 120o F to –30o
F, furnish data on request.
Non-flaming fluid, will not fuel door or floor covering fires.
Pressure Relief Valves (PRV): unsafe, not permitted.
PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
A.
Kick and Armor Plates: Fabricate protection plates from minimum 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick
stainless steel, beveled top and 2 sides (B3E), square corners, complying with BHMA A156.6,
and fastened with oval head Phillips fasteners countersunk into plate surface.
1.
2.
3.
Series 8400; H. B. Ives (IVS).
K1050 Doorplate Series; Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).
KA050-2 Armor Plate and KOO50 for Kickplates; Triangle Brass Manufacturing
Company, Inc. (TBM).
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 9
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
B.
Size: Furnish kick and armor plates sized 2 inches (51 mm) less than door width. Furnish
kickplates 12 inches (305 mm) high, furnish armor plates 48 inches (1219 mm) high unless
otherwise indicated. Provide protective plates with cutouts for locks, louvers and windows to
the extent indicated. Mount protective plates flush with bottom of door.
2.9
OTHER HARDWARE
A.
Automatic Flush Bolts: Low operating force design, “LBR” type where scheduled.
B.
Overhead Stops: Stainless steel (100 series). Non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end
caps. Field-changeable hold-open, friction and stop-only functions.
C.
Door Stops: Provide stops to protect walls, casework or other hardware.
1.
2.
D.
Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide wall type with appropriate fasteners.
Where wall type cannot be used, provide floor type. If neither can be used, provide overhead type.
Locate overhead stops for maximum possible opening. Consult with Owner for furniture locations. Minimum: 90o stop / 95o deadstop. Note degree of opening in submittal.
Seals: Finished to match adjacent frame color. Resilient seal material: polypropylene, nylon
brush, or solid high-grade neoprene. UL label applied to seals on rated doors. Substitute
products: certify that the products equal or exceed specified material’s thickness and durability.
Proposed substitutions: submit for approval.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Solid neoprene: MIL Spec. R6855-CL III, Grade 40.
Non-corroding fasteners at in-swinging exterior doors.
Fire-rated Doors, Resilient Seals: UL10C / UBC Standard 7-2 compliant. Coordinate with
selected door manufacturers' and selected frame manufacturers' requirements. Where rigid
housed resilient seals are scheduled in this section and the selected door manufacturer only
requires an adhesive-mounted resilient seal, furnish rigid housed seal at minimum, or both
the rigid housed seal plus the adhesive applied seal. Adhesive applied seals alone are
deemed insufficient for this project where rigid housed seals are scheduled.
Thresholds: Comply with CBC Section 1133B.2.4.1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Exteriors: Seal perimeter to exclude water and vermin. Use butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene
sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 "Thermal and Moisture Protection". Nonferrous 1/4inch fasteners and lead expansion shield anchors, or Red-Head #SFS-1420 (or
approved equivalent) Flat Head Sleeve Anchors (SS/FHSL).
Fire-rated openings, 90min or less duration: use thresholds to interrupt floor covering material
under the door where that material has a critical radiant flux value less than 0.22 watts per
square centimeter, per NFPA 253. Use threshold unit as scheduled. If none scheduled, request
direction from Architect.
Fire-rated openings, 3hour duration: Thresholds, where scheduled, to extend full jamb depth.
Plastic plugs with wood or sheet metal screws are not an acceptable substitute for specified
fastening methods.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 10
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
D.
Fasteners: Generally, exposed screws to be Phillips or Robertson drive. Pinned TORX drive at
high security areas. Flat head sleeve anchors (FHSL) may be slotted drive. Sheet metal and
wood screws: full-thread. Sleeve nuts: full length to prevent door compression.
E.
Silencers: Interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 4 for pairs of doors. Omit where
adhesive mounted seal occurs. Leave no unfilled/uncovered pre-punched silencer holes.
2.10
FABRICATION
A.
Manufacturer's Nameplate: Provide each door hardware item without exposed manufacturers
labels, names, or designs.
B.
Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to
commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips ovalhead screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware item being attached.
Machine screws and expansion shields shall be used for attaching hardware to concrete and
masonry. Use throughbolts for renovation work only where existing door blocking and
reinforcements are unknown.
1.
2.11
A.
Concealed Fasteners: All new doors and door frames have been specified with adequate
blocking and reinforcement provisions to eliminate exposed throughbolting of hardware
items. Doors installed with exposed throughbolts will be rejected and replaced by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner. Where through bolts are used on existing doors
provide sleeves for each through bolt.
FINISHES
Designations: The abbreviations used to schedule hardware finishes are generally BHMA
(Federal Standards where indicated in parenthesis) designations. Comply with base material
and finish requirements indicated by the following:
1.
2.
3.
BHMA 600 (USP): Primed for painting.
BHMA 626 (US26D): Satin chromium plated.
BHMA 630 (US32D): Satin stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Hardware for fire door assemblies shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 80. Hardware
for smoke and draft control door assemblies shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 105.
Install hardware for non-labeled and non-smoke and draft door assemblies in accordance with
BHMA A156.115 for steel doors and frames, BHMA A156.115-W series for wood doors, and
hardware manufacturers installation instructions for doors and frames fabricated from other
than steel or wood.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 11
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
1.
B.
All modifications to fire doors and frame for electric and mortised hardware shall be
made by the respective door and frame manufacturers.
Smoke Seals at S Labeled Door Assemblies: Provide and install smoke seals at S labeled
doors in accordance with door manufacturers instructions.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at the following heights, unless specifically
indicated on the drawings or required to comply with LADBS regulations:
1.
2.
Locate levers, key cylinders, t-turn pieces, touchbars and other operable portions of
latching hardware between 30 inches to 44 inches above the finished floor, per CBC
Section 1133B.2.5.1.
Where new hardware is to be installed near existing doors/hardware scheduled to
remain, match locations of existing hardware.
B.
Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install
overhead surface closers for maximum degree of opening obtainable. Place on room side of
corridor doors, stair side of stair doors, secondary corridor side of doors between corridors.
Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are
later to be finished, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim
units. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates
involved.
C.
Existing frames and doors scheduled to receive new hardware: carefully remove existing
hardware, tag and bag, and turn over to LAWA.
1.
2.
Metal doors/frames: Weld or fasten with screws: filler pieces in existing hardware cut-outs
and mortises not scheduled for re-use by new hardware. Leave surfaces smooth - - no applied patches.
Remove unused existing floor closers, fill empty floor closer cavities with concrete.
D.
Do not install permanent key cylinders in locks until the time of preliminary acceptance by the
Owner. At the time of preliminary acceptance, and in the presence of LAWA, permanent key
all lock cylinders. Record and file all keys in the key control system, and turn system over to
LAWA for sole possession and control.
E.
Key control storage system shall be installed where directed by the LAWA.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper
operation or function of every hardware component. Replace hardware components that
cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for
building stack pressures, final operation of forced air mechanical equipment and to comply
with referenced accessibility requirements.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 12
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
1.
2.
B.
3.4
Test each electrical hardware item to determine if devices are properly functioning.
Wiring shall be tested for correct voltage, current carrying capacity, and proper
grounding. Stray voltages in wiring shall be eliminated.
Coordinate with electrical installation for interface and connection with life safety and
security systems.
Fire-Rated Door Assembly Testing: Upon completion of the installation, test each fire door
assembly in the project to confirm proper operation of its closing device and that it meets all
criteria of a fire door assembly as per NFPA 80 2007 Edition. The inspection of the fire doors
is to be performed by individuals with knowledge and understanding of the operation
components of the type of door being subjected to testing. A written record shall be maintained
and transmitted to LAWA and be made available to the LADBS. The record shall list each fire
door assembly throughout the project, and include each door number, an itemized list of
hardware set components at each door opening, and each door location in the facility.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. Clean hardware components as
necessary to restore proper finish. Provide protection during the progress of the work and
maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is in perfect working order and without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 13
Doors and Frames
Guide Specification
SECTION 09 22 16 – NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes non-structural metal framing assemblies.
ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.3
1.
Typical Walls: Wall assemblies shall be constructed for deflection not to exceed 1/240 of
the wall height when subjected to a positive and negative pressure of 5 psf (239 kPa).
2.
Walls with Tile or Stone Finish: Wall assemblies to receive tile finishes shall be
constructed for deflection not to exceed 1/360 of the wall height when subjected to a
positive and negative pressure of 5 psf (239 kPa). L/600 where supporting stone.
3.
Ceilings, bulkheads, soffits, ceiling transitions, ledges, and coves shall be constructed for
a deflection not to exceed 1/360 of the distance between supports.
4.
Partitions Enclosing Pressurized Mechanical Rooms: Provide metal framing systems of
base metal thickness and spacing capable of limiting lateral deflections to L/240 when
subjected to a 15 psf uniform lateral load or the desing value induced by the mechanical
system, whichever is greater.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit product data for each product indicated.
B.
Evaluation Reports: Provide LARR identification numbers for Metal Studs, Fasteners, and
Suspension Ceilings.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For non-structural metal framing assemblies with fireresistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly
indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory."
B.
Sound Transmission Characteristics: For non-structural metal framing faced with gypsum
wallboard materials and having STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to
those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.
C.
STC-Rated Assemblies:
Design Manual."
Indicated by design designations from GA-600, "Fire Resistance
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 1
Walls
Guide Specification
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B.
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
1.6
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A.
1.7
Prior to start of the non-structural metal framing Work, and at the Contractors direction, meet at
the site and review the installation procedures and coordination with other Work. Meeting shall
include Contractor, Architect and major material manufacturer as well as the Installer and other
subcontractors whose Work must be coordinated with the non-structural metal framing and the
gypsum wallboard Work.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with ASTM C754 requirements or wallboard material manufacturer’s written
recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
General: For fire rated assemblies, provide materials, including accessories and fasteners
produced by one manufacturer, or, when products of more than one manufacturer are used in a
rated system, they shall be acceptable to the Los Angeles Department of Building and Safety.
STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING FRAMING
A.
Components, General: Provide steel framing members sized and spaced as indicated but not
less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the maximum deflection conditions
specified under Article ‘Assembly Performance Requirements’.
B.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-)
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
C.
Hanger Attachments to Overhead Decks: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials, with eyepins, clips or other devices for attaching hangers and
capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by the complete
ceiling system.
D.
Hangers: As follows:
1.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch
(4.12-mm) diameter.
2.
Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M), mild carbon steel.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 2
Walls
Guide Specification
a.
b.
3.
Diameter: 1/4-inch (6.34-mm).
Protective Coating: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized.
Flat Hangers:
galvanized.
a.
Commercial-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip
Size: 1 by 3/16 inch (25.4 by 4.76 mm) by length indicated.
E.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538
inch (1.37 mm), a minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange, with manufacturer's standard
corrosion-resistant zinc coating.
F.
Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
1.
Cold Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep.
2.
Steel Studs: ASTM C 645, 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm) minimum base metal thickness and
minimum depth as required to suit deflection criteria.
3.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep.
a.
4.
G.
2.3
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep members designed to reduce
sound transmission.
Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of
main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING
A.
General: Provide steel framing members sized and spaced as indicated but not less than that
required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the maximum deflection conditions specified
under Article ‘Assembly Performance Requirements’.
1.
2.
B.
In areas where top of partitions are dependent on ceiling system for lateral support,
coordinate design and installation to comply with the above deflection limitation.
Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, in minimum depth indicated in partition type details.
1.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness:
a.
b.
2.
Typical: As required to comply with deflection criteria.
Partitions Supporting Wall Mounted Casework: 16 gauge (0.053 inch) (1.3 mm)
minimum thickness.
Depth: As indicated.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 3
Walls
Guide Specification
C.
Deflection Track: ASTM C645 top runner with custom fabricated flanges with depths sized to
accommodate roof and floor deck live and dead load deflections but not less than 2 inch (50.8
mm) deep flanges. Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of gypsum board
applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness indicated
for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs; one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Firestop Track: ASTM C645 top runner with custom fabricated flanges with depths sized to
accommodate roof and floor deck live and dead load deflections but not less than 2 inch (50.8
mm) deep flanges. Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract
with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly
indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of
studs; one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: For channel bridging for fixture attachment or lateral bracing
provide 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide
flange:
1.
2.
G.
CEMCO; FAS Track
Fire Trak Corp; Fire Trak System
Metal-Lite, Inc; The System
The Steel Network, Inc: VertiClip SLD Series or VertiTrack VTD Series, Durham, NC.
,
Flat Strap and Backing Plate: 36 -inch (914-mm) wide steel sheet for blocking and bracing
required for the attachment of surface mounted items and accessories indicated.
1.
F.
CEMCO; CST, slotted Track.
Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track.
MBA Building Supplies; Slotted Deflecto Track
Steel Network Incl; VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series.
Superior metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT)
Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track.
Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm).
Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73-mm-) thick,
galvanized steel.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1.
2.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm).
Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm).
H.
Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce
sound transmission.
I.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members securely to substrates involved; complying
with the recommendations of the gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 4
Walls
Guide Specification
NOTE: On the drawings, indicate the locations for each type of metal framing, fasteners,
furring or suspension system with the required spacing and corresponding thickness with
their related LARR number.
2.4
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex
sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne
sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as
demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates to which non-structural metal framing attaches or abuts, installed door
frames and structural framing with Installer present for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this
Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
1.
2.
3.3
Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling
runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed-on fire-resistive materials.
Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building
structure not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary
for installation of the non-structural metal framing and without reducing the fire-resistive
material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated.
Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.
INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A.
General: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C754, ASTM C840 and the gypsum board
manufacturers recommendations, where standards conflict the more stringent shall apply.
B.
Install supplementary framing, blocking, backerplates and bracing at locations in gypsum board
assemblies which are indicated to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars,
toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with
gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States
Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook."
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 5
Walls
Guide Specification
C.
Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural
movement.
1.
2.
Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure.
Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install
slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally
support assembly.
a.
b.
3.4
Use deep-leg deflection track where indicated.
Use proprietary firestop track where indicated.
INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING FRAMING
A.
Suspended Ceiling Framing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Suspend ceiling hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects
within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension
system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards.
Attach hangers to structural members. Do not support ceilings from or attach hangers to
permanent metal forms, steel deck tabs, steel roof decks, ducts, pipes, or conduit.
Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, to eyescrews, or other devices and
fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause
them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Secure rod and flat hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and
hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
B.
Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members
for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured
lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.
C.
Wire-tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for
assemblies indicated.
D.
Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacings indicated, but not less than
that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards unless more stringent
spacings are recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer.
E.
Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system
meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 6
Walls
Guide Specification
3.5
INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING
A.
Install continuous runners (tracks) sized to match studs at floors, ceilings, and structural walls
and columns where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction. Secure runners to
substrates with fasteners spaced a maximum of 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. unless closer spacing is
recommended by the framing manufacturer for the floor and ceiling construction involved.
Provide fasteners at all corners and ends of runner tracks.
1.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install foam gasket isolation strip
between studs and wall.
B.
Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary
not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.
C.
Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended
ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings and at partial
height partitions. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts
penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Cut studs 1/2 inch (13 mm) short of full height to provide perimeter relief.
For fire-resistance-rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of
floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings,
install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and
decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous
from floor to underside of solid structure.
Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated.
Terminate partial height partition framing as indicated.
Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacing indicated but not less than that required by
the referenced steel framing installation standard to comply with maximum deflection and
minimum loading requirements specified, unless more stringent requirements are recommended
by the gypsum board manufacturer:
1.
Space studs 16 inches (400 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel
can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
F.
Install backerplates for support of wall mounted items.
G.
Curved Partitions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cut top and bottom track (runners) through leg and web at 2-inch (50-mm) intervals for
arc length. In cutting lengths of track, allow for uncut straight lengths of not less than 12
inches (300 mm) at ends of arcs.
Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
Support outside (cut) leg of track by clinching steel sheet strip, 1-inch- (25-mm-) highby-thickness of track metal, to inside of cut legs using metal lock fasteners.
Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs at
stud spacing recommended in writing by gypsum board manufacturer for radii indicated.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 7
Walls
Guide Specification
On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm)
o.c.
H.
Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable
written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb
anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to
jamb studs.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. Install one additional stud no
more than 6 inches (150 mm) from jamb studs at single doors greater than 48 inches
(1200 mm) and at all pairs of doors.
Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud. Provide runner track and typical
studs above door openings with studs spaced not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
At all welded frames with fixed anchor clips secure stud reinforcing to jamb anchor clips
with not less than two self tapping screws per clip.
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof
structure above.
I.
Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless
otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above
door heads.
J.
Isolation Strip Attachment: Where partitions abut exterior wall window mullions, and partition
filler panels are not indicated, adhesively attach isolation strips to window mullions. Center
isolation strips on mullion to form a continuous, sound resistant and lightproof, recessed joint
seal for the entire length of the interface between the partition studs and trim members and the
vertical window mullions.
3.6
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean floors of all non-structural metal framing debris and leave broom clean. Excess material,
scaffolding, tools and other equipment are to be removed upon completion of the Work.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensures non-structural metal framing
Work remains without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 22 16
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 8
Walls
Guide Specification
SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes gypsum board assemblies.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit product data for each product indicated.
B.
Samples: Submit full size samples in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long lengths for each exposed trim
accessory indicated.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings,
provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory."
B.
Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.
C.
STC-Rated Assemblies:
Design Manual."
D.
Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other
panel products from a single manufacturer.
E.
Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the
same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer
acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer.
1.4
Indicated by design designations from GA-600, "Fire Resistance
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B.
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 1
Walls
Guide Specification
C.
1.5
Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces.
otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.
Do not bend or
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A.
1.6
Prior to start of each type of gypsum wallboard system, and at the Contractors direction, meet at
the site and review the installation procedures and coordination with other Work. Meeting shall
include Contractor, Architect and major material manufacturer as well as the Installer and other
subcontractors whose Work must be coordinated with the gypsum wallboard Work.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with ASTM C840 requirements or wallboard material manufacturer’s written
recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Installation of wallboard joint treatments shall not start until the space to receive wall board
joint treatments is heated to maintain a continuous and uniform temperature of not less than 55
degrees F, from one week prior to beginning of joint treatment until joint treatment is completed
and thoroughly dry. Ventilation, either natural or supplied by fans, circulators or air
conditioning systems shall be provided to remove excess moisture during joint treatment.
Temperature requirements may be waived only on recommendation of wallboard materials
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
General: For fire rated assemblies, provide materials, including accessories and fasteners
produced by one manufacturer, or, when products of more than one manufacturer are used in a
rated system, they shall be acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A.
Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and correspond with support system indicated.
B.
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 or ASTM C1396/C1396M.
1.
Regular Type:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Location: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
Type X:
a.
b.
c.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 2
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
Long Edges: Tapered.
Location: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
Walls
Guide Specification
NOTE:
d. On the drawings indicate the locations for each type of gypsum board and tile
3.backing units using the same terminology as in these specifications. On the drawings place
UL or LARR numbers for all fire rated gypsum and cementitious backer unit assemblies.
C.
Flexible Gypsum Wallboard for Curved Surfaces: ASTM C 36 or ASTM C1396/C1396M,
manufactured to bend to fit tight radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type panels
of the same thickness.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
Long Edges: Tapered.
Location: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies.
Sag-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard for Interior Ceilings:
ASTM C 36 or ASTM
C1396/C1396M, manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.
1.
2.
3.
Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
Long Edges: Tapered.
Location: Ceiling surfaces.
NOTE: Use Impact Resistant Gypsum Board in areas susceptible to high abuse and the use of
alternative materials is not feasible. Use a minimum of 20 gauge metal framing as support.
2.3
TILE BACKING PANELS
A.
Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and correspond with support system indicated.
B.
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M or ASTM C1396/C1396M.
1.
C.
Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9, in thickness indicated.
1.
Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
NOTE: For adhesive applied ceramic tile in rest rooms, use cementitious back units as a substrate. When using water-resistant gypsum backing board at tile applications, the metal studs
shall be spaced at 16 inches on center.When using water resistant backing board on ceilings
spacing of supports shall be 12 inches on center.
2.4
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Steel Trim Accessories: ASTM C 1047; formed metal sheet steel zinc coated by hot
dipped process. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C1047.
1.
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 3
Walls
Guide Specification
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.5
LC-Bead with both face and back flanges to receive joint compound; use at exposed
panel edges.
U-Bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without application of
joint compound: Use where indicated.
Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved openings.
Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with
removable strip covering slot opening. Use where indicated.
Aluminum Trim Accessories: Extruded aluminum trim with 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) diameter holes
in fins for attachment to wallboard or studs; longest lengths available in profiles indicated;
primed for finish painting; sized for scheduled wallboard thickness shown.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General:
Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the
recommendations of both the manufacturers of the wallboard products and joint treatment
materials for each application indicated.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
2.
C.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, flanges of trim
accessories, and fasteners, use setting-type taping compound.
Second coat: For filling over tape, beads and fasteners. Use setting-type, sandable
topping compound.
Third coat: For finishing over tape, beads and fasteners. Use drying-type, all-purpose
compound.
Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1.
2.
2.6
Interior Gypsum Wallboard over Metal Studs: Paper.
Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type,
sandable topping compounds.
Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by manufacturer.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex
sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 4
Walls
Guide Specification
sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as
demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
C.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
D.
For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
Sound Attenuation Blankets, and Fire Resistive Insulation for Installation Within Gypsum
Wallboard Partitions: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by
combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from slag wool, or rock wool.
1.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies:
assembly.
Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of
NOTE: Sound insulation is required in all rest room walls.
E.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering
gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed door frames and
structural framing with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS
A.
Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to
comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and the gypsum wallboard manufacturer’s
recommendations, where standards conflict, the more stringent shall apply.
B.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
C.
Single-Layer Application:
1.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. Install ceiling
board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of
adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 5
Walls
Guide Specification
2.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end
joints or avoid them entirely.
a.
b.
D.
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of board.
At high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by
fire-resistance-rated assembly.
Multilayer Application:
1.
On Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer
joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger
joints on opposite sides of partitions.
2.
On Ceilings: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers
on walls/partitions; apply base layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles
to framing members and offset face layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum,
from parallel base joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated
assembly.
E.
Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
F.
Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
G.
Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate
(other than studs, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until
fastening adhesive has set.
H.
Curved Partitions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install panels horizontally and unbroken, to the extent possible, across curved surface
plus 12 inches (300 mm) long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.
Wet gypsum panels on surfaces that will become compressed where curve radius
prevents using dry panels. Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written
recommendations for curve radii, wetting methods, stacking panels after wetting, and
other preparations that precede installing wetted gypsum panels.
On convex sides of partitions, begin installation at one end of curved surface and fasten
gypsum panels to studs as they are wrapped around curve. On concave side, start
fastening panels to stud at center of curve and work outward to panel ends. Fasten panels
to framing with screws spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.
For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches (400 mm)
o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with
screws spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.
Allow wetted gypsum panels to dry before applying joint treatment.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 6
Walls
Guide Specification
I.
Tile Backing Panels:
1.
2.
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: For substrates indicated to receive thin-set tile,
install water-resistant gypsum backing board panels, unless otherwise indicated. Where
tile backing panels abut other types of panels in the same plane, shim surfaces to produce
a uniform plane across panel surfaces.
Cementitious Backer Unit Application: ANSI A108.11 at showers and where otherwise
indicated.
J.
Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels.
Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)
of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
K.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions.
L.
Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open
(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
M.
Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
N.
Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1.
2.
3.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
Where partitions intersect open exterior and interior wall kickers, and other structural
members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to
fit profile formed by the wall kickers and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.
Where chase walls are shown, provide bracing between parallel rows of studs. Unless
otherwise shown, provide gypsum wallboard braces no less than 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-)
thick x 12-inches- (300-mm-) wide and cut to width of chase. Locate at quarter points in
wall height between each pair of parallel studs. Fasten with not less than 3 screws at each
stud.
O.
Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except
floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim
edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between
edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
P.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints,
and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical
sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with
ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing
off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing
partitions above acoustical ceilings.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 7
Walls
Guide Specification
Q.
Cut openings in wallboard for electrical outlets, piping and other penetrations. Maintain close
tolerances so that edges will be covered by plates and escutcheons. Cut both face and back
paper. Do not install electrical outlets back to back on opposing sides of partitions.
R.
Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and
finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications.
Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c.
Install fasteners not less than 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) from ends or edges of wallboard
sheets, spacing fasteners opposite each other on adjacent ends or edges.
Begin fastening from center of wallboard and proceed toward edges and corners.
Apply pressure on surface of wallboard adjacent to fasteners being driven to ensure that
wallboard will be secured tightly to supporting members.
a.
b.
3.3
Drive fastener with shank perpendicular to face of board.
Drive screws with a power screwdriver as recommended by wallboard
manufacturer. Set heads of screws slightly below surface of paper without cutting
paper.
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Fasten trim accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions for type,
length, and spacing of fasteners.
B.
Install corner beads at external corners.
C.
Install interior trim accessories where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or
semiexposed. Provide interior trim accessories with face flange formed to receive joint
compound.
D.
Install aluminum trim accessories where indicated.
E.
Install control joints in locations indicated and where directed by the Architect for visual effect,
or if not indicated or directed by the Architect, provide control joints in accordance with ASTM
C 840 which is as follows:
1.
Where a partition, wall or ceiling traverses a construction joint (expansion, seismic, or
building control element) in the base building structure.
2.
Where a wall or a partition runs in an uninterrupted straight plane exceeding 30 linear
feet (9,100 mm).
3.
Control joints in interior ceilings with perimeter relief shall be installed so that linear
dimensions between control joints do not exceed 50 feet (15,000 mm) and total area
between control joints does not exceed 2500 square feet (230 m2).
4.
Control joints in interior ceilings without perimeter relief shall be installed so that linear
dimensions between control joints do not exceed 30 linear feet (9,100 mm) and total area
between control joints does not exceed 900 square feet (84 m2).
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 8
Walls
Guide Specification
5.
3.4
A control joint or intermediate blocking shall be installed where ceiling framing members
change direction.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A.
General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints, flanges of interior trim and aluminum
trim accessories, interior angles, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and
elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of gypsum
board finish indicated. Produce surfaces free of tool marks and ridges ready for decoration of
type indicated. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
for tape.
D.
Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to
ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where
indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies
and sound-rated assemblies.
Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners,
and trim flanges where panels are substrate for tile and where indicated.
Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to
tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless
otherwise indicated.
Level 5: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to
tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire
surface where wallboard is indicated to receive wall coverings, semi-gloss and high gloss
paints, and Italian plaster.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean floors of all wallboard debris and leave broom clean. Excess material, scaffolding, tools
and other equipment are to be removed upon completion of the Work.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensures gypsum board assemblies remain
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 29 00
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 9
Walls
Guide Specification
SECTION 09 30 00 - TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes ceramic and porcelain tile.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the
following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.
Step Treads: Minimum 0.6.
Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit product data for each product used.
B.
Samples: Submit samples showing full range of color and texture variations expected.
1.
2.
3.
Full size units of each type, composition, color, and finish of tile.
Assembled samples with grouted joints for each color grout and for each type,
composition, color, and finish of tile.
Thresholds in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths, each type.
C.
Test Reports: Submit test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating and
interpreting test results relative to compliance of tile products with requirements specified for
slip resistance.
D.
Maintenance instructions: Submit maintenance instructions for each type of product installed.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer: Engage an installer, with a minimum of 5 years of successful commercial tile
installations similar in material, design, and scope to that indicated.
B.
Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile from one source or producer, and from same production
run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
C.
Field-Constructed Sample Installations: Before installing tile, erect sample installations for
each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample submittals
and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build
sample installations to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for
final unit of Work.
TILING
09 30 00 - 1
Flooring
Guide Specification
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Locate sample installations on site, in locations and size indicated or, if not shown or
indicated, as directed by LAWA but not less than 100 sq. ft. (9.29 sq. m) area for floors,
and not less than 100 sq. ft. (9.29 sq. m) area for walls.
Retain and maintain sample installations during construction in undisturbed condition as
a standard for judging completed unit of Work.
Approved sample installations may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
B.
Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other
causes.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Maintain temperatures at 50°F or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after
completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or
manufacturer's instructions.
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Provide attic stock equal to the following for each type, color, pattern, and size (or fraction
thereof) of tile provided for the project. Supply in manufacturer=s unopened containers,
identified with name, brand type, grade, class and all other qualifying information, to a location
where directed by LAWA.
1.
2% of amount installed but not less than one box.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TILE PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1,
"Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
B.
Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard
with manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Tile Trim Units: Matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes and
coursing where applicable.
TILING
09 30 00 - 2
Flooring
Guide Specification
2.2
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Thresholds: Fabricate to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. Bevel edges at 1:2
slope, limit height of bevel to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less, and finish bevel to match face of
threshold.
1.
Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 per
ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish.
a.
B.
Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining.
Waterproofing for all Wet Areas and Existing Concrete Slabs on Grade.
1.
Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Product: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber and
fabric reinforcement which are compatible with mortar bed specified and complying with
ANSI A118.10; one of the following:
a.
Custom Building Products; 9240 Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane.
b.
LATICRETE International Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane.
c.
MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic 400.
NOTE: All wet areas such as but not limited to kitchens and rest rooms and all existing
concrete slabs on grade, shall incorporate a waterproofing membrane as part of the floor
assembly. Indicate relevant waterproofing details on the drawings. The waterproofing
membrane shall extend up the wall, a minimum of 3 feet, behind all wall hung plumbing
fixtures and 12 inches high at all walls without plumbing fixtures in accordance with
LAWA Rest Room Design Guidelines.
2.3
SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Custom Building Products.
LATICRETE International Inc.
MAPEI Corporation.
B.
Source Limitations: For each tile installation, obtain compatible formulations of setting and
grouting materials containing latex or latex additives from a single manufacturer.
C.
Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.1A and as specified
below:
1.
TILING
09 30 00 - 3
Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, flat, welded wire fabric, 2” x 2” x 0.062 inch (50.8
x 50.8 mm x 1.57 mm) diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for
minimum wire size.
Flooring
Guide Specification
2.
D.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4 consisting of the following:
1.
2.
E.
Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive.
For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
Medium-Bed, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4:
1.
F.
Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard styrene-butadiene-rubber water emulsion,
serving as replacement for all gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latexadditive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar
bed.
Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive.
Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.
1.
2.
Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.
Colors: As selected from manufacturers standards to match tile being grouted.
NOTE: Epoxy grout shall be used in all public rest rooms. Latex grout in public rest rooms
is not allowed. All grout joints shall be made as small as possible.
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Sealants: ‘Silicone sanitary sealant’.
B.
Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
2.5
MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A.
Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions. Add materials and liquid latex additives in accurate
proportions. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers,
mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with
optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREINSTALLATION MEETING
A.
Prior to the installation of tile, meet at the project site to review the material selections, substrate
preparations, installation procedures, coordination with other trades, special details and
conditions, standard of workmanship, and other pertinent topics related to the Work. The
meeting shall include LAWA, the Architect of Record, the Contractor, tile installer, tile and
setting material manufacturer's representatives, and representatives of other trades or
subcontractors affected by the installation.
TILING
09 30 00 - 4
Flooring
Guide Specification
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present.
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.3
Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and
curing compounds. Grind concrete substrates to remove existing floor adhesive and
mortar residues, films, sealing and curing compounds if they are determined to be present
on the substrate.
Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before
installing tile.
Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with the Architect of Record.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Remove paint, coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that are incompatible
with tile-setting materials.
B.
Blending: Color blend tiles at Project site before installing.
1.
3.4
Furnish the same lots, batches, etc. within the same contiguous areas of the site (i.e.
corridors on the same floors, common rooms which adjoin each other, etc.).
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for
Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials.
B.
TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation".
C.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for
straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other
penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile
fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area beginning at thresholds. Adjust to
minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
TILING
09 30 00 - 5
For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within
tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
Flooring
Guide Specification
F.
Movement (Expansion) Joints: Locate sealant filled expansion joints where recommended by
the manufacturers of mortar and tile materials but not less than the requirements of TCA EJ171,
and as accepted by the Architect of Record. Form movement joints and other sealant-filled
joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after
installing tiles.
1.
2.
Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
Prepare joints and apply sealants.
NOTE: All control joints to be carried to the surface.
3.5
WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION
A.
Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written
instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to
substrate.
1.
3.6
Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to
determine that it is watertight.
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Thinset Tile over Concrete Slabs (Typical): Install in accordance with the mortar manufacturer's
recommendations and requirements indicated below for ANSI setting bed methods, TCA
installation methods related to types of subfloor construction, and grout ANSI installation
methods and grout types. Where recommendations and methods conflict, the manufacturer's
recommendations shall apply.
1.
Mortar: Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5.
2.
Concrete Subfloors, Interior: TCA F113.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
TILING
09 30 00 - 6
With a trowel, having notches sized as recommended by the mortar manufacturer,
comb the surface of the mortar with the notched side of the trowel removing excess
mortar. Spread only as much mortar as can be covered in the time limits
established by the mortar manufacturers recommendations.
Wipe the back of each tile, with a damp sponge, to remove all dust or dirt
immediately before applying mortar to tiles.
Immediately after wiping tile backs, but prior to placing tile, the mortar shall be
troweled to back of tile for 100% coverage to thickness of not less than 1/16-inch
(1.5-mm).
Place tiles onto mortar bed, maintaining 1/8-inch (3-mm) wide joints, and true
accurate pattern as shown. Exercise care to quickly remove spillage from faces of
tile using water. Rake out joints to depth required to receive grout as tile units are
set.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic on tiled floors for period of time as recommended
by the mortar manufacturer.
Flooring
Guide Specification
3.
B.
Grout Installation, Latex-portland cement: ANSI A108.10.
Thinset Tile over Waterproof Membrane (Toilet Rooms, Kitchens and any other wet areas, in
addition to all concrete slabs on grade): Install in accordance with the mortar manufacturer's
recommendations and requirements indicated below for ANSI setting bed methods, TCA
installation methods related to types of subfloor construction, and grout ANSI installation
methods and grout types. Where recommendations and methods conflict, the manufacturer's
recommendations shall apply.
1.
Mortar: Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5.
2.
Concrete Subfloors, Interior: TCA F122.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
C.
Apply the mortar to waterproofed slab with the flat side of the trowel.
With a trowel, having notches sized as recommended by the mortar manufacturer,
comb the surface of the mortar with the notched side of the trowel removing excess
mortar. Spread only as much mortar as can be covered in the time limits
established by the mortar manufacturers recommendations.
Wipe the back of each tile, with a damp sponge, to remove all dust or dirt
immediately before applying mortar to tiles.
Immediately after wiping tile backs, but prior to placing tile, the mortar shall be
troweled to back of tile for 100% coverage to thickness of not less than 1/16-inch
(1.5-mm).
Place tiles onto mortar bed, maintaining 1/8-inch (3-mm) wide joints, and true
accurate pattern as shown. Exercise care to quickly remove spillage from faces of
tile using water. Rake out joints to depth required to receive grout as tile units are
set.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic on tiled floors for period of time as recommended
by the mortar manufacturer.
Grout Installation, Latex-portland cement: ANSI A108.10.
Mediumset Tile (Only where indicated): Install in accordance with the mortar manufacturer's
recommendations and requirements indicated below for ANSI setting bed methods, TCA
installation methods related to types of subfloor construction, and grout ANSI installation
methods and grout types. Where recommendations and methods conflict, the manufacturer's
recommendations shall apply.
1.
Mortar: Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5.
2.
Concrete Subfloors, Interior: TCA F113 except apply medium set bed thickness.
a.
b.
TILING
09 30 00 - 7
With a trowel, having notches sized as recommended by the mortar manufacturer,
comb the surface of the mortar with the notched side of the trowel removing excess
mortar. Spread only as much mortar as can be covered in the time limits
established by the mortar manufacturers recommendations.
Wipe the back of each tile, with a damp sponge, to remove all dust or dirt
immediately before applying mortar to tiles.
Flooring
Guide Specification
c.
d.
e.
3.
D.
Grout Installation: Latex-portland cement: ANSI A108.10.
Thickset Tile (Only where indicated): Install in accordance with the mortar manufacturer's
recommendations and requirements indicated below for ANSI setting bed methods, TCA
installation methods related to types of subfloor construction, and grout ANSI installation
methods and grout types. Where recommendations and methods conflict, the manufacturer's
recommendations shall apply.
1.
2.
Mortar and Bond Coat:
a.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1A (Wet Set Method).
b.
Latex-Portland Cement Bond Coat: ANSI A108.5.
Concrete Subfloors, Interior: TCA F121.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
E.
Immediately after wiping tile backs, but prior to placing tile, the mortar shall be
troweled to back of tile for 100% coverage to thickness of not less than 1/16-inch
(1.5-mm).
Place tiles onto mortar bed, maintaining 1/8-inch (3-mm) wide joints, and true
accurate pattern as shown. Exercise care to quickly remove spillage from faces of
tile using water. Rake out joints to depth required to receive grout as tile units are
set.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic on tiled floors for period of time as recommended
by the mortar manufacturer.
Apply ½ of the mortar bed to slab and place reinforcing wire fabric. After placing
mesh, apply balance of mortar bed. The mortar shall be rodded and compacted
with a steel trowel.
Wipe the back of each tile, with a damp sponge, to remove all dust or dirt
immediately before applying bond coat to tiles
Immediately after wiping tile backs, but prior to placing tile, the mortar shall be
troweled to back of tile sheets for 100% coverage to thickness of not less than
1/16-inch (1.5-mm)
Place tile onto the green mortar bed, maintaining 1/8-inch (3-mm) wide joints for
typical tile units and 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) wide joints for quarry tile units if any,
and true accurate pattern as shown. Tamp tile with wood block and rubber mallet
to produce finish levels of tile matching adjacent tile surfaces. Beating shall take
place prior to mortar taking and initial set. Exercise care to quickly remove
spillage from faces of tile using water. Rake out joints to depth required to receive
grout as tile units are set.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic on tiled floors for period of time as recommended
by the mortar manufacturer.
Grout Installation: Latex-portland cement: ANSI A108.10.
Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in one piece, notched to fit neatly at door jambs; set
in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile in accordance with TCA Method TR611.
TILING
09 30 00 - 8
Flooring
Guide Specification
3.7
WALL TILE INSTALLATION
A.
3.8
Install in accordance with the mortar manufacturer's recommendations and requirements
indicated below for ANSI setting bed methods, TCA installation methods related to types of
construction, and grout ANSI installation methods and grout types. Where recommendations
and methods conflict, the manufacturer's recommendations shall apply.
1.
Latex Portland Cement Mortar Installation (using specified latex portland cement mortar
material): ANSI A108.5.
2.
Gypsum Wallboard, Interior (Latex Portland Cement Mortar) Method: TCA W243,
place tiles maintaining 1/8-inch (3-mm) wide joints, and true accurate pattern as shown.
3.
Cementitious Backerboard (Latex Portland Cement Mortar) Method: TCA W244, place
tiles maintaining 1/8-inch (3-mm) wide joints, and true accurate pattern as shown.
4.
Grout Installation: Latex-portland cement: ANSI A108.10.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all tile surfaces so they are free of
foreign matter.
1.
2.
Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners
recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners
are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect
metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean
water before and after cleaning.
B.
Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken,
unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work.
C.
When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed
tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during
construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
D.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed.
END OF SECTION 09 30 00
TILING
09 30 00 - 9
Flooring
Guide Specification
SECTION 09 51 13 − ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted
items. Show the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.3
Ceiling suspension assembly members.
Method of attaching hangers and lateral bracing to building structure.
Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
Samples: For each acoustical panel, for each exposed suspension system member, and for each
color and texture required.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product test reports.
B.
Research/evaluation reports:
NOTE: Indicate LARR numbers on the drawings as a condition of plan check approval.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAPaccredited laboratory.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to
those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Ratings are indicated
by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of
another testing and inspecting agency.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 51 13 - 1
Ceiling Systems
Guide Specification
2.
C.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for
Class A materials, when tested per ASTM E 84.
Seismic Standard: Comply with the following:
1.
Los Angeles Department of Building and Safety Document requirements.
NOTE: Refer to LADBS document number P/BC 2008-40: Recommended Standards for
Suspended Ceiling Assemblies. This document provides guidelines for designing and
installing a suspended ceiling assembly and provides standard support configurations for
typical conditions. This document can be found online at www.ladbs.org.
D.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
1.
Approved mockups are not to become part of the completed Work.
NOTE: The ceiling installing shall not installed until the installation mock up has been
approved by LAWA.
1.6
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
B.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with LAWA selection criteria and requirements,
2.2 GENERAL
C.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.
1.
D.
Recycled Content: Provide acoustical panels with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constitutes a
minimum of 70Insert number percent by weight.
Low-Emitting Materials: Acoustical tile ceilings shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 51 13 - 2
Ceiling Systems
Guide Specification
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
E.
Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.
1.
F.
Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content
such that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content
is not less than 25 percent.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory
devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
NOTE: The use of powder actuated fasteners is by SPECIAL APPROVAL ONLY.
Prior to the use of these fasteners, the Contractor shall develop and present to LAWA,
their procedures and protocol for using such equipment at LAX.
G.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1
zinc coating, soft temper.
1.
H.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
0.106 inch diameter wire.
Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510, mild carbon steel.
1.
2.
Diameter: 1/4 inch.
Protective Coating: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized.
I.
Seismic struts and seismic clips.
J.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of
0.0538 inch , a minimum 1/2 inch wide flange, and in depth indicated.
K.
Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's
standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and
suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as
that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 51 13 - 3
Ceiling Systems
Guide Specification
2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS
L.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
2.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
USG Corporation
2.4 METAL SUSPENESION SYSTEM
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Chicago Metallic Corporation
2.5 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable, nonstaining latex sealant, that complies with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers,"
complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
2.6 INSTALLATION
A.
Per manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.
END OF SECTION 09 51 13
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 51 13 - 4
Ceiling Systems
Guide Specification
SECTION 09 66 13 - PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Poured-in-place portland cement terrazzo flooring and base.
NOTE: Some of the existing terrazzo installations at the airport are cementitious. In the
event that one of these existing installations is required to be repaired or replaced, this guide
specification section is to be utilized.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
Aggregate: Marble chips or other types of aggregate.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at LAX.
1.
Review methods and procedures related to terrazzo including, but not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.4
Inspect and discuss condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed
by other trades.
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
Review special terrazzo designs and patterns.
Review procedures for coping with unfavorable forecasted weather conditions.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include terrazzo installation requirements. Include plans, elevations, sections,
component details, and attachments to other work. Show layout of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Divider strips.
Control-joint strips.
Expansion-joint strips.
Accessory strips.
Abrasive strips.
PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 13 - 1
Flooring
Guide Specification
6.
7.
Stair treads, risers, and landings.
Terrazzo patterns.
C.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches (150 mm)
in size.
D.
Samples for Initial Selection: NTMA color plates showing the full range of colors and patterns
available for each terrazzo type.
E.
Samples for Verification: For each type, material, color, and pattern of terrazzo and accessory
required showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Label each
terrazzo sample to identify manufacturer's matrix color and aggregate types, sizes, and
proportions. Prepare Samples of same thickness and from same material to be used for the
Work, in size indicated below:
1.
2.
1.5
Terrazzo: 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples.
Accessories: 6-inch- (150-mm-) long Samples of each exposed strip item required.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: .Engage an experienced Installer who is a current NTMA member in good
standing and who has completed a minimum of 3 terrazzo installations similar in material and
extent to that indicated for Project – as determined by LAWA – over the last 5 years and that
have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
NOTE: A letter from the NTMA dated within 30 days of the bid, stating same, must be
submitted with the bid. Any active investigations of contractor's work must be noted in this
letter.
B.
1.6
Material Certificates: For each type of terrazzo material or product, from manufacturer.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Maintenance Data: For terrazzo to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An installer who is a contractor member of NTMA.
B.
Source Limitations for Aggregates: Obtain each color, grade, type, and variety of granular
materials from single source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties.
C.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 13 - 2
Flooring
Guide Specification
1.
Build mockups for terrazzo including accessories.
a.
2.
1.8
Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) of typical poured-in-place flooring condition
for each color and pattern in locations directed by LAWA.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless LAWA specifically approves such deviations in
writing.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to Project site in supplier's original wrappings and containers, labeled with
source's or manufacturer's name, material or product brand name, and lot number if any.
B.
Store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers, inside a well-ventilated
area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
1.9
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with terrazzo installation only when forecasted weather
conditions permit work to be performed according to NTMA's written recommendations.
B.
Close spaces to traffic during terrazzo application and for not less than 24 hours after
application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.
C.
Control and collect water and dust produced by grinding operations. Protect adjacent
construction from detrimental effects of grinding operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
NTMA Standards: Comply with NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" and
with written recommendations for terrazzo type indicated unless more stringent requirements
are specified.
B.
FloorScore Compliance: Terrazzo floors shall comply with requirements of FloorScore
Standard.
C.
Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 13 - 3
Flooring
Guide Specification
2.2
PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO
A.
Portland Cement Terrazzo System: Sand cushion.
1.
2.
Underbed: Comply with NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" for
terrazzo system indicated for component proportions and mixing.
Topping: Comply with NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" for
terrazzo system indicated for matrix and aggregate proportions and mixing.
a.
b.
c.
B.
Materials:
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Color for Exposed Matrix: As required by mix indicated.
Water: Potable.
Sand: ASTM C 33/C 33M.
Aggregates: Comply with NTMA gradation standards for mix indicated and contain no
deleterious or foreign matter.
a.
b.
c.
2.3
Terrazzo Topping Thickness: As required.
Formulated Mix Color and Pattern: Insert NTMA color plate designation.
Custom Mix Color and Pattern: Match existing.
Abrasion and Impact Resistance: Less than 40 percent loss per ASTM C 131.
24-Hour Absorption Rate: Less than 0.75 percent.
Dust Content: Less than 1.0 percent by weight.
Matrix Pigments: Pure mineral or synthetic pigments, alkali resistant, durable under
exposure to sunlight, and compatible with terrazzo matrix.
Bonding Agent: Neat portland cement, or epoxy or acrylic bonding agents formulated for
use with topping indicated.
Underbed Reinforcement: Galvanized welded-wire reinforcement, wire 2 by 2 inches (51
by 51 mm) by 0.062 inch (1.57 mm) in diameter, complying with ASTM A 185/A 185M
and ASTM A 82/A 82M, except for minimum wire size.
Isolation Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 2103, Type 13300, 4 mils (0.1
mm) thick; or unperforated asphalt felt, ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15).
STRIP MATERIALS
A.
Standard Divider Strips: One-piece, flat-type strips for grouting into sawed joints prepared in
substrate.
B.
Heavy-Top Divider Strips: One-piece, flat-type strips for grouting into sawed joints prepared in
substrate.
C.
Heavy-Top Angle Divider Strips: One-piece, L-type angle strips with anchoring device and in
depth required for topping thickness indicated.
PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 13 - 4
Flooring
Guide Specification
D.
Control-Joint Strips: Separate, double L-type angles, positioned back to back, that match
material and color of divider strips and in depth required for topping thickness indicated.
E.
Expansion-Joint Strips: Brass, with removable zip-strip top for installing sealant; minimum 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) wide.
F.
Accessory Strips: Match divider-strip width, material, and color unless otherwise indicated.
Use the following types of accessory strips as required to provide a complete installation:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Base-bead strips for exposed top edge of terrazzo base.
Edge-bead strips for exposed edges of terrazzo.
Nosings for terrazzo stair treads and landings.
MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
A.
Strip Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer for this use.
1.
2.
B.
Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Anchoring Devices:
1.
Strips: Provide mechanical anchoring devices or adhesives for strip materials as
recommended by manufacturer and as required for secure attachment to substrate.
C.
Isolation and Expansion-Joint Material: Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid
water and gas, and non-outgassing in unruptured state; butyl rubber; rubber; minimum 1/2 inch
(12.7 mm) wide.
D.
Portland Cement Terrazzo Cleaner: Chemically neutral cleaner with pH factor between 7 and
10 that is biodegradable, phosphate free, and recommended by cleaner manufacturer for use on
terrazzo type indicated.
E.
Sealer: Slip- and stain-resistant, penetrating-type sealer that is chemically neutral; does not
affect terrazzo color or physical properties; is recommended by sealer manufacturer; and
complies with NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" for terrazzo type indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Surface Friction: Not less than 0.6 according to ASTM D 2047.
Acid-Base Properties: With pH factor between 7 and 10.
Sealers shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
.
PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 13 - 5
Flooring
Guide Specification
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions, including levelness tolerances,
have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrates of substances, including oil, grease, and curing compounds, that might impair
terrazzo bond. Provide clean, dry, and neutral substrate for terrazzo application.
1.
B.
Roughen concrete substrates before installing terrazzo system according to NTMA's
written recommendations.
Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable
levels according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Moisture Testing: Perform tests indicated below.
a.
Calcium Chloride Test: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test per
ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum
moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9
sq. m) in 24 hours.
1)
b.
c.
C.
In-Situ Probe Test: Perform relative-humidity test using in-situ probes per
ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75
percent relative-humidity-level measurement.
Test Method: Test for moisture content by method recommended in writing by
terrazzo manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
Protect other work from water and dust generated by grinding operations. Control water and
dust to comply with environmental protection regulations.
1.
3.3
Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft. (18.6 sq. m),
and perform not less than two tests in each installation area and with test
areas evenly spaced in installation areas.
Erect and maintain temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to limit water
damage and dust migration and to ensure adequate ambient temperatures and ventilation
conditions during installation.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NTMA's written recommendations for terrazzo and accessory installation.
PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 13 - 6
Flooring
Guide Specification
B.
Installation Tolerance: Limit variation in terrazzo surface from level to 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6.4
mm in 3 m); noncumulative.
C.
Underbed:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Comply with NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" for underbed
installation.
Cover entire surface to receive terrazzo with dusting of sand.
Install isolation membrane over sand, overlapping ends and edges a minimum of 3 inches
(75 mm).
Install welded-wire reinforcement, overlapping at edges and ends at least two
squares. Stop mesh a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) short of expansion joints.
Place underbed and screed to elevation indicated below finished floor elevation.
Strip Materials:
1.
Divider and Control-Joint Strips:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Locate divider strips directly over control joints, breaks, and saw cuts in concrete
slabs.
Install control-joint strips back to back and directly above concrete-slab control
joints.
Install control-joint strips with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap between strips, and install
sealant in gap.
Install strips in adhesive setting bed without voids below strips, or mechanically
anchor strips as required to attach strips to substrate, as recommended by strip
manufacturer.
Expansion-Joint Strips: Form expansion joints using divider strips and install directly
above concrete-slab expansion joints.
NOTE: All expansion and control joints within the existing concrete slab are to be
carried through the terrazzo, to the finish surface.
3.
4.
3.4
Accessory Strips: Install as required to provide a complete installation.
Abrasive Strips: Install with surface of abrasive strip positioned 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)
higher than terrazzo surface.
POURED-IN-PLACE TERRAZZO INSTALLATION
A.
Pour in place and seed additional aggregates in matrix to uniformly distribute granular material
and produce a surface with a minimum of 70 percent aggregate exposure. Cure and finish
portland cement terrazzo according to NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" for
terrazzo type indicated.
B.
Grinding: Delay fine grinding until heavy trade work is complete and construction traffic
through area is restricted.
PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 13 - 7
Flooring
Guide Specification
3.5
REPAIR
A.
3.6
Cut out and replace terrazzo areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate or underbed,
including areas that emit a "hollow" sound if tapped. Cut out terrazzo areas in panels defined
by strips and replace to match adjacent terrazzo, or repair panels according to NTMA's written
recommendations, as approved by LAWA.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Terrazzo Cleaning:
1.
2.
B.
Sealing:
1.
2.
C.
Remove grinding dust from installation and adjacent areas.
Wash surfaces with cleaner immediately after final cleaning of terrazzo flooring
according to NTMA's written recommendations and manufacturer's written instructions;
rinse surfaces with water and allow them to dry thoroughly.
Seal surfaces according to NTMA's written recommendations.
Apply sealer according to sealer manufacturer's written instructions.
Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to
Installer, that ensure that terrazzo is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 66 13
PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 13 - 8
Flooring
Guide Specification
SECTION 09 66 23 – RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes resinous matrix (epoxy) terrazzo.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Static Coefficient of Friction: For terrazzo installed on walkway surfaces, provide finished
installation with the following values as determined by testing per ASTM C 1028:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.
Step Treads: Minimum 0.6.
Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit product data for each material indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing the extent of each terrazzo matrix, type, size
and layout of divider strips, control joint strips, and edge strips
C.
1.
Indicate layout of abrasive strips at stair nosings.
2.
Indicate layout of stair treads, risers and landings.
3.
Large scale details of precast terrazzo jointing and edge conditions, including anchorage
details.
Samples: Submit samples of each of the following items for each type, color, and pattern of
terrazzo and accessory required and in size indicated below. Sample submittals shall be for
color, pattern and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is the responsibility of the
Contractor.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Epoxy Terrazzo: 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples.
Precast Epoxy Terrazzo Base: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples.
Precast Epoxy Terrazzo Tread: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples.
Precast Epoxy Terrazzo Riser: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples.
Accessories: 6-inch- (150-mm-) long Samples of each exposed strip item required.
NOTE: With previous terrazzo installations at the airport, a minimum of three sample runs
have been required in order to achieve the approved design.
D.
Field Testing: Submit pre-installation relative humidity probe readings and pH testing for
information only. Readings shall be prepared in accordance with ASTM F2170.
RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 23 - 1
Flooring
Guide Specification
E.
Maintenance Data: Submit copies of instructions for maintenance of each type of terrazzo.
F.
Warranty: Submit sample copies of the mvt warranty to verify compliance with specification.
Submit executed copies of epoxy terrazzo warranty as specified herein.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is a current NTMA member in
good standing and who has completed a minimum of 3 terrazzo installations similar in material
and extent to that indicated for Project – as determined by LAWA – over the last 5 years and
that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
NOTE: A letter from the NTMA dated within 30 days of the bid, stating same, must be
submitted with the bid. Any active investigations of contractor's work must be noted in this
letter.
B.
Standard: Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with
applicable provisions and recommendations of the NTMA Terrazzo Information Guide
Specification.
C.
Sample Installations:
1.
Following acceptance of samples, provide sample installations of the following where
directed by the LAWA.
a.
2.
1.5
Floors: Cast a typical module (minimum 10' x 10' ft.) of interior flooring including
divider strips.
Sample installations shall be complete with all bedding, jointing, and sealants as shown
in accordance with the final shop drawings. Sample installations shall be reviewed by the
Architect for acceptance of terrazzo assemblies including jointing and workmanship.
Replace unsatisfactory work as directed.
Maintain sample installations during
construction as a standard for judging acceptability of terrazzo work. Properly finished
and maintained sample installations shall be retained as a portion of the completed work.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Deliver materials, other than bulk materials, in manufacturer's unopened containers, fully
identified with trade name, grade and color.
B.
Store materials above grade, protected from the weather, soiling or damage from any source.
Store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Wrap precast units individually in polyethylene film or other nonstaining protective cover and
mark each unit for proper identification of installed location.
RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 23 - 2
Flooring
Guide Specification
1.6
PROTECTION
A.
1.7
Protect terrazzo work throughout the construction period so that it will be without any
indication of use or damage at the time of acceptance by LAWA.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer and installer shall supply to LAWA a three year Joint and Several Warranty from
the date of substantial completion stating that the Moisture Vapor Barrier shall protect the
epoxy terrazzo installation from moisture related blistering or disbondment and that in the event
of defects related to moisture vapor transmission within the stipulated period, the manufacturer
and installer shall jointly or severally effect all repairs or replacement necessary to remedy
defects at the convenience of, and no cost to LAWA.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EPOXY TERRAZZO
A.
Epoxy Terrazzo Material Products and Manufacturers: The epoxy resin terrazzo specifications
are based on Terroxy Resin System by Terrazzo and Marble (T & M) Supply Companies.
1.
2.
The following terrazzo systems and manufacturers are capable of providing epoxy resin
terrazzo flooring complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
a.
General Polymers; Thin-Set Epoxy Terrazzo #1100 Flooring System.
b.
Crossfield Products Corp., Dex-O-Tex Division; Dex-O-Tex Cheminert Terrazzo.
c.
Master Terrazzo Technologies, LLC; Morricite.
System Performance:
properties:
The epoxy resin flooring system shall possess the following
Compressive Strength, ASTM D695
10,000 psi
Water Absorption, ASTM D570
0.10 %
Tensile Strength, ASTM D638
3,000 psi
Flexural Strength, ASTM D790
4,500 psi
Adhesion, ACI 503R
350 psi, 100% concrete failure
Hardness, ASTM D2240
65-85 Shore D
Impact Resistance – MIL-D-3134, Sec. 4.7.3
Withstands 16 ft/lbs. no chipping, cracking, spalling or loss of adhesion.
Abrasion Resistance, ASTM D4060,
CS 17 Wheel
70-90 milligrams lost
Slip Resistance
Meets ADA Standards
RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 23 - 3
Flooring
Guide Specification
B.
C.
Critical Radiant Flux, ASTM D648
.90
Thermal coefficient of linear expansion,
ASTM D696
25 x 10-6 in/in/ degree F.
Moisture Vapor Barrier: One of the following:
1.
Barrier Primer; Terrazzo and Marble (T & M) Supply Companies.
2.
FasTop MVT or AquArmorS; General Polymers.
Flexible Epoxy Membrane (Crack Bridging Membrane): 100% solids for crack preparation
followed by full coverage application.
1.
2.
Products: One of the following:
a.
Isocrack Membrane; Terrazzo and Marble (T & M) Supply Companies.
b.
3556 EPO-FLEX Flexible Epoxy Membrane; General Polymers.
System Performance:
properties:
The flexible epoxy membrane shall possess the following
Tensile Strength, ASTM D412
1,000-1,300 psi
Elongation at Break, ASTM D412
130-145%
Adhesion, ACI 503R
350 psi, 100% concrete failure
Hardness, ASTM D2240
23 Shore D
Thermal Cycling, ASTM C884 (24 hours,
-21C to +25C
No Cracking
Flammability
Self-extinguishing over concrete
VOC
zero
The epoxy elastomer must be free of solvent,
external plasticizers, coal tar, known carcinogens, rubber compounds or nitrile butadienes
D.
Fabric Reinforcing: Fiberglass of type and manufacture recommended and acceptable to the
matrix manufacturer.
1.
E.
FS38-4.4 Fiberglass Scrim; General Polymers.
Aggregates: Natural, sound, crushed stone chips, mother of pearl, glass, plastic, and metal
filings with colors selected and graded to match Architect's samples, but with maximum size
within limits of workability for terrazzo thickness indicated.
RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 23 - 4
Flooring
Guide Specification
F.
G.
H.
2.2
1.
Sizes shall be #1's and #0's only, conforming with N.T.M.A. standards.
2.
Abrasion and impact resistance shall not exceed 40% loss per ASTM C131.
3.
24 hour absorption rate not to exceed 0.75 percent.
4.
Chips shall contain no deleterious or foreign matter.
5.
Dust content less than 1% by weight.
6.
Obtain and stockpile each aggregate material from a single source of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties for the entire project.
Epoxy Fill Mortar: 100% Solids fill mortar system including blended aggregate of a type
recommended by the epoxy resin terrazzo manufacturer. One of the following:
1.
Terroxy Fill; Terrazzo and Marble (T & M) Supply Companies.
2.
3520 Epoxy Terrazzo Matrix as the binder resin mixed with dry silica sand; General
Polymers.
Finishing Grout: 100% solids resin-based grout with filler and pigments as recommended by
matrix manufacturer. One of the following:
1.
Terroxy Grout; Terrazzo and Marble (T & M) Supply Companies.
2.
3520 Epoxy Terrazzo Matrix with 5271 Terrazzo Grout Additive; General Polymers.
Substrate Primer: 100% solids, moisture insensitive, two-component resin recommended by
matrix manufacturer. No solvent containing primers are allowed.
MIXES
A.
Toppings: Adjust topping mixes as required to obtain LAWA’s acceptance for each type, color,
pattern and finish. Refer to the drawings and finish schedules for the extent of each topping and
finish; the following topping mixes were used to develop the Architect’s samples. The samples
were prepared by and reflect sample controls numbers of using Terrazzo and Marble (T & M)
Supply Companies terrazzo materials. Each precast terrazzo unit shall be composed of a single
mix design prepared using the matrices specified, precast units consisting of a face mix and a
backup mix shall not be permitted. Adjust Portland cement precast mixes, for bases, treads and
riser units, as required to obtain LAWA's acceptance for matching the type, color, pattern and
finish of the epoxy matrix type, color pattern and finish indicated on the drawings for the base,
tread and riser units.
1.
TR-01: Refer to Sample #1 in the Terrazzo Chart below.
2.
TR-02: Refer to Sample #2 in the Terrazzo Chart below.
RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 23 - 5
Flooring
Guide Specification
NOTE: A white field with dark aggregate will maintain a clear appearance longer. In a multi color
design, a matrix with a repetition of aggregate is helpful in order to create a more unified appearance.
TERRAZZO CHART
Sample
#1
Matrix
Color
Chip Blend
Resin Color # & Fanfold
Aggregate
Resin Color selected to match
Sample
#2
Matrix
Color
Color # & Fanfold
0’s
0’s
90
10
Aggregate
Size
%
1’s & 0’s
1’s, &
0’s
90
10
Precast Terrazzo Base and Stair Tread/Riser Setting Beds:
1.
Cement Setting Bed Mix: 226 Thick Bed Mortar Mix; Laticrete International Inc.
2.
Liquid Latex Additives: Laticrete 3701 Liquid Latex Mortar Admix.
3.
Mixing: Comply with the manufacturers printed recommendations for either machine or
hand mixing of setting bed mixes.
a.
4.
C.
%
Chip Blend
Resin Color selected to match
B.
Size
Mix 6 bags of cement setting bed mix to 1 pail (5 gal.) of liquid latex additive.
Adjust quantity of liquid latex additive to bring the cement setting bed to the
proper consistency for placing.
Welded Wire Fabric for Setting Bed Reinforcement at Metal Stair Risers and Treads:
ASTM A185, 2 in. x 2 in. x 16 gage, galvanized.
Grout for Precast Items: Polymer-modified tile grout composed of ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry,
redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients to which only water must be added
at Project site, and complying with ANSI A118.6, custom colored to match adjacent precast
terrazzo tile units.
RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 23 - 6
Flooring
Guide Specification
NOTE: the mix design shall consist no more than 40% glass / mirror. Recycled glass is not
permitted. All glass/mirror or aggregate shall be no larger than #1, (#0s and #1s only).
The Contractor shall also premix all terrazzo ingredients which are able to be combined
prior to installation (Epoxy Part A and B and aggregate mixes). This premix process shall
occur in a clean and neat factory or laboratory environment. Quantities should be carefully
measured on certified/calibrated scales and mixing shall follow laboratory best practices.
The resulting premixed ingredients shall then be packaged in clean, clearly labeled, hard
sided containers in ratios whereby labor staff can combine in the field with no need to calculate or measure. LAWA or its authorized third party inspectors shall have continuous and
unabated access to witness/inspect the factory/laboratory premix and packaging processes.
2.3
ACCESSORIES
A.
Divider and Stop Strips: White alloy zinc, 1/8" in. thick x depth as indicated for terrazzo
topping. Angle or "T" - types. Verify compatibility of divider and stop strips with resin
supplier prior to ordering.
1.
B.
Control Joint Strips: Laminations of 16 gage zinc, back to back strips infilled with
Flexible Epoxy Membrane pigmented to match resin color of epoxy terrazzo.
Cleaner: A neutral chemical cleaner, specially compounded for cleaning terrazzo of the types
indicated, as recommended by the manufacturer of the cleaner with the following minimum
characteristics.
1.
Ph factor between 7 and 10.
2.
Biodegradable and phosphate free.
3.
Free form crystallizing salts or water soluble alkaline salts.
C.
Floor Sealer: Waterbased, colorless, stain-resistant penetrating sealer with Ph factor between 7
and 10, that does not affect color or physical properties of terrazzo surface, and which will
provide an anti-slip coefficient of friction of greater than 0.6.
D.
Joint Sealants: Two-Part Polyurethane Sealant (Self Leveling), refer to Section 079200, JOINT
SEALANTS.
E.
Channels to receive abrasive inserts at Precast Stair Nosings: 16 gauge aluminum channel.
F.
Abrasive Inserts: One line composition strips filled with 100 or finer carborundum, aluminum
oxide or silicone carbide, black, mixed 4 parts to 1 with a binding material.
G.
Reinforcing, Anchors and Fasteners for Precast Units:
RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 23 - 7
Flooring
Guide Specification
H.
1.
Reinforcing for Treads and Risers: ASTM A615, grade as selected by fabricator.
Reinforcing adjacent to the exposed surface of panels is to be positioned and firmly held
in place by hangers, or other means without the use of form-contact bar supports.
2.
Welded Wire Fabric for Treads and Risers: ASTM A185, 2 in. x 2 in. x 16 gage,
galvanized.
3.
Anchors and Fasteners: All anchors, clips, shapes, fasteners, dowels, cramps, and
accessories for erecting precast terrazzo units shall be galvanized steel devices of grade,
type, size and number required to attach precast terrazzo to supporting stair substrates.
Precast Portland Cement Terrazzo Base, Tread and Riser Materials (To be used when proposing
Alternate):
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, nonair entraining, nonstaining white and gray as
required to match Architect's epoxy terrazzo samples. Obtain cement from a single
source for all work of one color.
2.
Sand: ASTM C33 for fine aggregates as required to match Architect's epoxy terrazzo
samples.
3.
Water: Fresh, clean and potable.
4.
Aggregates, Glass, Plastic and Shell Materials: As required to match Architect's epoxy
terrazzo samples.
5.
Pigments: Pure mineral pigments, resistant to alkalies, nonfading and weatherproof,
colors as required to match Architect's epoxy terrazzo samples.
NOTE: LAWA is currently using Tesco crystal sealer #2, applied with a diamond pad for
existing terrazzo installations.
2.4
PRECAST UNIT FABRICATION
A.
Precast Terrazzo Bases: Fabricate precast terrazzo bases from epoxy terrazzo materials to the
sizes, shapes and profiles shown and from the terrazzo mix(es) indicated.
1.
The minimum thickness of the precast terrazzo base shall be ½”.
2.
Forms: Construct forms of non-staining metal, fiberglass reinforced polyester, plywood, or
other acceptable material. Fabricate and reinforce forms for close control of dimensions and
details. Construct forms tightly to prevent leakage of mixes. Form joints will not be
permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work.
3.
Mixing and Placing: Mix terrazzo mixes to distribute fine and coarse aggregate evenly
throughout. Place terrazzo so as to prevent segregation in the forms.
RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 23 - 8
Flooring
Guide Specification
B.
C.
4.
Curing: Allow units to cure.
5.
Casting Tolerances: As required to achieve installation tolerances. Units which have
bowed, warped, or curled shall not be acceptable.
Precast Terrazzo Treads and Risers: Fabricate precast terrazzo treads and risers from epoxy
terrazzo materials to the sizes, shapes and profiles shown to match the epoxy terrazzo mix
indicated for treads and risers.
1.
The minimum thickness of the precast terrazzo stairs and treads shall be 1-1/2”. Provide 2
lines of abrasive insert at stair tread nosing.
2.
Forms: Construct forms of non-staining metal, fiberglass reinforced polyester, plywood, or
other acceptable material. Fabricate and reinforce forms for close control of dimensions and
details. Construct forms tightly to prevent leakage of mixes. Form joints will not be
permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work.
3.
Reinforcement: Place welded wire and reinforcing bars of size and spacings as required to
resist shrinkage, temperature and handling stresses. Support and space reinforcement using
devices to ensure that it will remain positioned in the precast terrazzo units as required.
Keep reinforcement from the edges and surfaces of the units.
4.
Mixing and Placing: Mix terrazzo mixes to distribute fine and coarse aggregate evenly
throughout. Place terrazzo so as to prevent segregation in the forms.
5.
Curing: Allow units to cure.
6.
Casting Tolerances: As required to achieve installation tolerances. Units which have
bowed, warped, or curled shall not be acceptable.
Surface Treatment:
1.
Finish surfaces exposed to view to match accepted samples in all respects. Provide smooth
joints and square edges.
2.
Finish: Allow terrazzo to obtain sufficient strength prior to grinding and as required to
withstand handling stresses and to produce a terrazzo finish consistent with the accepted
samples. Protect corners and edges to preserve uniform, straight arrisses and corners.
Grind in a continuous operation, using grinding equipment to achieve a uniform
appearance. Do not change equipment, materials, procedure or operating personnel during
the course of the grinding work for the entire Project. Discard and replace terrazzo units
which develop any irregular penetration or appearance, or swirl marks as a result of
grinding. Select type of grit gradation(s) and speed of operation to achieve the following:
a.
3.
Match finish of cast in place epoxy terrazzo as specified under Part 3 – Execution
below.
Abrasive Inserts for Stair Treads:
RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 23 - 9
Flooring
Guide Specification
a.
Carefully mask terrazzo on either side of abrasive channel to protect finished
terrazzo.
b.
Clean all foreign matter from channel.
c.
Trowel abrasive mix into channel with finished elevation approximately 1/16" above
terrazzo tread.
d.
After abrasive mix has set, remove masking material and allow to cure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONDITION OF SURFACES
A.
3.2
Examine the substrates and adjoining construction and the conditions under which the Work is
to be installed. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected. Examine areas to receive terrazzo for:
1.
Defects in existing work that affect proper execution of terrazzo work.
2.
Deviations beyond allowable tolerances for the concrete slab work. The substrate shall
not exceed ¼” in a 10’-0” span. When placing a 10 foot straightedge anywhere on the
substrate, at no point shall the gap between the straightedge and the substrate exceed ¼”.
3.
Ensure that the building expansion joints in the floor area are raised or lowered to actual
finish elevation of terrazzo.
4.
Ensure that drains in installation area are functional and raised or lowered to actual finish
elevation of terrazzo.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with NTMA specifications and recommendations, unless otherwise shown or
specified for preparation of substrate.
B.
Substrates to Receive Epoxy Terrazzo: After the removal of existing floor coverings in areas to
receive the terrazzo work, and before the terrazzo flooring installation, visit the jobsite to
evaluate substrate condition.The evaluation shall include a determination of the suitableness of
the substrate to receive the epoxy terrazzo materials and to test for moisture and alkalinity of the
substrate. Test for moisture by relative humidity probe and digital meter method according to
ASTM F 2170 "Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor
Slabs Using In-situ Probes" and the probe manufactures instructions. Use a minimum of 1 probe
for every 5,000 s.f. of surface to receive terrazzo flooring. Proceed with the epoxy floor system
installation only after substrates have a maximum relative-humidity-measurement reading of 75
percent in 24 hours.
If the pH of the slab is 10 or lower, notify the manufacturer for
preparations required to ensure a good bond.
RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 23 - 10
Flooring
Guide Specification
1.
C.
Probe Manufacturer: A relative humidity probe kit and manufacturer known to comply
with the requirements includes "The Rapid RH Probe" manufactured by Wagner
Electronic Products, Inc., Rogue River, OR. (800) 207-2164 (v).
Surface Treatment:
1.
Prepare slab substrates, (including any existing cementitious terrazzo) to "open" surface
pores by means of light scarification, medium shot blast or medium scarification with a
vacuum unit. Surface preparation results shall achieve a minimum Concrete Surface
Profile (CSP) of 5 according to International Concrete Repair Institute Guideline No.
03732. Remove all contaminating or bond breaking substances including but not limited
to dust, laitance, curing compounds, coatings, sealers, oil, grease, existing floor covering
adhesives and mastics. All oil or grease not removed by scarification or blasting shall be
removed by either detergent scrubbing with heavy duty cleaner/degreaser, low pressure
water cleaning, steam cleaning, or chemical cleaning methods in accordance with the
manufacturers written instructions. All spalled or deteriorated slab surfaces shall be
mechanically removed by scabbling or chipping hammers. Acid etching is not
acceptable.
NOTE: Many of the existing sub-floor areas of the existing Terminals are not level
and require extensive floor prep. All existing finishes such as but not limited to
Fritztile are to be removed from the concrete slab.
2.
Apply moisture vapor barrier across the entire area to receive the epoxy terrazzo in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
3.
Repair or level damaged slab surfaces with epoxy fill mortar. Latex fills or self leveling
underlayments are not acceptable.
4.
Flexible Epoxy Membrane (Crack Bridging Membrane) Placement:
a.
5.
Install flexible epoxy membrane at 40 mils thickness over the moisture vapor
barrier and embed fabric reinforcement. Follow the specific recommendations of
the flooring manufacturer for detailing at terminations, construction control joints,
construction joints, building columns, and base conditions. Thoroughly mix
flexible epoxy membrane and apply to prepared moisture vapor coated slab
substrates according to manufacturer’s instructions. Allow membrane to level
until no ridges are showing.
Cracks and non-expansion joints greater than 1/16" wide after surface preparation shall
be prepared until sound and treated with membrane materials in accordance with the
instructions of the epoxy terrazzo manufacturer and as follows. Allow in base bid for
above crack detailing as follows - 5% of lineal footage of total project square footage for
combined Type 1 & 2, and 3% of lineal footage of Type 3. (i.e., a 10,000 sq ft project
would allow for a combined 500 lineal feet of Type 1 & 2 repairs and 300 lineal feet of
Type 3 repairs.
RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 23 - 11
Flooring
Guide Specification
a.
Type 1 Crack Detailing: Hairline cracks shall receive detail coat of epoxy primer
with 6" fabric reinforcement.
b.
Type 2 Crack Detailing Fill cracks greater than hairline but less than 1/16" wide
after surface preparation with neat, epoxy membrane. Place detail coat of epoxy
membrane over crack and embed 12" fiberglass cloth. Lightly abrade or solvent
wipe treated cracks prior to applying primer.
c.
Type 3 Crack Detailing Fill cracks greater than 1/16" with flexible epoxy
membrane. Place 25-30 mil detail coat so that flexible epoxy membrane extends at
least 9” to 12” on each side of crack or joint. After flexible epoxy membrane has
leveled, lay precut reinforcing fabric into wet membrane. Smooth cloth with a flat
steel trowel, allowing cloth to be encapsulated but remain exposed on the surface
of flexible epoxy membrane. Lightly abrade or solvent wipe treated cracks prior to
applying primer.
NOTE: For the floor leveling purposes, the Bid cost for Epoxy Terrazzo shall include the
price for installing a 5/8” minimum epoxy sand level.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
General: Comply with NTMA specifications and recommendations, unless otherwise shown or
specified for installation of strips, placing, curing, grinding, and finishing of terrazzo. Make
provisions for protecting adjacent work from terrazzo placement and finishing.
1.
Extend terrazzo work into recesses and under equipment in the spaces shown or
scheduled to receive terrazzo. Form a complete covering without interruptions or seams,
except provide divider strips where shown. Place and finish terrazzo uniformly and
neatly around obstructions so as to achieve continuous color, pattern and finish
throughout the Work.
2.
Complete terrazzo work prior to contiguous work which might be damaged by water or
other materials used.
Epoxy Terrazzo:
1.
Control Joints, Stop Strips and Divider Strips:
a.
Control Joints: Place back to back angle divider strips directly over concrete
control joints leaving a space appropriate for anticipated movement – typically
1/4” – 3/8”. Fill gap between control joints with divider strip joint sealant. If
flexible membrane was placed greater than 72 hours before placement of epoxy
terrazzo, solvent wipe completely prior to installing epoxy primer and terrazzo.
NOTE: All control joints to be carried to the surface.
RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 23 - 12
Flooring
Guide Specification
b.
Stop Strips: Install stop strips at perimeter of epoxy terrazzo flooring fields.
Adhere stop strips with substrate primer – do not fasten to concrete. If flexible
membrane was placed greater than 72 hours before placement of epoxy terrazzo,
solvent wipe completely prior to installing epoxy primer and terrazzo.
c.
Divider Strips: Place divider strips directly over concrete where indicated on the
drawings. Adhere divider strips with substrate primer – do not fasten to concrete.
If flexible membrane was placed greater than 72 hours before placement of epoxy
terrazzo, solvent wipe completely prior to installing epoxy primer and terrazzo.
NOTE: All pours to be to the divider strips. Phased pours in areas within the divider
strips shall not be allowed unless directed otherwise by LAWA. The leg of the divider
strip shall be fully bonded to the slab. When two divider strips are joined, the ends
shall touch and align.
2.
3.
Placing Epoxy Terrazzo:
a.
Clean and prepare substrate to comply with NTMA specifications for type of
terrazzo application indicated. Clean substrate of loose chips and foreign matter.
b.
Priming: Apply epoxy primer evenly over prepared flexible membrane at the rate
of 200-300 square feet per gallon, to thoroughly wet surface, but avoiding
"ponding" the material.
c.
For thinset terrazzo topping, comply with resin manufacturer's recommendations
for proportioning mixes.
d.
Comply with NTMA guide specifications previously referenced under "Thin-Set
Terrazzo Materials" and with matrix manufacturer's directions for installing thinset terrazzo. Match Architect's samples and provide total material thickness of not
less than 3/8”. Allow cure per manufacturer's recommendations prior to grinding
operations.
Grinding: Exercise extreme care to ensure fluids from grinding operation do not react
with dividers and strips to produce a stain on aggregate. Delay grinding until heavy trade
work is completed and construction traffic through the area is restricted.
a.
Rough Grinding: Grind with 24 or finer grit stones or with comparable diamond
plates.
b.
Intermediate Grinding: Follow initial grind with 80 or finer grit stones.
c.
Grouting: Cleanse floor with clean water and rinse thoroughly. Remove excess
rinse water by wet vacuum and machine until completely dry. Apply epoxy grout
to fill voids.
d.
Fine Grinding: Grind with 120 or finer grit stones until all grout is removed from
surface. Upon completion terrazzo shall show a minimum of 70% to 75% of
marble chips.
RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 23 - 13
Flooring
Guide Specification
C.
3.4
Precast Terrazzo:
1.
Preparation: Clean precast terrazzo surfaces which have become dirty or stained prior to
setting to remove soil, stains and foreign materials. Clean precast terrazzo by thoroughly
scrubbing with fiber brushes followed by a thorough drenching with clear water. Use only
mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh filler or abrasives.
2.
Installation, General:
a.
Employ only skilled and experienced workmen to install the precast terrazzo work.
Use carborundum or diamond tipped power saws to cut precast terrazzo units which
need to be fitted to existing field conditions.
b.
Set precast terrazzo units to comply with requirements indicated on drawings and
final shop drawings. Install anchors, supports, fasteners and other attachments
indicated or necessary to secure precast terrazzo work in place. Shim and adjust
anchors, supports and accessories to set precast terrazzo work accurately in locations
indicated with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned.
c.
Installation Tolerances:
1)
Joint Widths: +/- 1/16".
2)
Variation from Plumb: +/- 1/16".
3)
Variation from Level: +/- 1/8" in 20', non-cumulative.
4)
Piece Alignments (Edge to Edge): +/- 1/32”.
3.
Installation of Wall Base: Install base where indicated, after placing floors, and in
accordance with NTMA, and the applicable provisions of TCA W243 and ANSI A108.5.
Tamp units into setting bed to achieve a full bond without voids. Level units at joints.
Grind at joints to remove any minor discrepancies in level of units. Replace warped,
stained, damaged and non-matching units as directed. Grout joints, except those shown to
receive sealant or divider strips, with a mixture of Portland cement, pigment and water,
matching the matrix of the unit being grouted.
4.
Installation of Stair Tread/Risers: Place setting bed on steel pan and poured in place
concrete type stairs where shown and in accordance with NTMA, and the applicable
provisions of TCA S151 Method F111 (for steel pan stairs) and Methods F112 and W211
(for concrete stairs) and ANSI A108.1A. Tamp units into setting bed to achieve a full bond
without voids. Level units at joints. Grind at joints to remove any minor discrepancies in
level of units. Replace warped, stained, damaged and non-matching units as directed.
Grout joints, except those shown to receive sealant or divider strips, with a mixture of
Portland cement, pigment and water, matching the matrix of the units being grouted.
CLEANING, SEALING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean terrazzo after installing and grinding operations are completed by thoroughly washing all
terrazzo surfaces with a neutral cleaner. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry
RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 23 - 14
Flooring
Guide Specification
thoroughly. Apply sealer in two coats at the coverage rate of 500 square feet per gallon per coat
in compliance with sealer manufacturer's instructions. Protect terrazzo from damage and wear
during construction operations.
END OF SECTION 09 66 23
RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING
09 66 23 - 15
Flooring
Guide Specification
SECTION 09 68 13 – TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes carpet tile.
STANDARDS
A.
1.3
Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the
applicable provisions and recommendations of the following:
1.
The Carpet and Rug Institute "The Carpet Specifiers' Handbook."
2.
The Carpet and Rug Institute "CRI 104 Commercial Carpet Installation Standard."
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit product data, specifications, installation instructions for materials
specified herein and other data as may be required to show compliance with the Contract
Documents. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate required.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
C.
Samples: Submit samples showing full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected.
Prepare samples from same material to be used for the Work. Label each Sample with
manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on
Drawings and in schedules. Submit the following:
1.
2.
D.
Existing floor materials to be removed.
Existing floor materials to remain.
Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet tiles.
Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.
Type of subfloor.
Type of installation.
Pattern of installation, carpet locations, direction, and starting points per floor.
Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
Pile direction.
Transition and other accessory strips.
Transition details to other flooring materials.
Carpet Tile: Full-size Samples.
Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples.
Maintenance Data: Submit copies of instructions for care, cleaning, maintenance and repair of
carpeting.
TILE CARPETING
09 68 13 - 1
Flooring
Guide Specification
1.
E.
1.4
Each carpet manufacturer shall meet with the authorized LAWA personnel, to review the
characteristics of his product and to recommend appropriate maintenance procedures, prior
to occupancy of the finished spaces.
Warranty: Submit special warranties specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage a carpet installer, who has completed a minimum of three (3)
projects over the last 10 years which were similar in material, design and extent to that indicated
for the project - as determined by the LAWA – and which have resulted in construction with a
record of successful in service performance.
1.
In the case where the Installer is actually a Dealer, it is understood that the terms
Installer, Dealer, Carpeting Contractor and Contractor shall be one and the same for
purposes of this Contract. He shall assume responsibility for all of the work, including
acquisition of the materials from the manufacturers herein specified.
B.
Mill Inspection: The carpeting may be inspected to determine compliance with the Contract
Documents with respect to manufacture, materials, pattern and colors. Inspection may be made
at the mill by a representative of LAWA at any time during the process of manufacture.
C.
Sample Installations: Before installing carpet, install sample installation, for each type of carpet
installation required to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
Install sample installations to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated
for the completed Work:
1.
Size and Location: Provide 250 square foot (23.23 sq.m) sample installation in location
as directed by LAWA.
2.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
3.
Obtain LAWA's approval of sample installations before starting work.
4.
Maintain sample installations during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
5.
Approved sample installations may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at
time of Substantial Completion.
NOTE: The contractor shall not proceed with installation until the required mock up has
been approved by LAWA.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver carpeting in original mill protective wrapping with mill register numbers and tags
attached.
B.
Deliver other materials in manufacturers unopened containers identified with name, brand, type,
grade, class, and other qualifying information.
TILE CARPETING
09 68 13 - 2
Flooring
Guide Specification
C.
1.6
Store materials in a dry location, in such a manner as to prevent damage.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tile until wet work in spaces is complete and
dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
B.
Do not install carpet tile over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to
bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Carpet Manufacturer’s Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet tile manufacturer agreeing
to replace carpet tile that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified
warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual
traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more
than 10 percent loss of face fiber, wear, static buildup in excess of 3.0 kV when tested under the
Standard Shuffle Test at 70 deg. F (21 deg. C) and 20% RH, edge raveling without seam
sealers, tuft bind loss, zippering (wet or dry), shrinkage, curling, doming, snags, runs, and
delamination. Warrantees shall be full term, not pro-rated for the specified warranty period.
1.
1.8
Warranty Period: 10 years.
EXTRA MATERIALS AND ATTIC STOCK
A.
Attic Stock: Package and deliver usable remnants of carpet to LAWA at the conclusion of the
job. Include any uncut carpet tiles.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CARPET TILE
A.
Carpet Tile Types: Provide manufacturers commercial grade carpet tile for a 100% glue down
installation.
B.
Provide carpet tile by one of the following:
1.
Interface
2.
Lees / Mohawk Industries
3.
Milliken
4.
Mannington
5.
Shaw
C.
Fiber Content: Nylon 6,6.
D.
Pile Characteristics: No Over-Tufting.
E.
Dye Process: Solution-dye or injection-dye is required.
TILE CARPETING
09 68 13 - 3
Flooring
Guide Specification
F.
2.2
Density: Greater than 7000.
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Portland cement-based formulation provided
by or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Do not use gypsum based compounds.
B.
Carpet Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew resistant, and nonstaining, high solids, low VOC
emitting formulations that are specifically recommended by the carpet manufacturer, as verified
through compatibility and adhesion testing for the intended substrate and application, and that
comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet.
C.
Carpet Edging: Provide rubber composition carpet edging in single lengths wherever possible,
keeping the number of joints or splices to a minimum. Provide in quantities and locations as job
required based upon the recommended good practice of the industry; include in every location
where carpet terminates and other flooring continues. Color to match adjacent carpet types.
D.
Floor Sealer: Type as recommended and manufactured by the carpet tile manufacturer for the
applications indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A.
3.2
Prior to the installation, meet at the project site to review the material selections, substrate
preparations, installation procedures, coordination with other trades, special details and
conditions, standard of workmanship, and other pertinent topics related to the Work. The
meeting shall include LAWA, the Architect of Record, the Contractor, the installer, material
manufacturer's representatives, and representatives of other trades or subcontractors affected by
the installation.
PREPARATION
A.
Coordinate the installation of carpet so as not to delay the occupancy of the site or interfere with
the completion of construction.
B.
Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and the conditions under which the Work is to
be installed. Verify recommended limits for moisture content and alkalinity of concrete
substrates with carpet manufacturer.
1.
Moisture Content: Verify moisture content using a standard calcium chloride crystal test
or a 1 square yard (0.84 sq.m) clear plastic test. Perform testing at a frequency as
recommended by the carpet manufacturer. Perform testing at a frequency of not less than
once every 1,000 square feet (93 sq.m).
2.
Alkalinity Test: Verify alkalinity of concrete substrates by drilling a 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)
diameter hole approximately 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) deep, remove all residue; fill with
distilled water, allow water to stand 3 minutes and test with a calibrated electronic meter
TILE CARPETING
09 68 13 - 4
Flooring
Guide Specification
or Ph paper. Perform testing at a frequency of not less than once every 1,000 square feet
(93 sq.m).
3.
C.
Alternative test procedures for moisture content and alkalinity may be acceptable subject
to the carpet manufacturer’s review and written acceptance.
Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with the following:
1.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, existing floor covering adhesive residues,
and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil,
or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by
the carpet manufacturer.
2.
Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the carpet
manufacturer.
3.
Use leveling and patching compounds recommended by flooring manufacturer for filling
cracks, holes and depressions in the substrate. Surface shall be smooth, level and at
proper elevation. Remove ridges, roughness and protrusions from concrete surfaces by
grinding.
D.
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet.
E.
Carpet installation shall not commence until painting and finishing work are complete and
ceiling and overhead work is tested, approved, and completed.
F.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with the manufacturer's instructions, specified industry standards and
recommendations, and as required to match the accepted sample installations. Apply adhesive
in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's directions.
B.
Adhere all full size, perimeter tiles, and cut tiles, with a full spread of adhesive. Dry fit cut tiles
and apply adhesive to tile back after tile has been cut. Use full uncut tiles down the center of
corridors and, where necessary, cut perimeter tiles to butt walls.
1.
Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal
cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
2.
Cut openings in carpet for electrical outlets, piping and other penetrations. Maintain close
tolerances so that edges of carpet will be covered by plates and escutcheons.
3.
Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,
removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
TILE CARPETING
09 68 13 - 5
Flooring
Guide Specification
C.
Butt carpet tile tightly together to form seams without gaps or entrapped pile yarns and aligned
with adjoining tiles.
D.
Edge Strip Installation: Install edge strip at every location where edge of carpet is exposed to
traffic, unless otherwise indicated. Unless otherwise directed by the Architect of Record, install
in single lengths and secure in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
E.
Traffic over adhesive installations shall be restricted until adhesive has properly cured in
accordance with the adhesive manufacturers recommendations.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Cleaning: As the carpeting is installed, remove and dispose of all trimmings, excess pieces of
carpeting and laying materials from each area as it is completed. Vacuum carpeting with a
commercial vacuum, having a cylindrical brush or beater bar and high suction. Remove
adhesives, stains, and soil spots in accordance with the carpet manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Protection: Protect carpeting against damage of every kind as damaged carpeting shall be
rejected. Use non-staining cover material for protection. Tape joints of protective covering.
1.
Plastic and polyethylene sheet protective coverings shall not be permitted.
2.
Remove and replace rejected carpeting with new carpeting. At the completion of the
work, remove covering, vacuum clean carpeting and remove soiling and stains (if any) to
the satisfaction of LAWA.
END OF SECTION 09 68 13
TILE CARPETING
09 68 13 - 6
Flooring
Guide Specification
SECTION 09 68 16 – SHEET CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes broadloom carpet.
STANDARDS
A.
1.3
Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the
applicable provisions and recommendations of the following:
1.
The Carpet and Rug Institute "The Carpet Specifiers' Handbook."
2.
The Carpet and Rug Institute "CRI 104 Commercial Carpet Installation Standard."
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit product data, specifications, installation instructions for materials
specified herein and other data as may be required to show compliance with the Contract
Documents. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate required.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
C.
Existing floor materials to be removed.
Existing floor materials to remain.
Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet.
Dye lots, pattern types, repeats, locations, pile direction, and starting points per floor.
Seam locations, types, and methods.
Type of installation.
Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
Show details of cutouts.
Type of cushion.
Include on shop drawings dimensions which verify field conditions.
Transition, and other accessory strips.
Transition details to other flooring materials.
Samples: Submit samples showing full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected.
Prepare samples from same material to be used for the Work. Label each Sample with
manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on
Drawings and in schedules. Submit the following:
1.
2.
3.
Carpet: 24-inch- (600-mm-) square Samples of each carpet required.
Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples.
Carpet Cushion: 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Sample.
SHEET CARPETING
09 68 16 - 1
Flooring
Guide Specification
4.
D.
Maintenance Data: Submit copies of instructions for care, cleaning, maintenance and repair of
carpeting.
1.
E.
1.4
Mitered Carpet Border Seam: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample. Show carpet pattern
alignment.
Each carpet manufacturer shall meet with the authorized LAWA personnel, to review the
characteristics of their product and to recommend appropriate maintenance procedures,
prior to occupancy of the finished spaces.
Warranties: Submit special warranties specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage a carpet installer, who has completed a minimum of three (3)
projects over the last 10 years which were similar in material, design and extent to that indicated
for the project - as determined by LAWA – and which have resulted in construction with a
record of successful in service performance.
1.
In the case where the Installer is actually a Dealer, it is understood that the terms
Installer, Dealer, Carpeting Contractor and Contractor shall be one and the same for
purposes of this Contract. He shall assume responsibility for all of the work, including
acquisition of the materials from the manufacturers herein specified.
B.
Mill Inspection: The carpeting may be inspected to determine compliance with the Contract
Documents with respect to manufacture, materials, pattern and colors. Inspection may be made
at the mill by a representative of LAWA at any time during the process of manufacture.
C.
Sample Installations: Before installing carpet, install sample installations for each type of
carpet installation required to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and
execution. Install sample installations to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1.
Size and Location: Provide 250 square foot (23.23 sq.m) sample installations in locations
as directed by LAWA. Subdivide the sample installation with one continuous seam of
the type specified.
2.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
3.
Obtain LAWA's approval of sample installations before starting work.
4.
Maintain sample installations during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
5.
Approved sample installations may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at
time of Substantial Completion.
SHEET CARPETING
09 68 16 - 2
Flooring
Guide Specification
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver carpeting in original mill protective wrapping with mill register numbers and tags
attached.
B.
Deliver other materials in manufacturers unopened containers identified with name, brand, type,
grade, class, and other qualifying information.
C.
Store materials in a dry location, in such a manner as to prevent damage.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use. Stack rolls horizontally no higher than two high on
a flat surface.
B.
Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Carpet Manufacturer’s Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to
replace carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty
period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10
percent loss of face fiber, wear, static buildup in excess of 3.0 kV when tested under the
Standard Shuffle Test at 70 deg. F (21 deg. C) and 20% RH, edge raveling, tuft bind loss,
shrinkage, zippering (wet or dry), and delamination. Warrantees shall be full term, not pro-rated
for the specified warranty period.
1.
1.8
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS AND ATTIC STOCK
A.
Attic Stock: Package and deliver usable remnants of carpet to a storage room as directed by
LAWA at the conclusion of the job. Include pieces of broadloom 20 square feet (1.86 sq.m) in
area or greater.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CARPET
A.
Carpet Types: Provide manufacturers commercial grade broadloom carpet for 100% glue
down installation.
B.
Provide carpet tile by one of the following:
1.
Interface
2.
Lees / Mohawk Industries
3.
Milliken
SHEET CARPETING
09 68 16 - 3
Flooring
Guide Specification
4.
5.
Mannington
Shaw
C.
Fiber Content: Nylon 6,6.
D.
Pile Characteristics: No Over-Tufting.
E.
Dye Process: Solution-dye or injection-dye is required.
F.
Density: Greater than 7000.
2.2
CARPET CUSHION
A.
2.3
Product as recommended in writing by the carpet manufacturer for the application indicated and
which will not void the specified warranties, (if required).
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Portland cement based formulation provided
by or recommended by the following. Do not use gypsum based compounds.
1.
2.
Carpet manufacturer.
Carpet cushion manufacturer.
B.
Carpet Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew resistant, and nonstaining, high solids, low VOC
emitting formulations that are specifically recommended by the carpet manufacturer, as verified
through compatibility and adhesion testing for the intended substrate and application, and that
comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet:
C.
Tackless Carpet Stripping (Stretch-In Installations): Water-resistant plywood in minimum 1
inch (25 mm) wide strips, thickness to match cushion thickness, with minimum 3 rows of
prenailed angular pins protruding from the top designed to grip and hold stretched carpet at
backing.
D.
Plastic Coated Fabric Tape (Stretch-In and Double Stick Broadloom Cushion Installations):
Woven fabric impregnated with plastic and coated with adhesive having high-tack adhesion
forming a secure bond for application to cushion top seams to resist peaking. Provide
water-resistant plastic-coated tape which will unwind without adhesive transfer.
E.
Seaming Tape: Hot melt adhesive tape, 6" wide, recommended by the carpet mill as suitable for
backing specified.
F.
Seaming Cement: Water-resistant and flame-resistant carpet adhesive for sealing raw edges,
seaming, reinforcing seams and patching. Provide fast drying, easy spreading carpet seaming
adhesive having excellent aging characteristics recommended by the carpet manufacturer.
G.
Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.
H.
Carpet Edging: Provide rubber composition carpet edging in single lengths wherever possible,
keeping the number of joints or splices to a minimum. Provide in quantities and locations as job
SHEET CARPETING
09 68 16 - 4
Flooring
Guide Specification
required based upon the recommended good practice of the industry; include in every location
where carpet terminates and other flooring continues. Color to match adjacent carpet types.
I.
Floor Sealer: Type as recommended and manufactured by the carpet manufacturer for the
applications indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A.
3.2
Prior to the installation, meet at the project site to review the material selections, substrate
preparations, installation procedures, coordination with other trades, special details and
conditions, standard of workmanship, and other pertinent topics related to the Work. The
meeting shall include the LAWA, the Architect of Record, the Contractor, the installer, material
manufacturer's representatives, and representatives of other trades or subcontractors affected by
the installation.
PREPARATION
A.
Coordinate the installation of carpet so as not to delay the occupancy of the site or interfere with
the completion of construction.
B.
Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and the conditions under which the Work is to
be installed. Verify recommended limits for moisture content and alkalinity of concrete
substrates with carpet manufacturer.
C.
1.
Moisture Content: Verify moisture content using a standard calcium chloride crystal test
or a 1 square yard (0.84 sq.m) clear plastic test. Perform testing at a frequency of not less
than once every 1,000 square feet (93 sq.m).
2.
Alkalinity Test: Verify alkalinity of concrete substrates by drilling a 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)
diameter hole approximately 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) deep, remove all residue; fill with
distilled water, allow water to stand 3 minutes and test with a calibrated electronic meter
or Ph paper. Perform testing at a frequency of not less than once every 1,000 square feet
(93 sq.m).
3.
Alternative test procedures for moisture content and alkalinity may be acceptable subject
to the carpet manufacturer’s review and written acceptance.
Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with the following:
1.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, existing floor covering adhesive residues,
and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil,
or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by
the carpet manufacturer.
2.
Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
SHEET CARPETING
09 68 16 - 5
Flooring
Guide Specification
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the carpet
manufacturer.
3.
Use leveling and patching compounds recommended by flooring manufacturer for filling
cracks, holes and depressions in the substrate. Surface shall be smooth, level and at
proper elevation. Remove ridges, roughness and protrusions from concrete surfaces by
grinding.
D.
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet.
E.
Carpet installation shall not commence until painting and finishing work are complete and
ceiling and overhead work is tested, approved, and completed.
F.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
100% Direct Glue Down of Broadloom Carpet: Comply with the manufacturer's instructions,
specified industry standards and recommendations, and as required to match the accepted
sample installations.
1.
Carpet Layout, Cutting and Edge Trim Seaming: Prior to applying adhesives, place seams
at locations indicated on accepted shop drawings. All carpet rolls shall be installed in the
exact roll number sequence as listed on the carpet rolls. Maintain direction of pattern,
texture and lay of pile. Side to end seaming shall not be allowed. All edges of all rolls of
carpet shall be finish trimmed prior to laying to assure a perfect seam condition and
carpet match. All trimmed edges shall then be treated with latex seaming adhesive to
assure that loose and cut yarns are not left to ravel or pull out.
a.
Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and builtin furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.
Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
b.
Extend carpet into closets and offsets, and under movable equipment of the rooms
and spaces shown or scheduled to receive carpet, including recessed covers within
those spaces.
c.
Provide cutouts as required for removable access covers in substrates except do not
cutout for floor closer cover plates. Bind edges neatly and secure to substrate. Cut
only 3 sides wherever it is feasible to provide carpet flap in lieu of fully removable
cutout.
d.
At doorways, center seams under door in closed position; do not place seams
perpendicular to door frame in direction of traffic through doorway.
e.
Cut openings in carpet for electrical outlets, piping and other penetrations.
Maintain close tolerances so that edges of carpet will be covered by plates and
escutcheons.
f.
Seams shall be located away from areas subject to pivoting traffic.
SHEET CARPETING
09 68 16 - 6
Flooring
Guide Specification
B.
2.
Apply adhesive in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's directions.
3.
Adhere carpet with a full spread of adhesive. Ensure uniform bond over the entire area.
Butt carpet tightly together to form seams without gaps or entrapped pile yarns and
aligned with adjoining rolls of carpet. Seams shall be pressed by hand and/or
suitable tool to produce the best possible even top pile width-to-width. Adjacent
widths of carpet must be installed to finish at exactly the same elevation.
b.
Roll carpet uniformly, removing air pockets and bubbles.
c.
If the pile of the carpet has been compressed while laying in storage, so that there
appears to be a difference in color in adjacent widths of material, the Contractor
shall neutralize the pile with a steam machine and obtain a uniform pile direction
throughout by brushing the carpet while it is still damp, at no additional cost to
LAWA.
4.
Edge Strip Installation: Install edge strip at every location where edge of carpet is
exposed to traffic, unless otherwise indicated. Unless otherwise directed by the Architect
of Record, install in single lengths and secure in accordance with manufacturer's
directions.
5.
Traffic over adhesive installations shall be restricted until adhesive has properly cured in
accordance with the adhesive manufacturers recommendations.
Stair Carpeting: Comply with the manufacturer's instructions, specified industry standards and
recommendations, and as follows:
1.
3.4
a.
Glue Down Installation: Tightly secure carpet to treads and risers using carpet adhesive.
Stairs with a return nosing shall be cut and installed with the tread and risers being
separate pieces.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Cleaning: As the carpeting is installed, remove and dispose of all trimmings, excess pieces of
carpeting and laying materials from each area as it is completed. Vacuum carpeting with a
commercial vacuum, having a cylindrical brush or beater bar and high suction. Remove
adhesives, stains, and soil spots in accordance with the carpet manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Protection: Protect carpeting against damage of every kind as damaged carpeting shall be
rejected. Use non-staining cover material for protection. Tape joints of protective covering.
1.
Plastic and polyethylene sheet protective coverings shall not be permitted over glue down
installations.
2.
Remove and replace rejected carpeting with new carpeting. At the completion of the
work and when directed by LAWA, remove covering, vacuum clean carpeting and
remove soiling and stains (if any) to the satisfaction of LAWA.
SHEET CARPETING
09 68 16 - 7
Flooring
Guide Specification
END OF SECTION 09 68 16
SHEET CARPETING
09 68 16 - 8
Flooring
Guide Specification
SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
C.
Product List: For each product indicated.
1.3
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
1.4
Furnish extra materials from the same production run as the material applied.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to
verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
LAWA will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system.
a.
Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide to LAWA, samples of at least 100 sq.
ft..
b.
Other Items: LAWA may designate items or areas required.
2.
Final LAWA approval of paint selections will be based on mockups.
3.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with LAWA requirements:
1.
Benjamin Moore & Co.
2.
Dunn-Edwards Corporation.
3.
Frazee Paint.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 1
Walls
Guide Specification
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.2
ICI Paints
Kelly-Moore Paints
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
Sherwin-Williams Company.
Vista Paint.
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
Material Compatibility:
1.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B.
VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of Los Angeles Department of Building
and Safety and LAWA requirements.
C.
FLOOR COATINGS:
1.
Frazee; Monochem Dex-coat 2600
2.
ICI; Groundworks, 3214 Water-based Clear Acrylic Concrete Sealer
3.
PPG; Perma-Crete Plex-Seal WB Interior/Exterior Clear Sealer 4-6200
4.
Sherwin Williams; H&C Concrete & Masonry Waterproofing Sealer
2.3
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing of Paint Materials: LAWA reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1.
LAWA may engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials.
Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If
paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at
Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1.
Concrete: 12 percent.
2.
Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3.
Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
4.
Plaster: 12 percent.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 2
Walls
Guide Specification
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
C.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
NOTE: When planning, either partial or full removal of existing coatings, regulatory restrictions and procedures shall be followed.
D.
Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do
not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture
content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written
instructions.
F.
Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."
G.
Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop
paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with
SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
H.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that
promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 3
Walls
Guide Specification
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations.
B.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety
and Security Work:
1.
Paint the following work where exposed in LAWA equipment rooms:
a.
Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear.
b.
Uninsulated metal piping.
c.
Uninsulated plastic piping
d.
Pipe hangers and support.
e.
Metal conduit.
f.
Plastic conduit.
g.
Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
h.
Duct, equipment and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or
other paintable jacket material.
i.
Mechanical and electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory primed
finish for field painting.
2.
3.4
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.
Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Dry Film Thickness Testing: LAWA may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1.
Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2.
If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply
additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 4
Walls
Guide Specification
3.5
3.6
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site as per LAWA direction.
B.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by LAWA, and leave
in an undamaged condition.
D.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
Provide interior painting schedule indicating the type of prime coat, intermediate coat and
top coat for all substrates applicable to your project.
END OF SECTION 09 91 23
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 5
Walls
Guide Specification
SECTION 10 21 13 − TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes toilet compartments and screens as follows:
1.
Type: Stainless steel.
2.
Compartment Style: Ceiling hung with intermittent floor support.
3.
Screen Style: Wall hung.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation, and attachments to
other work and hardware.
NOTE: These shop drawings shall accurately indicate existing field conditions. Perform a
dimensional field survey of as-built conditions prior to submitting shop drawings.
C.
Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color and pattern required.
D.
Maintenance manuals
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and
Architectural Barriers Act and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities and the City of Los Angeles Building Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to approval by LAWA, provide products the following:
B.
1.
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10 21 13 - 1
Public Rest Rooms
Guide Specification
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
2.3
Panel, Pilaster, and Door Material:
1.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled flatness, patterned.
FABRICATION
A.
Toilet Compartments: Ceiling hung with intermittent floor support.
B.
Urinal Screens: Wall hung.
C.
Metal Units: Internally reinforce metal panels for hardware, accessories, and grab bars.
D.
Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, 24 inch wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet
compartments and 36 inch wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32 inch wide clear
opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
E.
Door Hardware: Stainless steel. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with
disabilities.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb, with not more than 1/4 inch between pilasters and
panels and not more than 3/4 inch between panels and walls. Provide brackets, pilaster shoes,
bracing, and other components required for a complete installation. Use theft-resistant exposed
fasteners finished to match hardware. Use sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications.
NOTE: Partition Pilasters supporting adjacent partitions with accessible grab bars shall
extend to the floor with a stainless steel shoe. Floor to ceiling pilasters shall be located at all
corners of toilet stall partition that are not supported by adjacent wall.
Locked partition doors shall be removable by lifting the door up and off the hinges with
special tools. Doors at unoccupied stalls shall be held partially open (30 degrees) in a consistent and uniform position and shall open into the stall, except at accessible stalls, where
the doors shall swing out.
Coat hooks shall be installed inside of each compartment wall at centerline and 6 inches below top of door except at accessible stalls where the maximum is 48" above finish floor.
Coat hooks shall bear at least 15 lbs.
Coordinate with the structural specification for the steel member that support ceiling hung
toilet compartments. Indicate this steel support on the drawings.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10 21 13 - 2
Public Rest Rooms
Guide Specification
END OF SECTION 10 21 13
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10 21 13 - 3
Public Rest Rooms
SECTION 10 26 00 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Corner guards.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions
of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant wall protection
unit.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.4
Source Limitations: Obtain corner guards from single source from single manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.5
Store impact-resistant wall protection units in original undamaged packages and containers
inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and
humidity.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall protection units until
building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is
operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F for not less than 72 hours before beginning
installation and for the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M.
B.
Adhesive: As recommended by impact-resistant plastic wall protection manufacturer and with a
VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
10 26 00 - 1
Walls
2.2
CORNER GUARDS
A.
2.3
Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards: Fabricated from one-piece, formed or extruded metal
with formed edges; with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc.
b.
Balco, Inc.
c.
Construction Specialties, Inc.
d.
Korogard Wall Protection Systems; a division of RJF International Corporation.
2.
Material: Stainless steel, Type 304.
a.
Thickness: Minimum 0.0625 inch.
b.
Finish: Directional satin, No. 4.
3.
4.
5.
Wing Size: Nominal 3-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches.
Corner Radius: 1/8 inch.
Mounting: Adhesive.
END-WALL GUARDS
A.
2.4
Surface-Mounted, Metal, End-Wall Guards: Fabricated from one-piece, formed or extruded
metal that covers entire end of wall; with formed edges.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc.
b.
Balco, Inc.
c.
Construction Specialties, Inc.
d.
Korogard Wall Protection Systems; a division of RJF International Corporation.
2.
Material: Stainless steel, Type 304.
a.
Thickness: Minimum 0.0625 inch.
b.
Finish: Directional satin, No. 4.
3.
Wing Size: Nominal 3-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches.
4.
Corner Radius: 1/8 inch.
5.
Mounting: Adhesive.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate impact-resistant wall protection units to comply with requirements indicated for
design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.
B.
Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.
Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
10 26 00 - 2
Walls
C.
2.5
Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces
free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members
and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.
METAL FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
2.
Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
3.
Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
4.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign
matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
B.
Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds,
and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment
of support fasteners.
1.
For impact-resistant wall protection units attached with adhesive or foam tape, verify
compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall
protection system components.
B.
Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without
distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be
visible in the finished Work.
1.
Install impact-resistant wall protection units in locations indicated
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
10 26 00 - 3
Walls
2.
3.4
Provide full height units. Do not splice.
CLEANING
A.
Immediately after completion of installation, clean corner guards.
B.
Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 10 26 00
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
10 26 00 - 4
Walls
Guide Specification
SECTION 10 28 00 – TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Public-use washroom accessories.
Warm-air dryers.
Childcare accessories.
Underlavatory guards.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Construction details and dimensions.
Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work
and substrate preparation.
Material and finish descriptions.
Features that will be included for Project.
Manufacturer's warranty.
B.
Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements.
C.
Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required.
D.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
E.
Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products
from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
TOILET, ACCESSORIES
10 28 00 - 1
Public Rest Rooms
Guide Specification
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,
cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B.
Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.
NOTE: Indicate all accessories on drawings with an accessory schedule. Verify wall
thickness for all recessed accessories.
1.5
WARRANTY
A.
Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products
with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.
C.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036inch minimum nominal thickness.
D.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.
E.
Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
F.
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-andtheft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
G.
Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
H.
Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.
I.
ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.
TOILET, ACCESSORIES
10 28 00 - 2
Public Rest Rooms
Guide Specification
2.2
PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to LAWA approval, provide and indicate on the drawings the
following products:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Toilet Tissue (Jumbo-Roll) Dispenser:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-2280
Mounting: Stand Alone.
Material and Finish: Stainless steel.
Liquid-Soap Dispenser:
1.
2.
H.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley 334-10
Mounting: Semi Recessed.
Material and Finish: Stainless steel.
Waste Receptacle Large Capacity, Stand Alone:
1.
2.
3.
G.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-3644.
Mounting: Recessed.
Material and Finish: Stainless steel.
Semi Recessed Waste Receptacle:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia Pacific 59466.
Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Recessed Waste Receptacle:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick 2892.
Description: Stainless Steel Twin – Jumbo Roll Toilet tissue dispenser.
Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Paper Towel Dispenser:
1.
2.
D.
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
Georgia Pacific
Bradley
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-830.
Description: Sureflo Soap Dispensing System.
Grab Bar (corner):
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-68137.
TOILET, ACCESSORIES
10 28 00 - 3
Public Rest Rooms
Guide Specification
2.
3.
4.
5.
I.
Grab Bar (straight):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
J.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B – 4221, Contura Series
Mounting: Surface mounted.
Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Seat-Cover Dispenser (alternate):
1.
2.
3.
N.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-3500 25.
Type: Sanitary napkin and tampon.
Mounting: Fully recessed.
Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Seat-Cover Dispenser:
1.
2.
3.
M.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-352 25.
Type: Sanitary napkin and tampon.
Mounting: Fully recessed.
Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Vendor (alternate):
1.
2.
3.
4.
L.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-6806 x 36.
Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.
Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches.
Configuration and Length: Straight Bar – 36" long.
Vendor:
1.
2.
3.
4.
K.
Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.
Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches.
Configuration and Length: Corner, 36" x 54".
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B – 221
Mounting:
Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Mirror Unit:
1.
2.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-290.
Frame: Stainless-steel angle.
TOILET, ACCESSORIES
10 28 00 - 4
Public Rest Rooms
Guide Specification
O.
Air Freshener:
1.
2.
2.3
Basis-of-Design Product: Technical Concepts – Model no. 401375.
Description: Automatic Air Freshener.
WARM-AIR DRYERS
A.
Hand Dryer:
1.
2.4
Basis-of-Design Product: Dyson, Airblade A02 (LAWA Standard)
CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to LAWA approval, provide products by one of the following:
B.
Diaper-Changing Station:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Basis-of-Design Product: Koala Bear Kare – KB110SSRE.
Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with
child-protection strap.
Mounting: Recessed.
Operation: concealed pneumatic cylinder with hinge structure.
Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin), exterior shell with high density
grey polyethylene interior.
UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to LAWA approval, provide products by one of the following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
C.
Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.
Truebro by IPS Corporation.
Underlavatory Guard:
1.
2.
3.
Basis-of-Design Product: Truebro Lav Guard 2 E-Z.
Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent
direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing
coverings.
Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.
TOILET, ACCESSORIES
10 28 00 - 5
Public Rest Rooms
Guide Specification
2.6
CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES
2.7
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and
access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and
with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
B.
Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
The total number of keys for each accessory shall be determined by LAWA.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B.
Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf , when tested according to
ASTM F 446.
3.2
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
B.
Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C.
Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION 10 28 00
TOILET, ACCESSORIES
10 28 00 - 6
Public Rest Rooms
Guide Specification
SECTION 10 43 13 - DEFIBRILLATOR CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Custom fabricated automated external defibrillator (AED) cabinets.
2.
Automated external defibrillators (AED's).
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for AED cabinets.
1.
Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box
and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel
style.
2.
Automated External Defibrillator
B.
Shop Drawings: For AED cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below:
1.
1.3
Size: 6 by 6 inches square.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Maintenance Data: For AED cabinets and AED's.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
DEBRIBILLATOR CABINETS
10 43 13 - 1
Specialties
Guide Specification
1.
Review methods and procedures related to AED cabinets including, but not limited to,
the following:
a.
1.5
Schedules and coordination requirements.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of AED cabinets with wall depths.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
B.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
C.
Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind KT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1/8 inch,
Class I (clear).
2.2
AED CABINET
A.
Cabinet Type: Suitable for mounting AED with emergency telephone and alarm; match
existing AED cabinets;
1.
Basis of Design Product: Potter Roemer LLC; Model HSSS7063-D-LAWA-modified as
described herein or a comparable product by one of the following:
a.
b.
J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group;.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company;.
B.
Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.
C.
Cabinet Interior Size: 14 inches wide by 22 inches high by 6 inches deep, as required to
incorporate AED and specified features. All cabinet components and equipment shall be
accessible, removable and replaceable with the cabinet door in a 90 degree position.
D.
Cabinet Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
E.
Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim.
F.
Cabinet Trim Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
DEBRIBILLATOR CABINETS
10 43 13 - 2
Specialties
Guide Specification
G.
Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
H.
Door Style: Provide limited visibility window to match existing.
I.
Door Glazing: Tempered float glass.
J.
Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1.
2.
Provide manufacturer's standard.
Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open
180 degrees.
K.
Accessories:
1.
Identification: Manufacturer's standard.
L.
Finishes:
1.
2.
Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the interior of cabinet.
Stainless Steel: No. 4.
M.
Cabinet Interior Features:
1.
Emergency Phone Box.
2.
Cable Access Box
3.
Raceway
N.
Alarm:
1.
Circuitry Board.
2.
Alarm Circuitry
3.
Alarm Key Switch and Key:
4.
Control for Visual Alarm, Audio Alarm and Relay Cloasures:
O.
Power Requirements for Alarm Board, Siren and LED:
2.3
AUTOMATED EXTERNAL DEFIBRILLATOR (AEDS)
A.
2.4
Provide the following:
1.
Philips Heartstart OnSite (HS1) Defibrillator
FABRICATION
A.
AED Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware
to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
1.
2.
Weld joints and grind smooth.
Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
DEBRIBILLATOR CABINETS
10 43 13 - 3
Specialties
Guide Specification
B.
Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated
and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
C.
Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
2.5
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by
applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.
D.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.6
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A.
Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
B.
Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
1.
Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets
will be installed.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Prepare recesses for recessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and
trim style.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install AED cabinets in locations and at mounting heights, at heights acceptable to the
Los Angeles Fire Department.
DEBRIBILLATOR CABINETS
10 43 13 - 4
Specialties
Guide Specification
B.
3.4
AED Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as cabinets are installed
unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B.
Adjust cabinet doors to operate easily without binding.
C.
On completion of cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by
manufacturer.
D.
Touch up marred finishes, or replace cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished
appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by AED cabinet
and mounting bracket manufacturers.
E.
Replace AED cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 10 44 13
DEBRIBILLATOR CABINETS
10 43 13 - 5
Specialties
Guide Specification
SECTION 10 44 13 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Fire protection cabinets for the following:
a.
Portable fire extinguishers.
NOTE: Indicate on the drawings a fire extinguisher in a cabinet within a 75 foot travel distance to all portions of the building on each floor. Keep in mind that additional fire extinguishers and cabinets may be required as dictated by the Fire Department Field Inspector.
1.2
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection
cabinets.
1.
Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting
methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware,
cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.
B.
Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below:
1.
E.
1.3
Size: 6 by 6 inches square.
Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule
with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
10 44 13 - 1
Specialties
Guide Specification
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in
ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
Review methods and procedures related to fire protection cabinets including, but not
limited to, the following:
a.
1.5
Schedules and coordination requirements.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
B.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
C.
Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 1/4 inch-thick, mm
thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished).
2.2
FIRE PROTECTION CABINET
A.
Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group;.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company;.
Potter Roemer LLC;
B.
Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.
C.
Cabinet Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
10 44 13 - 2
Specialties
Guide Specification
1.
Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.
D.
Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim.
E.
Cabinet Trim Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
F.
Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
G.
Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.
H.
Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet.
1.
I.
Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1.
2.
J.
Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet.
Provide manufacturer's standard.
Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open
180 degrees.
Accessories:
1.
2.
Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to
fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers
indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
Identification: Comply with the Los Angeles Fire Department Requirements.
a.
Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE
EXTINGUISHER."
1)
2)
3)
4)
K.
Finishes:
1.
2.
2.3
Location: Applied to cabinet door.
Application Process: Engraved.
Lettering Color: Black.
Orientation: Vertical.
Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the interior of cabinet.
Stainless Steel: No. 4.
FABRICATION
A.
Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Weld joints and grind smooth.
Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
10 44 13 - 3
Specialties
Guide Specification
4.
Install door locks at factory.
B.
Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated
and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
C.
Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
2.4
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by
applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.
D.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.5
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A.
Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
B.
Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
1.
Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets
will be installed.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare recesses for recessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and
trim style.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
10 44 13 - 4
Specialties
Guide Specification
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights, at heights
acceptable to the Los Angeles Fire Department.
B.
Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B.
Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral
locking devices operate properly.
C.
On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factoryfinished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire
protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.
E.
Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 10 44 13
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
10 44 13 - 5
Specialties
Guide Specification
SECTION 10 44 16 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire
extinguishers.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire
extinguisher and mounting brackets.
B.
Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fire
protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
B.
Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to the Los Angeles Fire Department.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and
function.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
10 44 16 - 1
Specialties
Guide Specification
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting
bracket indicated.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.2
J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Potter Roemer LLC.
Valves: Manufacturer's standard.
Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.
Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections,
maintenance, and recharging.
Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 2-A:10-B:C, 5-lb nominal
capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.
MOUNTING BRACKETS
A.
Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall
or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated
or black baked-enamel finish.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
10 44 16 - 2
Specialties
Guide Specification
c.
B.
Potter Roemer LLC.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1.
Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in
red letter decals applied to mounting surface.
a.
Orientation: Vertical.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1.
B.
3.2
Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in
compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
END OF SECTION 10 44 16
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
10 44 16 - 3
Specialties
Guide Specification
SECTION 12 24 13 - ROLLER SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes roller shades with manual and electrical shade operators.
NOTE: Any window treatment is optional. Window treatment is used primarily to
reduce heat gain into the building and to improve the readability of electronic signage
during certain times of the day.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions,
construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes,
operating instructions, and typical wiring diagrams including integration of motor controllers
with building management system, audiovisual and lighting control systems as applicable.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of roller shades. Include elevations, sections,
details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings,
attachments to other work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each colored component of each type of shade indicated.
1.
E.
Ceiling suspension system members and attachment to building structure.
Ceiling-mounted or penetrating items including light fixtures, air outlets and inlets,
speakers, sprinklers, recessed shades, and special moldings at walls, column penetrations,
and other junctures of acoustical ceilings with adjoining construction.
Shade mounting assembly and attachment.
Size and location of access to shade operator, chain locations, motor, and adjustable
components.
Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:48).
Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
Complete, full-size operating unit not less than 16 inches (400 mm) wide for each type of
roller shade indicated.
For each finish product specified, one complete set of shade components, unassembled,
demonstrating compliance with specified requirements. Shadecloth sample and aluminum
finish sample as selected. Mark face of material to indicate interior faces.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
Window Treatment
12 24 13 - 1
`
Guide Specification
3.
For the following products:
a.
Shade Material: Not less than 3 inches (76 mm) square, with specified treatments
applied. Mark face of material.
b.
Window Treatment Schedule: For roller shades. Use same designations indicated
on Drawings.
F.
Product Certificates: For each type of roller shade, signed by product manufacturer.
G.
Qualification Data: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of ten
years experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section.
H.
Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Methods for maintaining roller shades and finishes.
Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to fabrics,
finishes, and performance.
Operating hardware.
Motorized shade operator.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single
manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years experience in manufacturing products
comparable to those specified in this section.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roller shade band materials with the fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction:
C.
Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701-99 small and large-scale vertical burn. Materials
tested shall be identical to products proposed for use.
D.
Product Standard: Provide roller shades complying with WCMA A 100.1.
E.
Electrical Components: NFPA Article 100 listed and labeled by either UL or ETL or other
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, marked for intended use, and tested
as a system. Individual testing of components will not be acceptable in lieu of system testing.
F.
Shade cloth to “pass” indoor air quality / VOC testing as per ASTM D 5116-97 ASTM D 667001, USEPA-ETV (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s Environmental Technology
Verification Protocol).
G.
Shade Cloth: Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi
ATCC9642, ATCC9644, ATCC9645.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
12 24 13 - 2
`
Window Treatment
Guide Specification
H.
Shade Cloth to be constructed of a woven screen material consisting of yarns comprised of
extruded vinyl coated Polyester core yarn as a composite Thermoplastic shade cloth that shall
be sealed at the edges, assuring binding the core yarn to the coating at the cut edge to assure a
sealed edge to substantially minimize raveling. Screen cloths to have inert core yarns: i.e.
Fiberglass yarns shall not be acceptable.
I.
Use only injection-molded Delrin engineered plastics by Dupont for all plastic components of
shade hardware. Styrene based, PVC, or glass reinforced polyester thermo polymer plastics are
not acceptable.
J.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.4
1.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
2.
Locate mock-up in window designated by LAWA.
3.
Do not proceed with remaining work until mock-up is accepted by LAWA.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.5
Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-testresponse characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on
Drawings and in a window treatment schedule.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty
finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B.
Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation
hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Roller Shade Hardware, Chain and Shadecloth; Manufacturer's standard fit-for-use, including
normal wear & tear,, non-depreciating, Limited Lifetime twenty-five year warranty. Warranty
to transfer to owner upon completion of installation.
B.
Roller Shade Motors and Motor Control Systems: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating
eight-year warranty.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
12 24 13 - 3
`
Window Treatment
Guide Specification
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ROLLER SHADES
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated
in Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1.
B.
MechoShade Systems, Inc (MechoShade), as basis of design, performance and
warranties, or equal.
Shade Band Material: The selection of density and color of sunscreen shadecloth shall be based
on the relationship with the specified glass, in accordance with the specific project requirements
for reducing heat loads and glare.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Fabric Width: As per manufacturer’s standard.
Pattern: As per manufacturer's standard.
Colors: As per manufacturer's standard.
Material Openness Factor: As per manufacturer's recommendation for specified glass
type and applicable conditions.
Bottom Hem: Fabric wrapped and electronically sealed at ends. Sewn hems and open
hem pockets are not acceptable.
C.
Rollers: Extruded-aluminum tube of diameter and wall thickness required to support and fit
internal components of operating system and the weight and width of shade band material
without sagging; designed to be easily removable from support brackets. Provide for positive
mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade band shall be made removable /
replaceable with a "snap-on" snap-off" spline mounting, without having to remove shade roller
from shade brackets. Mounting spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes,
staples, and/or rivets.
D.
Provide shade hardware system that allows multi-banded shades to be capable of smooth
operation when the axis is offset a maximum of 6 degrees on each side of the plane
perpendicular to the radial line of the curve, for a 12 degrees total offset.
E.
Direction of Roll: Reverse or regular roll, as required. Provide for universal, regular and offset
drive capacity, allowing drive chain to fall at front, rear or non-offset for all manual shade drive
end brackets. Universal offset shall be adjustable for future change.
F.
Mounting Brackets: Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) thick
plated steel or heavier as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade.
1.
Bracket shall be fully integrated with all accessories, including, but not limited to: fascia,
room darkening side / sill channels, center supports and connectors for multi-banded
shades.
2.
Drive sprocket and brake assembly shall rotate and be supported on a welded 3/8 inch
(9.525 mm) steel pin.
3.
The brake shall be an over - running clutch design which disengages to 90 percent during
the raising and lowering of a shade. The brake shall withstand a pull force of 50 lbs. (22
kg) in the stopped position.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
12 24 13 - 4
`
Window Treatment
Guide Specification
4.
The braking mechanism shall be applied to an oil-impregnated hub on to which the brake
system is mounted. The assembly shall be permanently lubricated. Products that require
externally applied lubrication and or not permanently lubricated are not acceptable. The
entire assembly shall be fully mounted on the steel support bracket, and fully independent
of the shade tube assembly, which may be removed and reinstalled without effecting the
roller shade limit adjustments.
G.
Drive Chain: #10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 lb. (41 kg) minimum breaking
strength. Nickel plated steel chain shall not be accepted.
H.
Roller Shade Pocket for recessed mounting in acoustical tile, or drywall ceilings.
1.
Provide either extruded aluminum and or formed steel shade pocket, sized to
accommodate roller shades, with exposed extruded removable closure panel to provide
access to shades.
2.
For open return air plenum, provide "Vented Pocket" such that there will be a minimum
of four 1 inch (25.4 mm) diameter holes per foot allowing the solar gain to flow above
the ceiling line.
3.
Provide pocket end caps where required.
I.
Fascia:
1.
Continuous removable extruded aluminum fascia that attaches to shade mounting
brackets without the use of adhesives, magnetic strips, or exposed fasteners. Fascia shall
be able to be installed across two or more shade bands in one piece. Fascia shall fully
conceal brackets, shade roller and fabric on the tube. Provide bracket / fascia end caps
where mounting conditions expose outside of roller shade brackets. Notching of Fascia
for manual chain shall not be acceptable.
a.
Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
J.
Manual Operation: Chain locations to be on right hand side of user.
2.2
ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to-jamb, unless
specifically indicated otherwise. Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or
distortion. Fabricate with heat-sealed trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or
raveling. Fabricate unguided shadecloth to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more
than 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) in either direction per 8 feet (2438 mm) of shade height due to warp
distortion or weave design.
B.
Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting
roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated.
C.
Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal
noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to
supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use.
D.
Color-Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard
baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation
including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
12 24 13 - 5
`
Window Treatment
Guide Specification
E.
2.3
Colors of Metal and Plastic Components Exposed to View: As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range, unless otherwise indicated.
MOTORIZED SHADE HARDWARE AND SHADE BRACKETS
A.
Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) thick plated steel, or
heavier, thicker, as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade.
B.
Provide shade hardware system that allows for field adjustment of motor or replacement of any
operable hardware component without requiring removal of brackets, regardless of mounting
position (inside, or outside mount).
C.
Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands offset by a
maximum of 8-45 degrees from the motor axis between shade bands (4-22.5 degrees) on each
side of the radial line, by a single shade motor (multi-banded shade, subject to manufacturer’s
design criteria).
2.4
SHADE MOTOR DRIVE SYSTEM
A.
2.5
Shade Motors: Tubular, asynchronous (non-synchronous) motors, with built-in reversible
capacitor operating at 110v AC (60hz), single phase, temperature Class A, thermally protected,
totally enclosed, maintenance free with line voltage power supply equipped with locking
disconnect plug assembly furnished with each motor. Conceal motors inside shade roller tube.
Maximum current draw for each shade motor of 2.3 amps. Use motors rated at the same
nominal speed for all shades in the same room. Total hanging weight of shade band shall not
exceed 80 percent of the rated lifting capacity of the shade motor and tube assembly.
MOTOR CONTROL SYSTEMS
A.
Specifications and design of shade motors and motor control system are based on a motor logic
control system that provides all of the following performance capabilities. Motor logic control
systems not in complete compliance with these performance criteria shall not be accepted as
equal systems.
1.
Motor Control System:
a.
Provide power to each shade motor via individual 3 conductor line voltage circuits
connecting each motor to the relay based motor logic controllers.
b.
Control system components shall provide appropriate (spike and brown out) overcurrent protection (+/- 10 percent of line voltage) for each of the four individual
motor circuits and shall be rated by UL or ETL as a recognized component of this
system and tested as an integrated system.
c.
Motor control system shall allow each group of four shade motors in any
combination to be controlled by each of four local switch ports, with up to fourteen
possible "sub-group" combinations via local 3 button wall switches and all at once
via a master 3 button switch. System shall allow for overlapping switch
combinations from two or more local switches.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
12 24 13 - 6
`
Window Treatment
Guide Specification
d.
2.
Multiple "sub-groups" from different motor control components shall be capable of
being combined to form "groups" operated by a single 3 button wall switch, from
either the master port or in series from a local switch port.
e.
Each shade motor shall be accessible (for control purposes) from up to four local
switches and one master switch.
f.
Control system shall allow for automatic alignment of shade hem bars in stopped
position at 25 percent, 50 percent, and 75 percent of opening heights, and up to
three user-defined intermediate stopping positions in addition to all up / all down,
regardless of shade height, for a total of five positions. Control system shall allow
shades to be stopped at any point in the opening height noting that shades may not
be in alignment at these non-defined positions).
g.
Control system shall have two standard operating modes: Normal mode allowing
the shades to be stopped anywhere in the window’s opening height and uniform
mode, allowing the shades to only be stopped at the predefined intermediate stop
positions. Both modes shall allow for all up / all down positioning.
h.
Control system components shall allow for interface with both audiovisual system
components and building fire and life safety system via a dry contact terminal
block.
i.
Control system components shall allow for interface with external analog input
control devices such as solar activated controllers, 24 hour timers, and similar
items; via a dry contact terminal block.
j.
Reconfiguration of switch groups shall not require rewiring of the hardwired line
voltage motor power supply wiring, or the low voltage control wiring.
Reconfiguration of switch groups shall be accomplished within the motor control
device.
Wall Switches:
a.
Three-button architectural flush mounted switches with metal cover plate and no
exposed fasteners.
b.
Connect local wall switches to control system components via low voltage (12V
DC) 4-conductor modular cable equipped with RJ-11 type connectors supplied,
installed and certified.
c.
Connect master wall switches to control system components via low voltage (12V
DC) 6-conductor modular cable equipped with RJ-12 type connectors supplied,
installed and certified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, accurate locations of
connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
12 24 13 - 7
`
Window Treatment
Guide Specification
3.2
ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION
A.
Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.
B.
Installer shall train LAWA's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain roller shade
systems.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
3.4
Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
C.
Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by LAWA, before
time of Substantial Completion.
3.5
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train LAWA's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain roller shades.
END OF SECTION 12 24 13
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
12 24 13 - 8
`
Window Treatment
Guide Specification
SECTION 14 20 00 − VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION, GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes vertical transportation for the entire project. The vertical transportation
work includes, but is not limited to the, following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
All elevator work.
All escalator work.
All moving walk work.
Anchors, embedments, shims, fasteners, inserts, hoisting equipment, fall
protection/prevention tie-offs, expansion devices, accessories, support brackets, hoist
beams, temporary work platforms, backing and attachments for the above.
All testing for the above.
CCTV, security system, and BMS components will be incorporated into the vertical
transportation work. Coordinate with the CCTV, security system, and BMS component
contractors to incorporate CCTV, security system, and BMS components and interface
requirements during the course of the Work.
NOTE: During any retrofit, LAWA is to be provided the opportunity to identify any parts
they deem beneficial for use at another LAWA location. The Design Professional and Contractor shall work directly with LAWA staff, to identify any salvageable parts and their respective handling requirements.
B.
Related work specified elsewhere includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1.
Elevator Hoistway and Pit:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Clear, plumb, substantially flush hoistway with variations not to exceed 1" at any
point.
Bevel cants not less than 75° from the horizontal on any rear or side wall ledges
and beams that project or recess 2" or more into the hoistway. Not required on
hoistway divider beams.
Divider beams between adjacent elevators at each floor, pit, and overhead.
Supports at each floor for car and counterweight guide rail fastening including
supports for car guide rail fastening above top landing. Intermediate car guide rail
support when floor heights exceed 14'-0" or as designated on contract drawings.
Intermediate counterweight guide rail supports where floor heights exceed 16'-0".
Provide rail bracket supports as required to meet Code required bracket spacing
and/or Installer needs. Building supports not to deflect in excess of 1/8" under
normal conditions, 1/4" under applicable seismic conditions.
Continuous vertical car and counterweight guide rail support between floors shown
on Contract documents full height of hoistway.
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 1
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
2.
Elevator Control Room and Machinery Spaces:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.
Installation of guide rail bracket supports in concrete. Inserts or embeds, if used,
will be furnished under Division 14.
Hoist machine supports including two (2) additional horizontal supports above the
top terminal landing on the machine side of the hoistway. Locate as required for
selected providers' equipment.
Wall blockouts and fire rated closure for control and signal fixture boxes which
penetrate walls.
Cutting and patching walls and floors.
Concrete wall pockets and/or structural steel beams for support of hoist machine,
rope sheaves, and dead-end hitch beams. Support deflection shall not exceed
1/1666 of span under static load.
Erect front hoistway wall after elevator entrances are installed.
Grout floor up to hoistway sills and around hoistway entrances.
Lockable, self-closing, fire-rated pit door, if pit depth exceeds 10'-0" (3.048 m).
Pit access ladder for each elevator and pit divider screens.
Structural support at pit floor for buffer impact loads, guide rail loads.
Waterproof pit. Indirect waste drain or sump with flush grate and pump. Locate
sump pump outside of hoistway/pit.
Protect open hoistways and entrances during construction per OSHA Regulations.
Protect car enclosure, hoistway entrance assemblies, and special metal finishes
from damage.
Hoistway smoke relief venting or hoistway pressurization for smoke control.
Hoist machine ventilation, heating and/or cooling. Maintain minimum temperature
of 55°F, maximum 90°F at the location of the hoist machine.
Seal fireproofing to prevent flaking.
Glass enclosed hoistways. Laminated glass to meet the requirements of ANSI
Z97.1. Interior ledges created by glass mullions not to exceed 4".
Access ladders and platform to governor(s), if required.
Enclosure with access. Provide ships ladder or stair with guard railing. Include
similar access to overhead machinery space.
Self-closing and locking access door.
Ventilation and heating. Maintain minimum temperature of 55° F, maximum
90° F. Maintain maximum 80% relative humidity, non-condensing.
Paint walls and ceiling.
Class "ABC" fire extinguisher in each elevator controller space.
Seal fireproofing to prevent flaking.
Self-closing and locking governor access door and access means.
Fire sprinklers.
Elevator Electrical Service, Conductors and Devices:
a.
b.
Lighting and GFCI convenience outlets in pit, controller space, and overhead
machinery spaces. Provide one additional non-GFCI convenience outlet in pit for
sump pump.
Three-phase mainline copper power feeder to terminals of each elevator controller
in the controller space with protected, lockable "open," disconnecting means.
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 2
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
c.
Single-phase copper power feeder to each elevator controller for car lighting and
exhaust blower with individual protected, lockable "open," disconnecting means
located in the controller space.
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 3
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
4.
Elevator Standby Power Provision:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
5.
Emergency telephone line to each individual elevator control panel in elevator
controller space.Fire alarm initiating devices in each elevator lobby, for each group
of elevators or single elevator and each controller space to initiate firefighters'
return feature. Device at top of hoistway if sprinklered. Provide alarm initiating
signal wiring from hoistway or controller space connection point to elevator
controller terminals. Device in machine room and at top of hoistway to provide
signal for general alarm and discrete signal for Phase II firefighters' operation.
Temporary power and illumination to install, test, and adjust elevator equipment.
Category 6 (distance≤300 feet) or Fibre Optic (distance >300 feet) Ethernet
connection and junction box in each elevator machine room space.
Firefighters' telephone jack and announcement speaker in car with connection to
individual elevator control panels in the controller space and elevator control panel
in firefighters' control room.
Conduit from the closest hoistway of each elevator group or single elevator to the
firefighters' control room and/or main control console. Coordinate size, number,
and location of conduits and junction boxes with Elevator Contractor.
Means to automatically disconnect power to affected elevator drive unit and
controller prior to activation of the controller space fire sprinkler system, and/or
hoistway fire sprinkler system. Manual shut-off means shall be located outside
bounds of the controller space.
When sprinklers are provided in the hoistway all electrical equipment, located less
than 4'-0" above the pit floor shall be identified for use in wet locations.
Exception, seismic protection devices.
Single-phase power feeders to main control console and firefighters' control panel.
Single-phase power feeder to elevator intercom amplifier in the elevator controller
space.
Single-phase power feeders to controller(s) for CCTV with lockable "open"
disconnecting means.
10 footcandles illumination level in elevator lobbies of elevator threshold.
Standby power of normal voltage characteristics via normal electrical feeders to
run one elevator at a time in each elevator group and/or single elevator unit at fullcontract car speed and capacity.
Conductor from auxiliary form "C" dry contacts, located in the standby power
transfer switch to a designated elevator control panel in each elevator group and/or
single elevator unit. Provide a time delay of 30 - 45 seconds for pre-transfer signal
in either direction.
Standby single-phase power to group controller, and each elevator controller for
car lighting, exhaust blower, emergency signaling device, intercom amplifier and
hoist machine cooling fan.
Means for absorbing regenerated power during an overhauling load condition per
NEC 620.91. Elevator(s) will employ IGBT drive, presenting a non-linear active
load.
Standby power to hoist machine and control room ventilation or air conditioning.
Standby power to emergency communications device(s).
Escalator Wellway and Pit
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 4
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
6.
Clear, plumb, wellway with variations not to exceed 1" at any point.
Floor pockets and/or structural beams for support of escalator truss at each end and
at intermediate locations as shown on Architect's drawings. Steel supports, if used,
shall meet deflection requirements of AISC Specifications for Design, Fabrication,
and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.
Fire rated enclosure of escalator truss including ends, sides and bottom in ceiling
plenum.
Patching and finishing around escalator landing plates after installation.
Cladding and finishing of exposed truss surfaces.
Waterproof pit. Sump pit with flush grate and pump or indirect waste drain with
oil separator for outdoor units.
Protect exposed exterior escalators with weatherproof canopy entire length of truss
per Code.
Protect open wellways during construction per OSHA Regulations.
Protect escalator truss, steps, landing plates, balustrades, handrails, and special
metal finishes from damage.
Venting or other means to prevent accumulation of smoke and gas in escalator
truss as required by Local Building Code.
Fire sprinklers per local Code requirement with protective guards.
Finished flooring surrounding floor landing plates. All patching of flooring
including floor covering adjacent to the escalators. Any damage caused by the
Contractor shall be replaced at no additional cost to LAWA. Expansion joint
treatment at the lower escalator support to accommodate sliding escalator
attachment.
Well way railing at top openings, pit edge angles and pit drains.
Escalator Electrical Service, Conductors and Devices
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Light with guard and GFCI convenience outlet in each pit and machine room
space.
Three phase mainline copper power feeder to terminals of each escalator controller
in the machine room space with protected, lockable "open", disconnect switch.
Auxiliary disconnect, as required, for multiple drive units.
Telephone and/or CATV Ethernet line to each individual escalator control panel in
escalator machine space.
Supports, conduit and wall blockouts for remote controller installations.
Fire alarm initiating devices in each escalator pit. Provide alarm initiating signal
wiring from connection point to escalator controller terminals. Device to provide
signal for general alarm and interruption of escalator operation.
Temporary power and illumination to install, test, and adjust escalator equipment.
Category 6 (distance≤300 feet) or Fibre Optic (distance >300 feet) Ethernet
connection and junction box in each escalator machine room space.
Conduit from the closest wellway of each escalator group or single escalator to the
firefighters' control room and/or the control console. Coordinate size, number and
location of conduits and junction boxes with escalator contractor.
Single phase copper power feeder to each lower end intermediate location, and
upper end escalator pit for under handrail lighting with individual protected,
lockable "open", disconnect switch located in machine room space.
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 5
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
7.
Moving Walk Wellway and Pit
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
8.
Clear, plumb, wellway with variations not to exceed 1" at any point.
Floor pockets and/or structural beams for support of moving walk truss at each end
and at intermediate locations as shown on drawings. Steel supports, if used, shall
meet deflection requirements of AISC Specifications for Design, Fabrication, and
Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.
Fire rated enclosure of moving walk truss including ends, sides and bottom in
ceiling plenum.
Patching and finishing around moving walk landing plates after installation.
Cladding and finishing of exposed truss surfaces.
Waterproof pit. Sump pit with flush grate and pump or indirect waste drain with
oil separator for outdoor installations.
Protect exposed exterior moving walks with weatherproof canopy entire length of
truss per Code.
Protect open wellways during construction per OSHA Regulations.
Protect moving walk truss, pallets, landing plates, balustrades, handrails, and
special metal finishes from damage.
Venting or other means to prevent accumulation of smoke and gas in moving walk
truss as required by Local Building Code.
Fire sprinklers per local Code requirement with protective guards.
Finished flooring surrounding floor landing plates. All patching of flooring
including floor covering adjacent to the moving walks. Any damage caused by the
Contractor shall be replaced at no additional cost to LAWA.
Moving Walk Electrical Service, Conductors and Devices
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Light with guard and GFCI convenience outlet in each pit and machine room
space.
Three phase mainline copper power feeder to terminals of each moving walk
controller in the machine room space with protected, lockable "open", disconnect
switch. Auxiliary disconnect, as required, for multiple drive units.
Telephone and/or CATV Ethernet line to each individual moving walk control
panel in moving walk machine space.
Supports, conduit and wall blockouts for remote controller installations.
10 footcandles minimum illumination escalator landings and along the entire
escalator run.
Fire alarm initiating devices in each moving walk pit. Provide alarm initiating
signal wiring from connection point to moving walk controller terminals. Device
to provide signal for general alarm and interruption of moving walk operation.
Temporary power and illumination to install, test, and adjust moving walk
equipment.
Category 6 (distance≤300 feet) or Fibre Optic (distance >300 feet) Ethernet
connection and junction box in each moving walk machine room space.
Conduit from the closest wellway of each moving walk group or single moving
walk to the firefighters' control room and/or the control console. Coordinate size,
number and location of conduits and junction boxes with moving walk contractor.
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 6
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
j.
1.2
Single phase copper power feeder to each lower end intermediate location, and
upper end moving walk pit for under handrail lighting with individual protected,
lockable "open", disconnect switch located in machine room space.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Award the fabrication of the vertical transportation work to one
of the following firms who are specialized in the fabrication of vertical transportation
equipment and who have successfully produced work similar in design and extent to that
required for the project:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Schindler Elevator Corporation
Otis Elevator Company.
KONE Inc.
Substitutions: Other manufacturer's products may be incorporated into the Work if
approved by LAWA.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Engage the vertical transportation manufacturer or an experienced
Installer approved by the vertical transportation manufacturer who has completed not less than 3
elevator, escalator, and moving walk installations similar in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for this Project, as determined by LAWA, for a period of 5 years and with a record of
successful in-service performance and who is acceptable to LAWA.
C.
Contractor's Statement: The Contractor shall furnish a statement giving a complete description
of all parts wherein the vertical transportation systems that he proposes to furnish do not comply
with these specifications, or are in conflict with the Contract Documents. Failure to furnish such
a statement will be interpreted to mean that the Contractor agrees to meet all requirements of
this specification, and any conflicts with the work of other trades brought about by the use of
the selected manufacturer's equipment will not result in any added cost to LAWA.
D.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in the State of California and who is experienced in providing engineering services of
the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of
elevators and escalators that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design,
and extent.
E.
Standards: The following standards shall govern the vertical transportation work. Where
standards conflict, that standard with the more stringent requirements shall be applicable.
1.
Elevator, Escalator and Moving Walk Code: In addition to requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction, comply with the latest edition of ASME A17.1, "Safety Code for
Elevators and Escalators", ASME A17.2 “Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators
and Moving Walks”, and ASME A17.5 “Requirements for Elevator and Escalator
Electrical Equipment”, including supplements, as published by the American Society of
Mechanical Engineers. Wherever “Code” is referred to in the vertical transportation
specifications, the ASME A17.1 Code shall be implied.
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 7
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
F.
The vertical transportation systems shall be designed to resist the seismic loads
required under the 2007 California Building Code taking into account IBC Seismic
Design Category, IBC Design Spectral Response Acceleration (SDS), IBC
Importance Factory and Seismic Story Drift. Conform to the applicable portions
of Section 8.4 ‘Elevator Safety Requirements for Seismic Risk Zone 2 or Greater’
of ASME A17.1 and Section 8.5, “Escalator and Moving Walk Safety
Requirement for Seismic Risk Zone 2 or greater” of ASME A17.1 also comply
with CCR Title 8, Rules 3137(a) and 3137(d).
Electrical Code: For electrical Work included in the vertical transportation Work,
comply with "National Electrical Code" (ANSI C1), by NFPA, all applicable local codes,
and the Authorities having jurisdiction.
Welding: Comply with AWS standards.
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
Local fire Jurisdiction.
Requirements of IBC and all other Codes, Ordinances and Laws applicable within the
governing jurisdictions.
Life Safety Code, NFPA 101 and CCR Title 19.
California Code of Regulations Title 8 and California Building Code Title 24.
City of Los Angeles Elevator Code.
Electrical Devices and Equipment:
1.
Elevators:
a.
b.
2.
Furnish and install all necessary wiring for proper operation of the equipment
including conduit and fittings for machine rooms beginning at the light and power
outlets furnished under Division 26 ELECTRICAL sections. Include all wiring
and connections required to elevator devices remote from hoistway and between
elevator machine rooms. Provide additional components and wiring to suit
machine room layout.
Provide grounded metal shielded GFCI receptacles for work lights on the
underside of each platform and the crosshead of each car.
Escalators/Moving Walk:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Furnish and install all necessary wiring for proper operation of the equipment
including all wiring, conduit and fittings beginning from the disconnect switch in
the escalator machine space to all electrified escalator equipment.
Install all conductors, except control panel wiring, in rigid conduit except short
connections where equipment may require shifting for adjustments. Conduit shall
be liquid tight on outdoor installations. Such wiring shall be installed in liquid
tight flexible metal conduit not exceeding 6' in length.
Provide flame retardant panel wiring.
Provide grounded metal shielded GFCI receptacles for work lights in the upper and
lower pit areas.
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 8
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
3.
All electrical and wiring interconnections shall comply with the governing codes, ASME
A17.1, ASME A17.5 and NFPA 70.
a.
b.
c.
G.
Testing and Inspections: Advise LAWA in advance of dates and times that tests and
inspections are to be performed.
1.
Regulatory Testing and Inspections: Upon nominal completion of each elevator,
escalator, and moving walk installation, and before permitting use of the same (either
temporary or permanent), perform tests as required and recommended by the "Code" and
applicable law. Verification that such tests have been completed, all corrective work
accomplished and installation approved for issuance of a permit or certificate to operate,
shall be required before acceptance of each unit.
a.
2.
H.
Conductors: Copper throughout with individual wires coded and all connections at
accessible, numbered terminal blocks and connected with lugs and pressure
connectors. Use no splices or similar connections in wiring except at terminal
blocks, control cabinets, junction boxes and conduits. Provide 10% spare
conductors throughout.
Elevator Traveling Cables: All wiring shall be insulated with a moisture-proof,
flame retardant, outer covering. Non-traveling cable hoistway wiring shall be run
in tubing, conduit, or electrical wireways. Provide flexible traveling cables which
are properly suspended to relieve stress on individual cables. Provide six (6) pairs
of 18 ga. shielded wire in the traveling cables for telephone or other electronic
equipment in the car. Provide 10% spare conductors. Provide four space pair of
shielded communication wires. Terminate them to barrier-type terminal strip
behind each elevator return panel at one end of cable and within a machine room
security junction box. Provide two RG-6 traveling coax cables for CCTV
equipment in the car. Provide two pair 14 gauge wires for CCTV power. Prevent
traveling cables from rubbing or chafing against hoistway or car items.
Conduit and Fittings: Galvanized steel conduit. Minimum conduit size shall be
3/4" diameter unless larger size is required per NFPA 70 for use intended. Fittings
may be steel compression type unless otherwise permitted or required by
NFPA 70.
Before final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish permits, or certificates, by the
Building Department or other City, County or State departments having legal
jurisdiction, as required to allow the use of each unit. All certificates shall be
furnished to LAWA through the Contractor.
Acceptance Testing: Upon completion of each elevator, escalator and moving walk
installation and before final acceptance, make a contract load test of each in the presence
of the local authorities having jurisdiction with full maximum load, (or in accordance
with local code requirements) to determine whether the equipment as installed meets the
speed, capacity and all other requirements of the specifications.
Manufacturer Labeling: Names, trademarks and other identifying symbols shall not be
permitted on surfaces visible to the public.
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 9
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
I.
1.3
Obtain and pay for permits, fees, licenses, and inspections necessary to complete the vertical
transportation installations.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings and required material samples for review in accordance with Section
SPECIAL CONDITIONS, Submittals. Include certification or other data verifying compliance
with required characteristics. Indicate by transmittal form that copy of each has been
distributed to the installer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Scaled Fully Dimensioned Layout: Plan of pit, hoistway, wellway and machine room
indicating equipment arrangement, elevation section of hoistway, and wellway, details of
car enclosures, hoistway entrances, car/hall signal fixtures, and seismic attachments.
Design Information: Indicate equipment lists, reactions, and design information on
layouts.
Power Confirmation Information: Design for existing conditions for Elevators,
Escalators and Moving Walks. Provide complete power data submittals including heat
emission data.
Fixtures: Cuts, samples, or shop drawings.
Finish Material: Submit 3" x 12" samples of actual finished material for review of color,
pattern, and texture. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility
of the Provider. Include, if requested, signal fixtures, lights, graphics, Braille plates, and
detail of mounting provisions.
Design Information: Provide calculations verifying the following;
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Adequacy of existing electrical provisions.
Adequacy of retained equipment relative to Code requirements if car weight
increased by more than 5%.
Machine room heat emissions in B.T.U.' s.
Adequacy of existing retained elevator machine beams and escalator supports.
Adequacy of existing car platform structure for intended loading.
B.
Senate Bill 1886 Submittals: Provide copies of all Code Authority/Permit submittals to the
Architect.
C.
Submittal review shall not be construed as an indication that submittal is correct or suitable, nor
that the work represented by submittal complies with the Contract Documents. Compliance
with Contract Documents, Code requirements, dimensions, fit, and interface with other work is
Provider's responsibility.
D.
Acknowledge and/or respond to review comments. Promptly incorporate required changes due
to inaccurate data or incomplete definition so that delivery and installation schedules are not
affected. Identify and cloud drawing revisions, including Provider elective revisions on each resubmittal. Revision response time is not justification for equipment delivery or installation
delay.
E.
Perform review and evaluation of all aspects of its work prior to requesting Design Consultant's
final review. Work shall be considered ready for Consultant's final contract compliance review
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 10
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
when copies of Provider's test and review sheets are available for Design Consultant's review
and all elements of work or a designated portion thereof are in place and a unit or group are
deemed ready for service as intended.
F.
Documents required prior to final payment:
1.
Provide three sets of neatly bound written information necessary for proper maintenance
and adjustment of equipment within 30 days following final acceptance of the project.
Final retention will be withheld until data is received, accepted, and approved by
Engineer and reviewed by Design Consultant. Include the following as minimums:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
G.
Straight line wiring diagram of "as installed" circuits, with index of location and
function of components. Provide one reproducible master set. Mount one set
wiring diagrams on panels, racked, or similarly protected, in machine room.
Provide remaining set rolled and in a protective drawing tube. Maintain machine
room set with addition of all subsequent field changes. These diagrams are
LAWA's property.
Lubricating instructions, including recommended grade of lubricants.
Parts catalogs for all replaceable parts including ordering forms and instructions.
Four sets of neatly tagged keys for all switches and control features properly
tagged and marked.
Neatly bound instructions explaining all operating features including all apparatus
in the car, exterior escalator and moving walk switches and remote control panels.
Neatly bound maintenance and adjustment instructions explaining areas to be
addressed, methods and procedures to be used and specified tolerances to be
maintained for all equipment.
Diagnostic test device complete with access codes, adjusters manuals and set-up
manuals for adjustment, diagnosis and troubleshooting of elevator system and
performance of routine safety tests.
Preventive Maintenance Contract: Furnish properly executed contract for continuing,
preventive maintenance. Utilize contract form provided, by LAWA.
Acceptance of such records by LAWA/Design Consultant shall not be a waiver of any
Provider deviation from Contract Documents or shop drawings or in any way relieve
Provider from his responsibility to perform work in accordance with Contract
Documents.
Materials, And Tools: General: Within sixty days following initial acceptance of the
elevator/escalator/moving walk installation, provide written information and diagnostic tools
necessary for proper maintenance and adjustment of the equipment, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Provide two copies and one mylar reproducible of all wiring diagrams, including straightline wiring diagrams of all "as built and installed" elevator electrical circuits with index
of location and function of all components.
Provide logic diagram for all
microprocessors. NOTE: Leave one complete set of corrected installation diagrams and
wiring dope sheets on the job for each unit.
Provide two copies of all "final" construction and installation drawings.
Provide three neatly bound and indexed sets of the following:
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 11
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
5.
Sequence of operation and/or floor charts of the motion control and supervisory
control panels, and related operating equipment, including individual and group
microprocessors.
Operating instructions and complete, detailed adjustment and application data and
instructions for all equipment components including controller, microprocessor,
selectors, motors, drives, valves, switches, etc.
Lubricating instructions, including recommended grade of lubricants.
Parts catalogs for all replaceable parts, including ordering forms and instruction. If
a given component is made up of smaller parts, the smaller parts shall also be
clearly identified by number.
Provide a summary of contract data for each type of equipment furnished,
including quantity and part number.
Supplemental data required or requested by LAWA to facilitate equipment
maintenance and adjustment.
Provide all special tools, including top-level solid-state diagnostic equipment, which the
Manufacturer and Installer supplies to his adjusters and service personnel for proper
maintenance and adjustment of all equipment. Special tools shall become the property of
LAWA. NOTE: If solid-state microprocessor or group supervisory diagnostic
equipment and/or tools are not available for sale Elevator Contractor shall quote LAWA
on lease or rental of this equipment, including acceptable terms. Quote as a separate
item.
The following supplemental information will be required by LAWA for this project.
a.
Step-by-step adjusting procedures, as used by elevator Manufacturer's/Installer's
field adjustor, for each type of equipment used in this specific installation. This
shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
Selectors / encoders.
Brakes: Shoe clearance, core clearance, brake switch, brake torque and all
other adjustments necessary to give a satisfactory functioning brake.
Controllers: Relay air gaps, current operated relays, timed circuits, set-reset
relays, and all other necessary adjustments and settings.
Electronic devices and circuits.
Dispatching controller: Timed circuits, etc.
Computer type dispatcher: Data and procedure to change settings.
Overload relays: Current settings upon tripping, testing and maintenance
procedures.
Acceleration and deceleration patterns, including time and slow-down
settings.
Governor: Over-speed switch. Jaw pull-through in pounds.
Hydraulic elevators: Pump flow and leveling control valves, relief valves,
and jack packing gland.
Hoistway switches and cams.
Terminal landing slow down device.
Leveling and re-leveling units in hoistway.
Load compensation: Load weighing device settings and load compensation
adjustments.
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 12
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
b.
c.
List of necessary tools, instruments, and other equipment used in the adjusting
procedure, including method for incorporating them in procedures.
Final adjusting data for each elevator/escalator/moving walk, including, but not
limited to, settings for the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
6.
Safeties: Clearance to rails and pull out in pounds for the releasing carrier.
Setting of safety operated switch.
Door protective devices: Focusing, testing, maintenance, and adjusting
procedures.
Roller guides: Spring tension and stop settings.
Motors: Air gap, compounding, neutral setting and all other necessary
adjustments.
Door operator and doors: Door operator control switches, door operator
control potentiometers or resistances, door motor, door checks, door closers,
door and gate locks, clutches/bayonets, door unlocking cams, encoders, and
door restrictors.
Communications, annunciating, and security systems.
Escalator Safety devices
Escalator Code clearances
Load compensation sensing device in voltage or current for empty fully
loaded car.
Selectors/encoders.
Brakes: Shoe running clearance and brake coil current. Escalator brake
torque settings.
Hatch switches and devices.
Door operator control switch settings.
Safety device: Full-load, full-speed, test data.
Full-load starting and running current.
Current settings or current operated relays.
Motor field resistance settings.
Timers: Time delay settings, including method and equipment needed to
program microprocessor.
Electronic power supply voltages necessary for correct functioning of
equipment and from where measured.
Skirt/Step clearance settings.
Safety switch settings.
Warranty: Submit a copy of the following written warranty for the vertical transportation
work. The Contractor will correct defects and non-compliant work which develop or
become known within one year from the date of acceptance by LAWA to the satisfaction
of LAWA at no additional cost. Make modifications, adjustments, improvements, etc., to
meet the specified performance requirements. No earlier than 1 month prior to the
conclusion of the warranty period each elevator, escalator, and moving walk, will be
inspected jointly by LAWA, and the Contractor. All maintenance and warranty
deficiencies requiring correction by the Contractor shall be mutually agreed to at this
time. A written report shall be provided by LAWA detailing the required actions.
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 13
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
a.
The warranty shall not deprive LAWA of other rights LAWA may have under
other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of
the Contract Documents.Elevator/Escalator Maintenance Agreement: Provide full
preventative maintenance service of the elevator equipment for a period of 12months from the date of acceptance by LAWA. This service shall include a
monthly examination of not less than 1 hour per examination per hydraulic
elevator, a semi-monthly (twice per month) examination of each traction elevator,
of not less than 1 hour and a weekly examination of each escalator/moving walk of
not less than 1 hour by competent and trained personnel and shall include all
necessary adjustments, greasing, oiling, cleaning, supplies, and replacements of
parts to keep the equipment in perfect operation, except such parts made necessary
by negligence not caused by this Contractor. Use parts and supplies as used in the
manufacture and installation of original equipment. All costs in connection with
such maintenance shall be included in the agreement price.
b.
Include 24 hour per day, 7 day per week emergency Call Back Service for all
elevators, escalators and moving walks should operational problems or shut downs
develop between service periods.
1)
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Response Time: Two hours or less.
Take equipment out of service for scheduled routine preventative maintenance
during non-peak usage of the equipment, as approved by LAWA.
Perform preventative maintenance during regular working hours.
Require service and emergency personnel to report to the LAWA representative on
site upon arrival at the building and again on completion of the required work.
Furnish a copy of the work ticket containing a complete description of the work
performed to the County's representative.
Maintain a preventative maintenance checklist in the machine room to itemize
individual component parts, as determined by the original equipment
manufacturer, which require weekly, monthly, quarterly or yearly inspection.
Include on the checklist the building name, elevator/escalator serial numbers,
examination or service frequency, examination hours, individual elevator/escalator
components examined or serviced.
Maintain an inventory at all times and available for immediate delivery and
installation, a sufficient supply of emergency parts for repair of each unit. Provide
materials or parts to be used which are genuine original manufacturer’s renewal
parts.
Regularly and systematically examine, inspect, properly adjust, clean, lubricate,
and if conditions warrant, repair or replace, all mechanical, structural and electrical
elevator and escalator/moving walk equipment components, including, but not
limited to, the following:
1)
Controller, selector, dispatching equipment, solid state drive units and all
related equipment, including but not limited to relays, solid state
components, resistors, condensers, transformers, contacts, leads, overloads,
dash pots, timing devices, computer devices, selectors components, cables,
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 14
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
i.
j.
k.
safety devices and tapes and all switches in the machine rooms, hoistways,
wellways and pits.
Motors, including but not limited to, windings, rotating elements, bearings,
brakes and gear boxes.
Door operating equipment, including but not limited to, operators,
interlocks, gate switches, hangers, tracks, rollers, door gibs and closers.
Bull gears, sheaves and pulleys including bearings and shafts.
Car guide rails, guide rail brackets and backing, guide rail lubricators,
buffers, buffer supports, guide shoes, guide shoe mounts, guide shoe rollers
and guide shoe gibs.
Car frame, platform and sill, including all related components.
Car and corridor operating and signal fixtures components, including light
bulbs.
Car fan and emergency lighting units.
Electric wiring and traveling cables necessary for the operation of the
elevators equipment and associated accessory equipment.
Hydraulic cylinders, plungers, packing, and related components.
Pump unit and all related components, including but not limited to tank,
filters, strainers, pumps, motors, belts, pipe, valves and all component parts
thereof, muffler and scavenger pump.
Hydraulic oil.
All hydraulic piping, valves, and fittings.
Governor, including but not limited to governor sheave and shaft assembly,
bearings, contacts, governor jaws and governor tension sheave assembly.
Escalator/Moving Walk tracks, chains, chain and step/pallet rollers,
handrails, steps, pallets and safety devices.
Repair and replacement coverage is intended to be full and complete, and to
include the cost of providing all elevator replacement components, including
those not mentioned above.
Provide fireman’s recall tests as required by the governing code.
Maintain the efficiency, safety and speeds of the equipment at all times, including
acceleration, retardation, contract speed, with or without full load, floor to floor
time, door opening and closing time. Maintain escalator hand rail speed within
2 fpm of step tread. Maintain the vertical transportation system monitoring system
at all times.
Housekeeping: Provide and maintain industry standard parts cabinets for the
orderly storage of replacement parts. Keep the premises free of accumulation of
waste material or rubbish. Store combustible materials in closed metal containers.
Regularly brush lint and dirt from the guiderails, car tops, bottom of platform and
remove dirt, excess lubricant and accumulated rubbish from pits, and machine
room floors. Take necessary actions to prevent oil and grease from creating
unsightly appearances on the equipment and/or accumulating on the floor of
equipment room, elevator pit, escalator pits, escalator steps, moving walk pits or
pallets.
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 15
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
l.
m.
Clean all of the elevator/escalator/moving walk equipment. Cleaning of the
equipment shall occur at regular intervals sufficient in frequency to maintain a
professional appearance and preserve the life of the equipment. Perform complete
clean down of escalator/moving walk interiors and elevator hoistways during the
11th month of Warranty Maintenance. Report to LAWA the need for cleaning
and/or janitorial services for all items not covered by the Contract.Lubricate all
moving parts of the equipment requiring lubrication. Apply lubricants at intervals
recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Provide lubrication more
frequently, if dictated through use of the equipment. Utilize lubricants suitable for
the purpose intended that meet or exceed the minimum requirements specified by
the manufacturer of the equipment to which the lubricant is applied. Remove and
properly dispose of used and oily wiping materials from the building on the same
day that they are used.
Adjust the equipment as necessary in accordance with the check list and when the
operation of the equipment varies from its normal or originally designed
performance standards. Utilize qualified individuals properly equipped with tools
and instruments, employed by the installer for adjustments. Parts or assemblies
which have worn (or otherwise deteriorated) beyond “normal” adjustment limits
shall be replaced as provided for under the following paragraphs titled “Replace”
and “Repair”.
1)
2)
Replace: Replace items during the course of scheduled preventative
maintenance, when such replacement will prevent an unscheduled
equipment shutdown and/or ensure the continued safe normal operation of
the equipment or which otherwise will extend the useful life of the
equipment. Make all replacements using original manufacturer’s parts or
LAWA approved equals.
Repair:
a)
n.
7.
8.
Repairs which are the Responsibility of the Installer: Make (or cause
to made) all repairs stipulated herein, made necessary due to normal
wear and use of the elevator or escalator/moving walk system. All
costs for labor, materials, expanses, and supplies which occur as a
result of the stated repair.
Periodic Tests: Perform periodic safety tests of the elevator and escalator/moving
walk components, as required by Code. The periodic tests shall be conducted as
indicated in the code. Test results shall be witnessed as required and recorded on
forms supplied by or acceptable to LAWA. Provide certified copies of the
completed test forms to LAWA. Coordinate the periodic testing with LAWA
Inspection/Clean Down Procedure which is required once annually by LAWA.
Elevator/Escalator/Moving Walk Extended Preventative Maintenance Agreement: Quote
monthly cost for a five year preventative maintenance agreement commencing upon
completion of the warranty maintenance. Price adjustment will be made at Agreement
commencement date and thereafter as provided in the Agreement. Use competent
personnel, acceptable to LAWA, employed by and supervised by the equipment installer.
Escalator/Moving Walk Maintenance Agreement: Provide full preventative maintenance
service of the equipment for a period of 12-months from the date of acceptance by
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 16
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
LAWA. This service shall include weekly examinations of not less than 1 hour per
examination per escalator/moving walk by competent and trained personnel and shall
include all necessary adjustments, greasing, oiling, cleaning, supplies, and replacements
of parts to keep the equipment in perfect operation, except such parts made necessary by
negligence not caused by this Contractor. Use parts and supplies as used in the
manufacture and installation of original equipment. All costs in connection with such
maintenance shall be included in the agreement price.
a.
Include 24 hour per day, 7 day per week emergency Call Back Service for all
escalators, and moving walks should operational problems or shut downs develop
between service periods.
1)
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Response Time: Two hours or less.
Take equipment out of service for scheduled routine preventative maintenance
during non-peak usage of the equipment, as approved by LAWA.
Perform preventative maintenance service during regular working hours.
Require service and emergency personnel to report to LAWA's representative on
site upon arrival at the building and again on completion of the required work.
Furnish a copy of the work ticket containing a complete description of the work
performed to the LAWA representative.
Maintain a preventative maintenance checklist in the machinery space to itemize
individual component parts, as determined by the original equipment
manufacturer, which require weekly, monthly, quarterly or yearly inspection.
Include on the checklist the building name, equipment serial numbers, examination
or service frequency, examination hours, individual escalator components
examined or serviced. Make check list adjustment intervals frequent enough to
maintain the escalators and moving walks in optimum operating condition.
Maintain an inventory at all times and available for immediate delivery and
installation, a sufficient supply of emergency parts for repair of each unit. Provide
materials or parts to be used which are genuine original manufacturers renewal
parts.
Regularly and systematically examine, inspect, properly adjust, clean, lubricate,
and if conditions warrant, repair or replace, all mechanical, structural and electrical
escalator/moving walk equipment components, including, but not limited to, the
following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Machine and related components including but not limited to thrust
bearings, sprockets, gears, shafts, bearings, brake and component parts,
motors, and chains.
Controller and all related equipment, including but not limited to relays,
solid state components, resistors, condensers, transformers, contacts, leads,
overloads, dash pots, timing devices, computer devices, and mechanical and
electrical driving equipment, including all switches.
Motors, including but not limited to, windings, rotating elements and
bearings.
Handrails, brush guards, guide rollers, and alignment devices.
Stop switches and related components.
Conductor cables and wiring.
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 17
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
Truss, steps, step treads, pallets, wheels, rollers, axle bushings, comb plates
and tracks.
All sprockets, chains and bearings.
Demarcation lighting.
Safety switches.
Step Demarcation
Repair and replacement coverage is intended to be full and complete, and to
include the cost of providing all escalator and moving walk replacement
components, including those not mentioned above.
Maintain the efficiency, safety and speeds of the equipment at all times. Maintain
the vertical transportation system monitoring system at all times.
Housekeeping: Provide and maintain industry standard parts cabinets for the
orderly storage of replacement parts. Keep the premises free of accumulation of
waste material or rubbish. Store combustible materials in closed metal containers.
Clean step treads, pallets, and comb plates on a monthly basis. Regularly brush
lint and dirt from the units and remove dirt, excess lubricant and accumulated
rubbish from pans, pits, and machine spaces. Take necessary actions to prevent oil
and grease from creating unsightly appearances on the equipment and/or
accumulating on pans in escalator, and moving walk pits.
Conduct weekly evaluations of equipment performance, including smoothness of
ride, unusual vibration or noise, condition of handrails. Inspect comb plates at
both ends of escalators for broken teeth and check for proper clearance between
combs and step treads. Inspect comb plates at both ends of moving walks for
broken teeth and check for proper clearance between combs and pallets. Check for
broken step treads and check clearance between steps and skirt panel. Check for
broken pallets and check clearance between pallets and skirt panel. Look for
anything (loose trim, screws or bolts) that could snag or damage clothing and
luggage, or cause injury. Check condition of handrail brushes. Proceed
immediately to make, or cause to be made, replacements, repairs and corrections
found as a result of the weekly evaluations.
Clean all of the escalator equipment. Cleaning of the equipment shall occur at
regular intervals sufficient in frequency to maintain a professional appearance and
preserve the life of the equipment. Report to LAWA the need for cleaning and/or
janitorial services for all items not covered by the Contract.
Lubricate all moving parts of the equipment requiring lubrication. Apply
lubricants at intervals recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Provide
lubrication more frequently, if dictated through use of the equipment. Utilize
lubricants suitable for the purpose intended that meet or exceed the minimum
requirements specified by the manufacturer of the equipment to which the
lubricant is applied. Remove and properly dispose of used and oily wiping
materials from the building on the same day that they are used.
Adjust the equipment as necessary in accordance with the check list and when the
operation of the equipment varies from its normal or originally designed
performance standards. Utilize qualified individuals properly equipped with tools
and instruments, employed by the installer for adjustments. Parts or assemblies
which have worn (or otherwise deteriorated) beyond “normal” adjustment limits
shall be replaced as provided for under the following paragraphs titled “Replace”
and “Repair”.
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 18
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
1)
n.
9.
10.
11.
Periodic Tests: Perform periodic safety tests of the escalator, and moving walk
components, as required by Code. The periodic tests shall be conducted as
indicated in the code. Test results shall be witnessed as required and recorded on
forms supplied by or acceptable to LAWA. Provide certified copies of the
completed test forms to LAWA. Coordinate the periodic testing with LAWA.
Escalator/Moving Walk Extended Preventative Maintenance Agreement: Quote monthly
cost for a five year preventative maintenance agreement commencing upon completion of
the warranty maintenance. Price adjustment will be made at Agreement commencement
date and thereafter as provided in the Agreement. Use competent personnel, acceptable
to LAWA, employed by and supervised by the escalator installer.
Test Reports: Submit test results to governing authorities and to LAWA. Include
computer generated events and results.
Maintenance and Operating Instructions: Submit six (6) sets of maintenance manuals.
Each maintenance manual shall include operation and maintenance instructions, parts
listing with sources indicated; recommended parts inventory listing, emergency
instructions for elevators, escalators, and moving walks. Include diagnostic and repair
information for disassembly, inspection/gaging/torque requirements, reassembly, testing
and other related information. Detailed lubrication and cleaning schedule indicating
weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual lubrication; and a description of each
lubrication point, lubrication type, and specification. Provide exploded view drawings to
facilitate repair and maintenance functions. Assemble manuals for component parts into
a single binder. In addition provide the following for escalators and moving walks:
a.
b.
12.
Replace: Replace items during the course of scheduled preventative
maintenance, when such replacement will prevent an unscheduled
equipment shutdown and/or ensure the continued safe normal operation of
the equipment or which otherwise will extend the useful life of the
equipment. Make all replacements using original manufacturer’s parts or
LAWA approved equals.Repair:Repairs which are the Responsibility of the
Installer: Make (or cause to made) all repairs stipulated herein, made
necessary due to normal wear and use of the escalators, and moving walks.
Absorb all costs for labor, materials, expanses, and supplies which occur as
a result of the stated repair.
Procedures for adjusting brake, handrail tension, handrail chain drive tension, step
and pallet chain tension, track system, and mechanical components, including
pictorials.
Instructions for removing floor plate, replacing comb segments, and removing and
installing steps and pallets.
Maintenance Log: Upon completion of the installation submit and provide 1 copy of the
following in each machine room:
a.
Maintenance log and Maintenance Control Program for each unit, indicating the
various items requiring examination, the procedure to be followed, the frequency
of the examination and place to record compliance with the recommended
procedure. The log shall cover a period of at least 1 year.
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 19
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
b.
c.
d.
e.
13.
14.
H.
1.4
Call back log, indicating permanent record of visits. The log shall indicate the date
of the visit, person making the visit, unit involved, reason for the visit and work
accomplished.
Fire firefighters service test log for each elevator to comply with the requirements
of the code.
Hydraulic elevator oil usage log, to record all hydraulic oil added to the system.
Log to include reason for loss of hydraulic oil.
Replace maintenance logs when available space within the maintenance log is
filled. Furnish to LAWA a copy of the maintenance log that is being replaced.
All ‘as-built’ record drawings, wiring diagrams, parts manuals, catalogs, instructions,
keys, etc. shall be submitted before final payment.
Submit copies of Installer qualifications.
Certificates and Permits: Submit inspection and acceptance certificates and operating permits
as required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted use of vertical
transportation systems.
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
1.5
Temporary Use: Do not use vertical transportation components during construction period,
unless permitted in writing by LAWA.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Protect vertical transportation work components during delivery storage, handling, erection and
construction period against damage and stains.
B.
Do not deliver the vertical transportation components to Project site until they can be placed in a
fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture,
humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate fabrication and installation of vertical transportation systems with HVAC, EMS,
security, telephone/data, audio/visual, CCTV, and fire alarm systems.
B.
Coordinate start up and testing of vertical transportation systems with other Work required for
complete installation and operation.
C.
Field verify all conditions affecting the work of this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 20
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
2.1
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A.
Refer to the specification sections for materials, components and fabrication criteria for the
vertical transportation systems:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Examine the spaces and areas to receive the vertical transportation work, with Installer present,
for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance of the vertical transportation work. Examine wellways, hoistways, hoistway
openings, pits, terminal end truss pits, and machine rooms, as constructed; verify critical
dimensions; and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which vertical
transportation work is to be installed. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Verify dimensions of supporting structure from the working drawings and shop drawings so that
the vertical transportation work will be accurately fabricated and fitted to the structure. The
Contractor shall satisfy himself by review of the working drawings that the clearances and the
alignments are proper for the installation of his equipment.
B.
Coordinate vertical transportation work with the work of other trades and provide items to be
placed during the installation of other work at the proper time so as to avoid delays in the
overall work. Place such items, including inserts and anchors, accurately in relation to the final
location of vertical transportation components. Use Contractor's bench marks.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install component parts of the vertical transportation work in accordance with
referenced standards and the manufacturers printed instructions and recommendations, unless
otherwise shown or specified. Keep work areas orderly and free from debris during progress of
the work. Remove all loose materials and filings resulting from this work from wellway and
hoistway surfaces.
B.
Elevator Hoistway Entrances: Coordinate the installation of hoistway entrances with the
installation of elevator guide rails, for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Wherever
possible, delay the final adjustment of sills and doors until the car is operable in the shaft. Set
sills flush with finished floor surface at landings. Reduce clearances between hoistway entrance
sill and car sill to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing. Hanger supports shall
be erected in perfect alignment, with edges of the sills, sill grooves and head jambs to insure
smooth operation of the doors. Guide grooves in the thresholds shall be cleaned and free of
debris.
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 21
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
C.
Elevator Guide Rails: Erect guide rails plumb and parallel and secure guide rail joints without
gaps and file any irregularities to a smooth surface. Fasten guide rail brackets to concrete
structures with proper inserts and insert bolts, through bolts, or adhesive anchors. Fasten guide
rail brackets to structural steel with through bolts and attach guide rails to brackets with
throughbolts or steel clips. Compensate for expansion and contraction movement of guide rails.
Balance cars to equalize pressure of roller guide shoes on rails.
D.
Escalators: Set escalators true to line and level, or to indicated slope, properly supported, and
anchored to building structure. Use established benchmarks, lines, and levels to ensure
dimensional coordination of the Work.
E.
Machine Room and Machine Space Equipment: Install machine room and machine space
equipment with clearances complying with the referenced codes and standards. Install items so
that they may be removed by portable hoists or other means for maintenance and/or repair.
Install items so that access for maintenance is safe and readily available. Mount rotating and
vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed to effectively prevent transmission
of vibrations to structure and thereby, eliminate sources of structure-borne noise from vertical
transportation equipment.
1.
F.
Lubrication and Adjustment: Adjust installed components for smooth, efficient operation,
complying with required tolerances and free of hazardous conditions.
1.
2.
3.
3.4
3.5
Pack wall openings thru which oil lines and conduit pass with fire resistant, sound
isolating, mineral wool insulation and fire stopping material.
Traction Elevators: Lubricate operating parts of system. Adjust motors, brakes,
controllers, leveling switches, limit switches, stopping switches, door operators,
interlocks and safety devices to achieve required performance levels.
Hydraulic Elevators: Lubricate operating parts of system. Adjust pumps, valves, motors,
brakes, controllers, leveling switches, limit switches, stopping switches, door operators,
interlocks and safety devices to achieve required performance levels.
Escalators and Moving Walks: Lubricate operating parts, including bearings, tracks,
chains, guides, and hardware. Test operating devices, equipment, signals, controls, and
safety devices. Install oil drip pans and verify that no oil drips outside of pans.
PROTECTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to the vertical
transportation Installer, that ensure vertical transportation equipment is without damage or
deterioration at the time of acceptance by LAWA.
B.
Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot
be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide
new units as required.
FIELD QUALITY VERIFICATION
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 22
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
A.
General: On completion of each type of vertical transportation equipment installation and before
permitting use thereof, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by
ASME A17.1, procedures with the following additions or adaptations, and by authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.
Traction Elevators/Hydraulic Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks: Comply with
ASME 17.2 “Inspectors Manual for Traction Elevators, Hydraulic Elevators, Escalators
and Moving Walks” procedures:
a.
Contractor shall perform the following tests on each escalator without load:
1)
2)
3)
b.
Contractor shall perform the following tests on each escalator under full load:
1)
2)
B.
Brake test. The stopping distance in the down direction shall meet all
requirements of ASME A17.1.
Twenty Four Hour Test: Each escalator shall be operated continuously for
24 hours after the acceptance test with no faults. If any fault occurs that
shuts the escalator down, the fault shall be corrected. Run additional 24
hour tests until all faults are corrected.
Perform testing during times approved by LAWA. Perform tests that are disruptive to normal
building operations, as determined by LAWA, after normal building occupancy hours.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Comb impact device shall be tested and calibrated with an appropriate scale
at both ends of the escalator in both the horizontal and vertical direction.
Brakes: Measure deceleration rate with no load over 5 consecutive stops in
the down direction using test equipment designed to obtain this information.
Skirt/Step Index test.
Supply all required labor, material, supervision, material, tools, test weights and test
instruments for all required tests, inspections and reviews.
In all elevator test conditions, obtain specified speed, performance times, floor accuracy
without re-leveling, and ride quality.
In all escalator test conditions, obtain specified speed, and ride quality.
Label each device with calibration sticker indicating test results and date of test.
Provide permanently affixed escalator brake torque tag.
Affix mental safety, buffer and governor test tags.
Performance Guarantee: Should these tests indicate defects or poor workmanship, variance or
noncompliance with the requirements of the specified codes and/or ordinances or variance or
noncompliance with the requirements of these specifications, the following work and/or repairs
shall be completed at no expense to LAWA.
1.
2.
3.
Replace all equipment that does not meet Code or specification requirements.
Perform all work and furnish all materials and equipment necessary to complete the
specified operation and/or performance.
Perform all retesting required by the governing Code Authority and LAWA to verify the
specified operation and/or performance.
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 23
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
3.6
3.7
DEMONSTRATE, INSTRUCT
A.
Instruct LAWA personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators,
escalators and moving walks. Review emergency provisions, including emergency access and
procedures to be followed at time of failure in operation and other building emergencies. Train
LAWA personnel in procedures to follow in identifying sources of operational failures or
malfunctions. Confer with LAWA on requirements for a complete vertical transportation
maintenance program.
B.
Make a final check of each type of vertical transportation equipment with LAWA personnel
present and before date of acceptance by LAWA. Determine that operation systems and
devices are functioning properly.
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION SCHEDULES
END OF SECTION 14 20 00
VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION GENERAL
14 20 00 - 24
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
SECTION 14 21 00 - HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes heavy duty machine-room-less electric traction passenger and service
elevators. Conventional geared or gearless equipment should be employed where passenger
capacity needs or material movement needs exceed those offered within machine room-less
product lines.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Definitions in the latest version of ASME A17.1 apply to work of this Section.
B.
Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failure, including excessive
malfunctions; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or
aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal
noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions.
C.
Service Elevator: A passenger elevator that is also used to carry freight.
D.
Reference to a device or a part of the equipment applies to the number of devices or parts
required to complete the installation.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 14 20 00, 3.7.2.
B.
Product Data
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Submit manufacturer's product data for each product and material.
Indicate manufacturer, trade names, and model numbers, components, arrangement,
optional and accessories being provided.
Include applicable literature, catalog material or technical brochures.
Include material and equipment specifications, sizes, types, dimensions, weights, rated
capacities, and performance curves.
Include utility requirements for wiring, piping, and service connection data, motor sizes
complete with electrical characteristics.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 1
Guide Specification
C.
Shop Drawings
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Six (6) copies of the layout and shop drawings shall be provided by the contractor for
review within three weeks of notice to proceed.
All drawings, views and details shall be developed and presented in accordance with
ANSI Y14.3 Multi and Sectional View Drawings.
Drawings shall clearly reflect dimensional data for elevator hoistways including cross
references to building column lines and finish elevations depicted in the Contract
Drawings.
Elevator layout shall be shown in three orthogonal views and shall include key
dimensions, support details, power connection locations and power connection terminal
points.
Shop drawings: Six (6) copies of the shop drawings shall be provided by the Installer.
Submit approval layout drawings to scale. Drawings shall include, but not be limited to
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
Car, guide rails, buffers and other components in hoistway.
Maximum rail bracket spacing.
Maximum loads imposed on guide rails requiring load transfer to the building
structure.
Loads on hoisting beams.
Clearances and travel of car and counterweight run-by.
Clear inside hoistway and pit dimensions.
Location and sizes of access doors, hoistway entrances and frames.
Car & Hall signal and operating fixtures.
Remote wiring layouts for each elevator.
Refuge space on top of car and pit.
Control room, machine area, pit and hoistway layout.
Cab design, dimensions and layout.
Hoistway-door and frame details.
Complete assembly detail of machine, machine mounting, machine beam assembly, dead
end hitch and beam assemblies, governors, safeties, counterweights, with all load
calculations.
Shop drawings shall include complete schematic and connection diagrams for the
controller and all electrical devices including a legend for components.
Controller information should include complete I/O list.
All drawings shall be provided on CD-ROM in AutoCAD 2008 format.
Samples
1.
Submit six (6) samples minimum 4” by 4” in size of all finish materials including but not
limited to the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Cab Flooring.
Ceiling, including surface material, supporting frame and light fixture.
Cab Interior including car door, front return, wall finish etc.
Fixture faceplate.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 2
Guide Specification
2.
Samples shall be clearly labeled to reflect:
a.
b.
c.
Project Name
Contract Number
Description of Sample
E.
Maintenance Control Programs: within sixty (60) days after notice to proceed, and prior to
installation, Installer shall submit detailed equipment specific interim and revenue service
Maintenance Control Programs, showing functions to be performed and their scheduled
frequency.
F.
Operating and Maintenance manuals: Prior to installation, Installer shall submit six (6) complete
sets of Operation and Maintenance manuals for approval. After LAWA approval and prior to
the beginning of acceptance testing, six (6) sets of the approved manuals shall be provided by
the Installer. Provide all material on CD-ROM in a format approved by LAWA. The manuals
shall include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Complete table of contents.
Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of equipment, including
complete illustrated, exploded views of all assemblies, and a complete, illustrated,
exploded view for identifying all system parts.
Complete nomenclature of replaceable parts, part numbers, current cost, and warehouse
location. If product source is another vendor, Installer shall include name and address of
other vendor.
Sample copies of a preventive maintenance chart.
Descriptions of safety devices.
Safety rules, tests, and procedures, including testing of all systems and subsystems.
Procedures for adjusting all elevator equipment, including pictorials.
Troubleshooting techniques.
Detailed lubrication and cleaning schedule indicating weekly, monthly, quarterly,
semiannual, and annual lubrication; and a description of each lubrication point,
lubrication type, and specification.
Control and schematic electrical wiring diagrams of controller, including wiring of safety
devices to connections with remote indication and control panels for each elevator or
group of elevators.
Electrical layout showing placement of lighting, light switches, receptacles, light fixtures,
disconnect switches, and convenience outlets in machinery/control room spaces and pits.
Complete detailed drawings and wiring diagram of elevator system fault-finding device
and connection to annunciator panel.
As built drawings for final elevator installation, controller and truss wiring. Also provide
As-built drawings on CD-ROM in AutoCAD 2008 format.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 3
Guide Specification
G.
Certification
1.
2.
3.
4.
The elevator manufacturer shall provide copies of all documents related to maintenance,
safety, operations, design changes, modifications, retrofits, etc., which relate to any part,
component, equipment, system, subsystem, or material and services applicable to the
elevators provided.
All of the above referenced shall be provided as it pertains to the original installation and
for a period of ten (10) years after final acceptance of the last elevators provided under
any contract.
The referenced material shall be provided within thirty (30) days of publication or
internal distribution by the elevator manufacturer. The material, even if labeled
PROPRIETARY, shall be delivered without prejudice or delay and at no additional cost.
Provide all material on CD-ROM in a format approved by the Owner.
H.
MSDS and product data sheets: Shall be submitted with an index listing each product, along
with the application method of the product, approximate quantity of product per elevator and
the component the product is applied to or associated with. The Installer shall allow 6 (six)
weeks for review of MSDS.
I.
Senate Bill 1886 Submittals: Provide copies of all Code Authority/permit submittals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory agencies: elevator design, materials, construction clearances, workmanship, and
tests shall conform to the requirements of the codes and regulations listed in Part 1.5.
B.
Welding: Welding shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of AWS or CWB.
Welders shall produce evidence of current certification by AWS or CWB.
C.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
1.
2.
D.
Installer shall obtain and pay for all necessary permits, and perform such tests as may be
required for acceptance and approval of elevators by jurisdictional agencies.
Installer shall notify the proper inspectors to witness required testing.
Factory Visit
1.
2.
The Installer shall provide for the costs of up to three of LAWA’s representatives to visit
the factory where the elevators are being manufactured, per contract, per unit type.
Installer shall not ship the elevator without the approval of LAWA’s representative after
the conclusion of the factory visit.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 4
Guide Specification
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Packing, Shipping Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading
1.
B.
Delivery and Acceptance at Site
1.
2.
C.
3.
Store materials inside under cover and in a dry location.
Protect from weather, direct sunlight, surface damage, corrosion, and construction traffic
and activity.
Installer shall make necessary provisions to protect systems from damage, deterioration,
and environmental conditions during installations and until elevator systems are fully
operative.
Handling
1.
1.6
Deliver material in original packages, containers, skid loads, or bundles bearing brand
names and identification of source of manufacture or supply.
Inspect deliveries for damage.
Storage and Protection
1.
2.
D.
Accept equipment, materials, and other Products on site in factory containers, bundles,
and shipping skids.
Handle material to prevent damage to edges, ends, surfaces, and finishes.
INSTALLATION CONTRACT ACCEPTANCE, WARRANTY, INTERIM SERVICE
AGREEMENT AND SERVICE AGREEMENT
A.
Warranty: The Contractor shall warrant in writing that all equipment manufactured and installed
under this Contract be free of defects in design, materials, and workmanship, under normal use
and service (“Warranty”) for a period of twelve (12) months. Defects in design, materials, and
workmanship shall be repaired or replaced with all materials and labor at no additional cost to
LAWA (“Warranty Work”). (Defects shall include, but not be limited to, noisy, rough, or
substandard operation; failures; loose, damaged, and missing parts; and fluid leaks.)
B.
In addition to the Warranty
1.
2.
3.
Contractor shall provide, concurrently with each Warranty Period, a 1-Year Preventative
Maintenance (“PM”) service for all units.
Beginning one year after the Contract Completion Date, the Contractor shall provide a 5Year Extended Preventative and Routine Maintenance Service Agreement (“SA”), per
Section 14 20 00, 3.7.2 and Exhibit A, for all units installed in this Contract.
The 5-year SA period shall be executed in strict compliance with all of the terms and
conditions set forth in Exhibit A (“Exhibit A”). Upon conclusion of the SA, the parties
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 5
Guide Specification
may mutually agree to extend the SA for an additional sixty (60) months, via a renewable
option (“Option”).
C.
The Contract/Warranty, PM, Interim and SA services shall include all services necessary to
maintain the equipment in proper working order for use at a major international airport
including, but not limited to.
1.
“Tasks”:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
1.7
Inspection of completed installation and periodic testing to maintain elevators in
completely operable, like new condition.
Provide preventative maintenance on elevators for a minimum of four (4) hours
each month (Total On-Site Time). Provide monthly documentation of the same to
LAWA.
Periodic lubrication of parts and equipment components as per OEM’s
recommendation. Charts are to be provided for each elevator indicating when
services are provided.
Perform work without removing elevators from service during peak traffic periods
determined by LAWA as 7:00 a.m. to 10:30 p.m. daily.
Provide twenty (24) hour emergency service during the maintenance period
consisting of a prompt response (within 30 minutes) to emergency request by
telephone or otherwise from LAWA or designated representative if an elevator is
inoperable or in case of injury, entrapment, or potential injury to persons.
Unlimited regular time callbacks are included with a required response time of one
(1) hour. Regular time will be Monday through Friday, 8:00am to 4:30pm,
exclusive of holidays. Overtime\Premium time call backs originating from an
operational error related to the performance requirements of the equipment shall be
borne by the Contractor.
All other services as required by Section 14 20 00, 3.7.2 and Exhibit A.
EXTENDED PREVENTATIVE
AGREEMENT
A.
AND
ROUTINE
MAINTENANCE
SERVICE
The Contractor shall perform the SA (including all tasks listed herein and in Exhibit A) for a
period of sixty (60) months from the date of Elevator Warranty expiration, or one year after the
Contract Completion Date, whichever is later. A Faithful Performance Bond and a Payment
Bond (“SA Bonds”), each for 100 percent of the contract price for the SA shall be submitted for
LAWA approval no less than 30 days prior to Contract Completion Date. The SA Bonds shall
be submitted to the City Attorney for approval as to form.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 6
Guide Specification
B.
Optional Second 5-year SA: No less than six (6) months prior to the conclusion of the 60 month
SA, the parties may mutually agree to extend the SA (“Extended SA”) for a single, additional
60 month period at a cost no greater than 9percent more than the amount of the initial SA.
Should the parties mutually agree, a Faithful Performance Bond and a Payment Bond, each for
100 percent of the contract price for the Extended SA shall be submitted for LAWA approval no
less than one (1) month prior to the conclusion of the initial 60 month SA.
C.
All Contract Provisions, Appendices and Addenda, as well as the Conditions of
Section 14 20 00, 3.7.2 and Exhibit A shall govern the SA and the Extended SA.
1.8
GUARANTEES
A.
1.9
Notwithstanding the Specifications forming a part of this Contract, any inspection or approval
of the Work, or the existence of any patent or trade name, the Installer nevertheless
unconditionally guarantees that the equipment furnished and installed hereunder shall be of the
best quality, shall be fully fit for the purpose for which it is intended, and shall be of the heavy
duty transit type in compliance with APTA guidelines unless augmented per these contract
documents.
LAWA INSTRUCTION/DEMONSTRATION AND COORDINATION
A.
The manufacturer shall provide eight (8) hours of onsite demonstration and instructions to
LAWA and existing service personnel upon completion of the elevator installation. Instructions
are to include safety procedures, proper operation of all equipment, and routine maintenance
procedures. All instructions and demonstrations are to be video recorded and remain the
property of LAWA.
B.
Check operation of the elevators with LAWA’s personnel or designated representative present
not more than one month before end of warranty period. Determine that operation systems and
devices are functioning properly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1
GENERAL:
A.
Installer shall furnish and install elevators that shall comply with the following requirements:
1.
B.
2.2
All elevators supplied under this contract shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Section, Elevator Cab design shall be per
Contract Drawings.
MATERIALS:
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 7
Guide Specification
A.
Except where product conformance to specific standards is indicated on the Contract Drawings
and in ASME/ANSI A17.1, OEM’s standard materials and equipment may be used in elevator
construction, subject to approval. Materials cited below are intended to establish the standard of
quality for comparable materials used by the manufacturer.
B.
Structural Shapes, Plates, Sheets, and Tubing: ASTM A36 Steel.
C.
Sheet Steel: ASNI/ASTM A446, Grade B.
D.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 316L
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Stainless steel with embossed texture to be rolled into exposed surface.
Type 304 or 316L, match specified color/finish in drawings.
No. 4: Directional polish (satin finish). Graining directions as shown or, if shown, in
longest dimension.
No. 8: Reflective polish (mirror finish).
Textured: 5WL or 4LB as manufactured by Rigidized Metals or Windsor pattern 5-SM
as manufactured by Rimex Metals or approved equal with .050 inches mean pattern depth
with bright directional polish (satin finish).
Burnished: Non-directional, random abrasion pattern.
E.
Aluminum: ASTM B211 or ASTM B221, Alloy 6061, T6.
F.
Flooring: as specified.
G.
Plastic Laminate: ASTM E84 Class A and NEMA LD3.1, Fire-Rated Grade (GP-50), Type 7,
0.050" plus or minus.005" thick, color and texture as follows:
1.
2.
Exposed Surfaces: Color and texture selected by Architect.
Concealed Surfaces: Provider's standard color and finish.
H.
Fire-Retardant Treated Particle Board Panels: Minimum 3/4 inch thick backup for natural
finished wood and plastic laminate veneered panels, edged and faced as shown, provided with
suitable anti-warp backing; meet ASTM E84 Class "I" rating with a flame-spread rating of 25 or
less, registered with Local Authorities for elevator finish materials.
I.
Natural Finish Wood Veneer: Standard thickness, 1/40-inch thoroughly dried conforming to
ASME/HPMA HP-1983, Premium Grade. Place veneer, tapeless spliced with grain running in
direction shown, belt and polish sanded, book-matched. Species and finish designated and
approved by Architect.
J.
Paint: Clean exposed metal parts and assemblies of oil, grease, scale, and other foreign matter
and factory paint one shop coat of standard rust-resistant primer. After erection, provide one
finish coat of industrial enamel paint. Galvanized metal need not be painted.
K.
Prime Finish: Clean all metal surfaces receiving a baked enamel paint finish of oil, grease, and
scale. Apply one coat of rust-resistant primer followed by a filler coat over uneven surfaces.
Sand smooth and apply final coat of primer.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 8
Guide Specification
L.
Baked Enamel Finish: Prime finish per above. Unless specified "prime finish" only, apply and
bake three (3) additional coats of enamel in the selected solid color.
M.
Glass: Laminated safety glass, minimum 9/16-inch thick, conforming to ANSI Z97.1 and
CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201.
2.3
SPECIAL FEATURES:
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.4
Elevator size, arrangement and capacity shall be justified via thorough analysis of
passenger and material transport needs and shall comply with design criteria specified in
this Section 3.7.1 and 3.7.2. Elevators shall be provided in accordance with the
requirements of CCR Title 8 and the ASME A17.1-Safety Code for Elevators and
Escalators, hereinafter in this Section the "Code".
Provide all material and equipment necessary for the complete execution of all elevator
work as specified in this Section and as shown on the Contract Drawings.
Provide hoistway guards for protecting hoistway during construction. In existing
terminals, hoistway protection shall include high solid panels surrounding each hoistway
opening at each floor.
All electric equipment, conduit, fittings and wiring shall conform to the requirements of
ANSI/NFPA No. 70 National Electric Code.
Provide concrete inserts and other similar anchoring devices for the installation of guide
rails, machinery and other elevator components. Epoxy ceiling anchors or epoxy side
wall anchors shall not be permitted.
Clearance around equipment located in each elevator control room and machine area
shall comply with the applicable provisions of ANSI/NFPA No. 70 National Electrical
Code.
SUMMARY OF FEATURES:
A.
Machine Room-Less Passenger Elevators
Elevator Use
Passenger C-3 Loading
Contract Load, in Pounds
4000 minimum
Contract Speed, in FPM
350 for travel distances of 20'-0" or more. 200 for
travel distances of less than 20'-0"
Machine Location
Overhead in hoistway
Machine Type
Gearless
Type of Control
AC variable voltage, variable frequency
Operation
Simplex selective collective or Group automatic
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 9
Guide Specification
Platform Size
8'-0" wide by 6'-2" deep
Clear Car Inside
7'-8" wide by 5'-5" deep
Car and Hoistway Door Size
4'-0" wide by 7'-0" high
Car and Hoistway Door Type
Single speed, side slide center opening
Car and Hoistway Door Operation
Power operated. High-speed, heavy-duty
(minimum opening speed 3.0 FPS)
Hoistway Entrance
As specified
Cab Enclosure
As specified
Car Operating Station
Dual
Direction Indicator
Hall
Hall Call Stations
Single riser
Special Features:
Fire Control Panel, Machine Room Monitor, Load
Weighing Device, Communication System, Security
Features, Handicap Features, Standby Power,
Monitoring Features
B.
A. Machine Room-Less Service Elevators
Elevator Use
Service C-3 Loading
Contract Load, in Pounds
5000 minimum
Contract Speed, in FPM
350 for travel distances of 20'-0" or more. 200 for
travel distances of less than 20'-0"
Machine Location
Overhead in hoistway
Machine Type
Gearless
Type of Control
AC variable voltage, variable frequency
Operation
Simplex selective collective or Group automatic
Platform Size
6'-0" wide by 9'-4" deep
Clear Car Inside
5'-8" wide by 8'-4" deep
Car and Hoistway Door Size
4'-6" wide by 7'-0" high
Car and Hoistway Door Type
Two speed, side slide
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 10
Guide Specification
Car and Hoistway Door Operation
Power operated. High-speed, heavy-duty
(minimum opening speed 3.0 FPS)
Hoistway Entrance
As specified
Cab Enclosure
As specified
Car Operating Station
Single (Dual with front and rear entrances)
Direction Indicator
Hall
Hall Call Stations
Single riser
Special Features:
Fire Control Panel, Machine Room Monitor, Load
Weighing Device, Communication System, Security
Features, Handicap Features, Standby Power, Door
Hold Button, Monitoring Features
2.5
CAR PERFORMANCE:
A.
Car Speed: ±3% of contract speed under any loading condition.
B.
Car Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold 125% of rated load.
C.
Car Leveling Zone: ±1/4" under any loading condition.
D.
Door Opening Time:
1.
2.
E.
Passenger Elevators: 1.8 seconds.
Service Elevators: 3.0 seconds.
Door Closing Time:
1.
2.
Passenger Elevators: 2.7 seconds.
Service Elevators: 5.1 seconds.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 11
Guide Specification
F.
Car Floor-to-Floor Performance Time: Seconds from start of doors closing until doors are -3/4
open and car level and stopped at next successive floor under any loading condition or travel
direction. (Based on a floor height of 16'-0". Adjust .3 seconds per foot of travel for 200 fpm
elevators and .2 seconds for 350 fpm elevators.)
G.
Car Ride Quality
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.6
All elevators shall have a maximum decibel reading of 65 dBA with the doors closed
during a run in the up direction, measured 5 feet above the floor in the center of the cab.
All elevators shall have a maximum vibration of 15 milligrams in the X, Y and Z axis
measured with an A95 filter.
Acceleration and Deceleration: Smooth constant and not more than 3 feet/second2 with
initial ramp between 0.5 and 0.75 second.
Sustained Jerk: Not more than 8 feet/second3.
DOOR OPERATOR EQUIPMENT
A.
Provide GAL’s MOVFRW-HSL door operator with encoder-less VVVF drive or approved
equal. Closed loop door operator designed to operate car and hoistway doors simultaneously at
the speed specified. Door shall open automatically when car stops at landing to discharge
passengers or to answer valid calls and close automatically after predetermined time interval has
elapsed. The doors shall be capable of smooth and quiet operation without slam or shock. Door
operator to have the following features.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
1/2 hp motor and heavy duty sprocket, chain, belt, and sheaves.
Closed loop regulated speed performance.
Hand-held keypad programming.
Adjustments can be stored in the keypad and downloaded to another operator.
Adjustable door obstruction reversal unit.
Optical cams with LED indicators.
Test switches for open, close, nudging and speed zone set up.
Universal inputs for open, close, and nudging.
Reversing switch to back up the door reversal device.
Cab Door Interlock. The doors on cab doors shall be equipped with approved cab door
interlocks of the cab unit system type tested as required by the Code.
1.
2.
Interlock shall prevent operation of the car away from a landing until doors are locked in
the closed position. Interlock shall prevent doors from opening at any position within the
hoistway and or landing from the cab side unless car is at rest at that landing, or is in the
leveling zone and stopping at that landing.
Provide an electric contact mounted on the car that will prevent the car from moving
away from landing unless car doors are closed.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 12
Guide Specification
C.
Door Control Device
1.
2.
3.
4.
Door Protection – Electronic Entrance Detector Screen: Provide an electronic door
detector device and or approved equal, which projects a three dimensional infrared
curtain of light guarding the door opening. Arrange to reopen doors if one beam of the
curtain is penetrated. Unit shall have transmitters and receivers spaced at a minimum
distance to provide the maximum amount of protection within the height of the doorway.
Systems, which have the availability to turn Off or On individual zones within the
curtain, will not be allowed.
Nudging Operation: After beams of door control device are obstructed for a
predetermined time interval (minimum 20.0 – 25.0 seconds), a warning signal shall sound
and doors shall attempt to close with a minimum of 2.5 foot pounds kinetic energy.
Activation of the door open button shall override nudging operation and reopen doors.
Interrupted Beam Time: When beams are interrupted during initial door opening, hold
door open a minimum of 3.0 seconds. When beams are interrupted after the initial
3.0 second hold time, reduce time doors remain open to an adjustable time of
approximately 1.0 – 1.5 seconds after beams are reestablished.
Differential Door Time: Provide separately adjustable timers to vary time that doors
remain open after stopping in response to calls.
a.
b.
2.7
Car Call: Hold open time adjustable between 3.0 and 5.0 seconds.
Hall Call: Hold open time adjustable between 5.0 and 8.0 seconds.
HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT
A.
Guide Rails
1.
2.
3.
Guides shall be steel T-section rails. Rail surfaces shall be machined smooth to ensure
proper operation of guides. Rail ends shall be accurately machined with tongue and
matching groove centrally located on web. Non wearing rail surfaces are to be painted in
color selected by the Architect/LAWA.
Guides shall be joined and installed in accordance with Section 2.23 of the Code.
Guide rails are not to be in view from within the elevator cab.
B.
Car Buffers: Oil type with blocking and support for car contract speeds exceeding 200 fpm.
Spring type for speeds of 200 fpm or less.
C.
Counterweight Buffers: Oil type with blocking and support for contract speeds exceeding
200 fpm. Spring type for speeds of 200 fpm or less.
D.
Roller Guides: Roller guides shall be mounted on top and bottom of the car and counterweight
frames to engage the guide rails. Provide slide guides with renewable oil less inserts where C3
loading is required.
E.
Suspension Means: If steel core ropes are supplied, a means to provide constant lubrication
shall be provided.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 13
Guide Specification
F.
Machine: AC gearless machine, with permanent magnet synchronous motor, direct current
electromechanical disc brakes and integral traction drive sheave. Machine to be mounted to the
car guide rail or support beam mounted at the top of the hoistway.
G.
Deflector Sheaves: Provide machined and grooved sheave for diameter of ropes. All bearings
are to be shielded or sealed.
H.
Stop Switch: An enclosed stop switch, mounted in the pit of each elevator in accordance with
the Code, shall prevent operation of elevator when switch is activated. Switch shall be of the
type described in Rule 2.2.6 of the Code.
I.
Emergency Auxiliary Stop Switch: An enclosed stop switch, mounted in the over-head
machine area and/or on the machine of each elevator in accordance with Rule 2.7 of the Code,
shall prevent operation of elevator when switch is activated. Switch shall be of the type
described in Rule 2.7 of the Code.
J.
Dead End Hitch Assemblies: Provide dead end hitch assemblies in accordance with engineered
loading requirements.
K.
Counterweight: Counterweights shall consist of a steel frame welded or bolted together and
necessary steel weight sections. These weight sections shall be held securely in place within the
frame. A minimum of two (2) tie rods shall pass through the holes in all weight sections. Paint
color as selected.
1.
2.
A required counterweight screen where no compensation is used.
The bottom of the counterweight shall have a buffer striking plate and means to attach
knock-off blocks during rope stretch.
L.
Idler Sheave: To be located directly above the counterweight frame and integral with
counterweight frame. The sheave material shall be accurately machined of semi-steel of
hardness BHN 220-250 or as per manufacturer’s requirements.
M.
Governor: Friction type over-speed self-resetting governor rated for the duty of the elevator
specified and to operate the car safety. The finish of pit tension sheave shall be factory paint.
1.
2.
3.
4.
N.
Locate the governor where the car or the counterweight in case of over-travel cannot
strike it, and where there is adequate space for full movement of governor parts.
An electrical governor overspeed protective switch that, where operated, shall remove
from the driving machine motor and brake before or at the time of application of the
safety.
Seal and tag the governor with the running speed, tripping speed, and date last tested as
required by Code.
Operation/rest of the governor shall not require the installation of an overhead access
panel. Status of the governor shall be capable of being monitored remotely at the
elevator controller.
Tension Sheave: Provide tension sheave in accordance with OEM’s governor and car safety
loading requirements.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 14
Guide Specification
O.
Terminal Limits: Limit switches shall slowdown and stop the car at the terminals if the primary
automatic stopping system fails.
P.
Life Safety Provisions: Life safety hooks and/or other life safety devices for fall protection or
prevention to be in accordance with OSHA standards/guidelines. Life safety hook, and/or other
life safety devices locations to be coordinated and installed by the Installer.
2.8
MACHNE COMPONENTS
A.
Motor
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Brake
1.
C.
The motors shall be of the alternating current reversible asynchronous or synchronous
type of a design adapted to the severe requirements of elevator service. Motor shall be
capable of developing the torque required to meet or exceed an acceleration rate of
2 ft/sec² for the elevator car.
A means to protect the windings and bearings from airborne dust shall be provided.
Insulation of all windings shall be impregnated and baked to prevent absorption of
moisture and oil. The insulation resistance between motor frame and windings shall not
be less than one meg-ohm. The motor windings shall stand a dielectric test of twice the
normal voltage plus 1000 RMS volts of 60 Hertz, alternating current for one minute.
Motor leads in the conduit box shall have the same insulation class as the windings.
Motor lead wire shall be rated 125 C and shall be sized for 105 C at the motor nameplate
amperes at 1.0. Power Factor per Electrical Apparatus Service Association (EASA)
recommendations. Leads are to be numbered for clockwise rotation when facing
opposite the shaft end.
The motor shall be designed to stand the severe loads encountered in elevator service and
the windings shall have a minimum insulation temperature rating two ratings higher than
the actual temperature rise of the motor, with a minimum rating of NEMA class F.
The motor shall be designed to the ASME A17.1 rated load requirements.
Provide dual brakes that shall be of the self-adjusting fail-safe (spring applied and
electrically released) type provided with a remotely operated, in the controller room,
manual brake release and designed to meet the service factor demand of its intended use.
Access panels at the top of hoistway shall not be required. Dual brakes shall operate
independent of each other for ascending car over speed and unintended car movement.
Provide operation to prevent the elevator from striking the hoistway overhead or
unintended car movement per the requirements of Code.
Gearless Machine
1.
2.
Sheave: The sheave material shall be accurately machined of semi-steel of hardness
BHN 220-250.
Anti-vibration Mounts: For machines that are support beam mounted, anti-vibration
mounting pads are to be provided.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 15
Guide Specification
2.9
CONTROLLER
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.10
A.
OPERATION
Simplex Selective Collective
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
The elevator control equipment shall contain diagnostic capabilities as required for the
ease of complete maintenance. The diagnostic system shall be an integral part of the
controller and provide user-friendly interaction between the service person and the
controls. All such systems shall be free from decaying circuits that must be periodically
reprogrammed by the manufacturer.
Switch gear shall be mounted in cabinets and labeled terminal strips.
The Main controller shall be a non-proprietary programmable automation controller
(PAC) based on SCADA compliant Allen Bradley CompactLogic™ 1769-L32E, or
equal, to control and monitor the status of the elevator. The PAC shall be designed to
communicate in TCP/IP format over Ethernet or approved equal.
The controller shall store the last 99 faults, accessible via laptop connection, panel view
or remote communications.
Provide a copy of all working programs on approved computer medium as well as a
printed program listing.
The Controller shall have one dedicated serial port, which supports RS-232-C signals. It
must be usable for programming purposes or for access to remote programmers via
modems.
Provide Lift-Net, or equal, ready serial port and signals. Elevator monitoring system
shall be building monitoring system compatible and capable of monitoring various
elevator control systems.
Momentary pressure of car or hall button, other than landing at which car is parked, shall
automatically start the car and dispatch the car to the corresponding floor for which that
call was registered. If a call is registered at the floor when the car is idle, the doors shall
automatically open.
When the direction of travel has been established, the car shall answer all calls
corresponding to the direction of travel and shall not reverse direction until all car and
hall calls, in that direction, have been answered.
Calls registered for the opposite direction of car travel shall remain registered and shall
be answered after car has completed its calls in the direction of travel.
If no car buttons are pressed, and car starts up in response to several down calls, the car
shall answer highest down call first and then reverse to collect other down calls.
The car shall remain at the arrival floor for an adjustable interval to permit passenger
transfer. Doors shall close after a predetermined interval after opening unless closing is
interrupted by car door reversal device or door open button in car.
Group Automatic – Groups of Two or More Elevators:
1.
Approved microprocessor-based, group dispatch, car and motion control systems as
follows.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 16
Guide Specification
2.
Include as a minimum, the following features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Operate cars as a group, capable of balancing service and providing continuity of
group operation with one or more cars removed from the system.
Register service calls from pushbuttons located at each floor and in each car. Slow
cars and stop automatically at floors corresponding to registered calls. Make stops
at successive floors for each direction of travel irrespective of order in which calls
are registered except when bypassing hall calls to balance and improve overall
service; stop only one car in response to a particular hall call. Assign hall calls to
specific cars and continually review and modify those assignments to improve
service. Simultaneous to initiation of slow-down of a car for a hall call, cancel that
call. Render hall pushbutton ineffective until car doors begin to close after
passenger transfer. Cancel car calls in the same manner. Give priority to
coincidental car and hall calls in car assignment.
Operate system to meet changing traffic conditions on a service demand basis.
Include provisions for handling traffic which may be heavier in either direction,
intermittent or very light. As traffic demands change, automatically and
continually modify group and individual car assignment to provide the mosteffective means to handle current traffic conditions. Provide means to sense longwait hall calls and preferentially serve them. Give priority to coincidental car and
hall calls in hall call assignment. Accomplish car direction reversal without
closing and reopening doors.
Use easily reprogrammable system software. Design basic algorithm to optimize
service based on equalizing system response to registered hall calls and equalizing
passenger trip time to shortest possible time.
Serve floors below main floor in a manner which logically minimizes delay in
passing or stopping at main floor in both directions of travel. Provide manual
means to force a stop at the main floor when passing to or from lower levels.
Required Features:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Dispatch Protection: Backup dispatching shall function in the same manner
as the primary dispatching.
Delayed Car Removal: Automatically remove delayed car from group
operation.
Position Sensing: Update car position when passing or stopping at each
landing.
Hall Pushbutton Failure: Provide multiple power sources and separate
fusing for pushbutton risers.
Communication link: Provide serial or duplicate communication link for all
group and individual car computers.
C.
Independent Service: Provide controls to remove elevator from normal operation and provide
control of the elevator from car buttons only. Car shall travel at contract speed and shall not
respond to corridor calls.
D.
Car Top Operation: Provide per Code requirements.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 17
Guide Specification
E.
Emergency Recall Operation (Fire Service): Provide operation and equipment per Code
requirements. Contractor shall provide relays, wiring, and terminal strips to receive signals
from the fire alarm system.
F.
Earthquake Operation: Provide operation and equipment per Code.
G.
Load Weighing: Provide automatic load weighing device set at approximately 80% of full load.
The device when activated shall cause the elevator to bypass corridor calls and shall initiate
dispatch of car at main terminal prior to elapse of normal dispatching interval. Provide
adjustable setting from 50 to 80 percent of full load.
H.
Load Weighing Security Operation: Provide load weighing device to notify ACAMS Controller
of weight status in elevator cab when in security mode of operation.
I.
Fan and Light Output Timer: Provide an adjustable timer (Range 1 to 10-minutes) that when
activated will turn off the fan and light within the car. The time will start when the car becomes
inactive.
J.
Door Hold Operation: Provide controls and a button within operating panel that shall hold the
doors open for an adjustable period of 30 to 90 seconds. The following shall resume normal
door operation.
1.
2.
Activation of door close button.
Expiration of time period.
K.
Standby Power Panel and Operation – Contractor shall provide operation as follows: When
standby power is detected by an input, one elevator at a time in each group, and single elevators,
shall be returned to the main lobby one elevator at a time, and remain there with the doors open.
Once all cars have been returned to the lobby, one elevator in each group, and single elevators
may be selected to run under standby power. Selection of the cars shall be done automatically.
This automatic selection may be overridden through manual selection. Provide necessary
wiring and contacts to allow elevator systems to sequence under standby operation. Provide
group selection switches in the fire control panel. Provide standby power indicators in the fire
control panel and main floor hall station.
L.
Tenant Security Operation
1.
The Elevator Contractor shall coordinate with the Sections 28 13 00 - ACCESS
CONTROL and ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM (ACAMS) and SECTION 28 23 00
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM (VSS) to provide elevator controls as described
below:
a.
b.
c.
Card readers shall be installed as directed adjacent to, and interfaced with the
elevator call button. The call button will be enabled by an authorized card read of
the ACAMS system.
Card readers with keypads shall be installed in each elevator cab and interfaced
with the car buttons for as directed.
Access to and from secured floors shall be by card reader only.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 18
Guide Specification
d.
e.
f.
2.11
Elevator departing unsecured floors shall require an authorized card read/PIN to
enable the registration of a car call to access secured floors, as programmed in the
ACAMS system through access permissions and levels.
Provide strobe in car transom that illuminates upon notification from ACAMS
Controller that weight or motion is detected in elevator cab.
Fire Service Operation overrides the Security Service Operation.
HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A.
Hoistway Frames and Doors
1.
Entrance frames shall be of welded and mitered construction for complete one-piece unit
assembly. All frames shall be sound deadened and securely fastened to fixing angles
mounted in the hoistway. Finish shall be 420 ferritic stainless steel per ASTM A
240/240M.
2.
Entrance frames shall be provided with an extended sill floor plate the full width and
depth of each entrance frame assembly.
3.
Hoistway doors shall be reinforced and provided with operating mechanisms and door
hangers. Door panels shall be hollow metal flush door construction, 16-gauge furniture
steel. Fill with fireproof, sound deadening material. Provide reinforcement by formed
vertical sections running full height of door. Doors shall be provided with two
removable, non-metallic gibs with fire tabs, located at the leading and trailing edge of the
door panel. There shall be no visible exposed or protruding fasteners.
4.
Provide die cast jamb markings (2 per entrance) mounted at 5'-0". Secure with adhesive
and unexposed fasteners.
5.
Hoistway door hangers and door operator shall be as specified herein.
B.
Struts and Closer Support Angles: Hoistway entrances adjacent to non-load bearing walls
(gypsum dry wall, gypsum block, etc.) shall have hanger housing and door closers supported by
steel angles of adequate size. Angles shall be continuous between sill and building beams
above and shall be bolted to the hanger support. For load bearing walls (masonry, concrete
block), submit for approval Shop Drawings of the method to be used to support hanger housing
and door closers on the wall.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 19
Guide Specification
C.
Landing Sills: Landing sills shall be designed for Class C-3 loading and shall conform to
Section 2.11 of the Code and shall be extruded stainless steel sills supplied with grooves and
trash slots for door guides and machine planed for minimum clearance. Mount sills on
combination of concrete/grout and steel supports anchored to floor construction.
D.
Hanger Supports and Cover Plates: Hanger supports shall be T bolted to strut angles and closer
support angles. Hanger cover plates shall be nominal 0.078 inch thick stainless minimum and
shall extend, as indicated in the contact drawings. Covers shall be made in sections for
convenient access when servicing hangers. Hanger sections above door openings shall be
removable from within elevator car.
E.
Dust Cover: Dust cover shall be reinforced as necessary to ensure a flat even surface
throughout. Dust cover shall extend at least the full width of door opening on each side and
fastened to hanger housings. Dust cover shall extend above entrance opening as indicated on
Contract drawings.
F.
Interlocks and Contacts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.12
A.
CAB ENCLOSURE COMPONENTS
General
1.
2.
B.
The doors at each hoistway entrance shall be equipped with approved hoistway door
interlocks of the hoistway unit system type tested as required by the Code.
Interlock shall prevent operation of the car away from a landing until doors are locked in
the closed position. Interlock shall prevent doors from opening at any landing from the
corridor side unless car is at rest at that landing, or is in the leveling zone and stopping at
that landing.
Hoistway door unlocking devices shall conform to the requirements of the Code and shall
be provided to permit authorized persons to gain access to hoistway when car is away
from landing. Ferrules shall be supplied for all hoistway unlocking device keyholes to
protect elevator hoistway doors.
Provide an electric contact mounted on the car that will prevent the car from moving
away from landing unless car doors are closed.
Elevator car and car components shall meet the applicable requirements of the Code. Car
control station(s) and position indicator(s) shall be per Contract drawings.
Entire car assembly, including car frame and platform, shall be free from warps, buckles,
and squeaks and rattles. Joints shall be lightproof.
Car Frame and Platform
1.
2.
Loading Classification and Requirements: The elevator shall be designed for Class A C3 freight elevator loading following the design data and formulas identified in the Code,
including, but not limited to, the car frame, platform, sills and guides.
Car frame and platform shall be welded galvanized steel units designed and fabricated in
accordance with applicable requirements herein and Rule 2.14 of the Code.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 20
Guide Specification
3.
4.
Protect car platform with fire retardant material. The platform shall be recessed as
required to accept floor finish.
Sub floor shall be suitably reinforced to support live loads of the elevator cab.
C.
Car Guides: Car guides shall be designed for C3 loading. Provide spring dampened roller
guides or swivel type oil less slide guides with renewable inserts.
D.
Sills: Car sills shall be extruded stainless steel sills supplied with grooves and trash slots for
door guides and machine planed for minimum clearance. Provide with matching sill extensions
to face of front return(s).
E.
Car Enclosures:
1.
2.
General: The enclosure shall be adequately reinforced and ventilated to meet Code
requirements. Provide sound-deadening mastic to exterior.
Shell:
a.
b.
3.
4.
Canopy: Provide minimum 8'-0" clear height under canopy. Reinforced 14-gauge
stainless steel No. 4 brushed finish. Arrange for hinged top emergency exit including
lock and electrical contact as required by Code.
Suspended Ceiling and Lighting:
a.
b.
5.
7.
8.
9.
Provide as shown in Architect’s drawings.
Provide clear access to the emergency exit per Code requirements.
Floor Covering:
a.
b.
6.
Passenger Elevators: Sides and back shall be 14-gauge sheet steel with baked
enamel interior finish as selected by the Architect. Arrange shell to accept interior
panels as indicated in drawings.
Service Elevators: Sides and back shall be 14-gauge, rigidized stainless steel sheet
steel. Pattern 5WL or as selected by the Architect. Provide sample.
Passenger Elevators: Floor by others Wt/Ft = 10#.
Service Elevators: 1/4" checker plate stainless steel.
Front Return Panels and Entrance Columns: 14-gauge sheet steel. Return panel shall be
stationary type applied type. Provide faceplate to allow access to car station wiring and
fixtures. Provide cabinets for special operating features and flush mounted speaker grills
for the “Hands Free” telephone and intercom. Finish shall be stainless steel No. 4
brushed finish.
Transoms: 14-gauge sheet steel finishes matching front return panels and entrance
columns.
Car Door Panels: Same construction as hoistway door panel. Finish shall be stainless
steel No. 4 brushed finish.
Handrails: Provide a 1 1/2" diameter stainless steel tubular handrail at the rear of each
passenger elevator. Return ends to wall. Provide adequate mounting. Top of handrail to
be 32" above the finished floor. Provide service elevators with side and rear wall
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 21
Guide Specification
10.
11.
12.
F.
2.13
A.
Emergency Car Lighting and Alarm System: Unit shall provide emergency light in car upon
failure or interruption of normal car lighting. Emergency lighting unit shall provide a minimum
illumination of 0.2 footcandles at 4' above car floor approximately 1' in front of main car
operating panel for not less than 4 hours. Battery shall be 6 volt minimum, sealed rechargeable
lead acid or equal. Battery charger shall be capable of restoring battery to full charge within
16 hours after resumption of normal power. Provide means within the car service panel for
testing battery, lamps, and alarm bell. When multiple units are provided in a car all units shall
illuminate. Illuminate a portion of normal car lighting.
SAFETIES
General: Provide a governor actuated mechanical safety device mounted under the car platform
and securely bolted to the car sling.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.14
mounted handrails and bumper rails. Return ends. Bolt handrails and bumper rails
through car shell. Provide backing plates and captive nuts.
Bases: Provide a 4" high base. Finish as shown in Architect’s drawings.
Pads and Hooks: Provide pad hooks and pads. Pad hooks shall be conspicuous type
(buttons) at all walls. Mount pad hooks at sides and rear above suspended ceiling line.
Pads shall cover all walls and front return panels and include cutouts for access to the
operating fixtures.
Ventilation: Two-speed exhaust blower. Provide OE type in passenger elevators and AA
type in service elevators.
When tripped, the safety mechanism shall engage the rails with sufficient force to stop a
fully loaded car with an average rate of retardation within the limits given by the
ASME A17.1 Code for the capacity
Make provisions to release the car safety. In no event shall the safety be released by
downward motion of the car. Raising the car to reset the safety shall be allowed.
Include an electrical safety plank switch that will interrupt the power to the hoist machine
when the safety is set. Resetting the plank switch shall be separate from resetting the
safety jaws.
Install a car safety marking plate of corrosion resistant metal showing the data required
by the Code.
SIGNAL DEVICES AND FIXTURES
A.
General: Provide vandal resistant signal fixtures and control devices for each elevator. Buttons
and signals shall be tamper resistant of the illuminated type that light-up when activated and
remain lit until call or other function has been fulfilled. All signal fixture and control device
faceplates shall be nominal 0.135 inch thick, unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings.
B.
Car Operating Station
1.
Provide car operating stations with faceplates flush with front returns. Station shall have
illuminating pushbuttons numbered to conform to floors served. Buttons shall light to
show registration and extinguish when car stops in response to a call. Buttons shall have
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 22
Guide Specification
a minimum dimension of 3/4", be raised 1/8" ±1/32" above the surrounding surface, be of
square shouldered design, and have a detectable mechanical motion. A minimum clear
space of 3/8" of other suitable means of separation shall be provided. Panel shall include
an alarm bell button, Door Open and Door Close buttons. Provide an extended Door
Hold button in each service elevator. All operating controls shall be located no higher
than 48" above the car floor, the keyed in car stop switch and alarm button shall be
located no lower than 35" above finished floor height. Provide in main car station a fire
emergency service cabinet containing. Phase II emergency fire service switch, fire jewel,
fireman's phone jack, fire operating instructions, Call Cancel button and Door Open and
Door Close buttons. Provide second fire jewel outside of Phase II cabinet. Provide in the
return panel an intercom grill and flush mounted speaker grill for the “Hands-free”
telephone.
a.
2.
Braille/Arabic designations shall be identified by a minimum of 5/8" Arabic
numeral, standard alphabet character, or standard symbol immediately to the left of
the control button. Braille shall be located immediately below the numeral,
character or symbol. Controls and emergency equipment shall be identified by
raised symbols, including but not limited to, door open, door close, alarm bell,
emergency stop and telephone. The call button for the main entry floor shall be
designated by a raised star at the left of the floor designations. Braille and Arabic
designations shall be flush with inconspicuous mechanical mounting. The plaques
shall have raised white colored numerals on a black background.
Provide a lockable service cabinet with concealed hinges. Cabinet door shall be flush
with the faceplate with hairline joints. Door shall include a flush integral certificate
frame for viewing the operating permit. The window shall be constructed of durable
Plexiglas or similar material and be accessible from backside of locked door. Minimum
window size to be 7" wide by 3" high.
a.
Cabinet shall contain the following type controls:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
3.
A light switch.
Two speed fan switch.
Inspection keyswitch, conforming to the ASME Code.
Independent service keyswitch.
Emergency light test button.
Keyed stop switch.
A duplex 120-volt, A.C. G.F.C.I convenience outlet.
Provide black paint filled (except as noted), engraved signage as follows with approved
size and font.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Phase II firefighters' operating instructions on rear of locked Phase II compartment
door.
Car number over main and auxiliary car operating panel.
"No Smoking" over main car operating panel. Include reference to Los Angeles
Municipal Code.
Car capacity in pounds on main car operating panel. Include reference to Los
Angeles Municipal Code.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 23
Guide Specification
e.
f.
3/16" “Push for Alarm” and telephone usage instructions.
1/8" City of Los Angeles Elevator Code anti-panic signage.
C.
Car Position Indicators: Provide segmented digital readout type with 2" high (minimum)
indications. Locate at top of each car operating panel at a height no lower than 6'-6" above the
finished floor. Indicator shall provide car position and direction of travel and include an
adjustable electronic floor passing chime. As the car passes or stops at a floor served by the
elevator, the corresponding designation shall illuminate, and an audible signal will sound. The
audible signal shall be no less than 20-decibles with a frequency no higher than 1500.
D.
Floor Annunciator: Provide digitized voice annunciator providing both male and female voices
in a system capable of up to 5-minutes of speech. Messages shall include the following
announcements:
1.
2.
3.
Floor number.
Notice of doors closing prior to nudging operation.
Emergency operation announcements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
E.
Firefighter’s Service, “Elevator returning to lobby.”
Seismic operation, “Elevator proceeding to next floor.”
Car has exceeded it rated load, reduce load to resume operation.
Standby power activated, “Elevator returning to lobby,” upon sequencing.
Security operation, “Elevator in Secure Operation, Exit Elevator Immediately”,
upon notification from ACAMS Controller.
Contractor/Installer to submit messages for Owner approval prior to fabrication.
Hall Buttons
1.
Provide one riser of vandal resistant hall pushbuttons. Station shall include flush mounted
faceplate. Centerline of riser to be at 3'-6" above the finished floor. Buttons shall have a
minimum dimension of 3/4", be raised 1/8" ±1/32" above the surrounding surface, be of
square shouldered design, and have a detectable mechanical motion. A minimum clear
space of 3/8" or other suitable means of separation shall be provided. Button design shall
match those used on the car operating panel. Provide red and/or green LED illumination.
Provide 3-position Code required Phase I key switch and operational instructions
engraved minimum 1/8" high on the faceplate, at the main lobby. Incorporate fire service
jewel and standby power jewels. Faceplate edges shall be relieved. Finish shall be
stainless steel No. 4 brushed finish. Backfill for engraving shall be epoxy filled. Integral
signs shall be as follows:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
Fire Operational Instructions. Minimum 1/8" high lettering.
Fire Service Jewel. Minimum 1/8" high lettering.
Standby Power Indicators. Minimum 1/8" high lettering.
Provide spanner type security fasteners. Finish matching faceplate.
No objects adjacent to, and below, the hall push button station shall project more than 4inches from the wall.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 24
Guide Specification
F.
Hall Lanterns: Provide UP and DOWN lanterns at intermediate landings, single lantern at
terminal landings. Electronic chimes for each lantern shall sound once for up and twice for the
down direction of travel. The lantern shall illuminate for corresponding direction of car travel
and the chime shall sound when the elevator is at a predetermined distance from the scheduled
floor stop. The design and location of the hall lanterns shall be as selected. Faceplate finish
matching hall buttons.
G.
Hoistway Access Switches: Provide without faceplate in entrance frame side jamb at all top
and bottom terminals.
H.
Fire Control Station: Provide a common control panel for all elevators, locate as directed.
Panel to contain a digital readout type position and direction indicator per elevator; fireman's
return switch per group or individual elevator as required; a jewel to indicate if doors are open
at the fire egress floor per elevator; in car fire service jewel per elevator; space for fireman's
phone jack; a cabinet containing fire service keys; engraved instructions for fire service
operation; and emergency power selector switches and status indicators.
I.
Machine Room Monitors: Provide a monitor in each machine room capable of displaying
status, position and critical items for trouble shooting the equipment.
2.15
A.
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Telephone System: Provide automatic dial “Hands-Free” telephone station located in the car
station. A button shall suitably identify activation of auto dialer for the visually impaired.
Speaker shall be mounted without faceplate or visible fasteners and located either behind the
control station or within the telephone box. Communication shall be capable of being heard
from any location within the car enclosure.
1.
2.
3.
Provide a telephone symbol minimum 2" high, and raised ±1/32" with Braille indications
adjacent to a separate activation button mounted on the control panel.
Provide engraved emergency instructions above the activation button. Instructions shall
read:
“To use emergency telephone, press button below. Dialing will occur
automatically.”
Provide a visual indication, approximately 3/4" in diameter, or a jewel that illuminates
once a call has been received by the master station. Instructions under the visual indicator
or within the lighted jewel shall read: “Assistance is on the way”.
B.
Provide wiring from car to telephone terminal box in elevator machine room.
C.
Provide permanent means of communication between the elevator car and the machine room if
required by Code.
D.
Provide installation of Life Safety speaker provided by others within the elevator cab. Provide
wiring from car to Life Safety junction box in machine room.
E.
Bell Alarm System: Bell alarm system for each elevator shall be properly located within
building and audible outside hoistway when activated by the Alarm call button on each car
control station.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 25
Guide Specification
2.16
CENTRAL MONITORING SYSTEM
A.
Vertical Transportation Central Monitoring/Control System: Provide central monitoring and
control system to monitor and record all the building’s elevators, escalators and moving walks
and their respective operations simultaneously. System shall be compatible with other building
monitoring systems. Systems shall be capable of accommodating multiple elevator control
systems from various manufacturers.
B.
General: In the event of an elevator shutdown or any other designated emergency, the elevator
system shall automatically initiate a call to the Elevator Command Center (ECC). The ECC
shall be capable of receiving the call, processing the data and routing the received data to the
proper storage or output device, i.e., monitor, hard drive, printer, etc. The system shall have the
ability to page designated personnel to notify them of an emergency event. The ECC shall store
a chronological listing of the emergency reports received from each elevator. The user shall be
able to view or print these reports. The following system hardware shall be provided:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Pentium based processor, 1.6GHz or faster.
512 MB RAM.
80 GB hard drive.
Parallel port.
CD-ROM drive.
SVGA card and monitor.
Parallel printer.
Ethernet connectivity.
Provide minimum 17-inch LCD monitor displaying real time activity of each group and
each escalator and their respective operations status.
Provide a Graphical User Interface Central Monitoring System (CMS) with, but not limited to
the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Simulated hoistway and car configuration.
Individual elevator position.
Individual elevator car calls.
Individual elevator direction.
Individual elevator door position.
Individual elevator status of operation.
Individual elevator communication status.
Registered up and down hall calls.
Controller real-time clock date and time.
Group mode of operation.
Remote registration of car and hall calls. Send a car to any floor at any time, regardless of
operation mode, i.e. normal operation, independent service, swing car operation, floor
lockout, etc.
Floor lockout (hall and car).
Independent service to remove car from group to respond to car calls only.
VIP operation to send a car to any floor and remain there for a predetermined time
reassigning all other calls to different cars automatically.
Car to lobby feature to call any car to the main lobby. Return car nonstop after answering
preregistered car calls, and park with doors open for an adjustable time period of 60-90-
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 26
Guide Specification
16.
D.
As a minimum, the following reports shall be available from the CMS:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.17
A.
seconds. Upon expiration of time, the car shall automatically resume to normal
operation.
Standby power operation and selection.
Average wait time for each hall call, in each direction of travel.
Number of hall calls registered per event or time period selected.
Emergency faults and events for the selected time period.
Number of hall calls answered per elevator.
Door dwell times.
Calculated car times including: door open times, door close time, floor-to-floor time.
WIRING AND ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
Conduit and Wiring
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Unless otherwise specified, all electrical conductors in the pits and hoistways, except
traveling cable connections to the car shall be provided in rigid zinc-coated steel conduit
with steel outlet boxes, except that a small amount of flexible conduit may be used where
conduit is not subject to moisture or embedded in concrete. Terminal boxes and other
similar items shall be of approved construction, thoroughly reinforced, and in no case less
than number 12 USSG. All electrical boxes exceeding 150 cubic inches shall be
supported independently of the conduits. The rigid conduit shall conform to the
specifications here in before specified. All raceway shall be threaded rigid steel conduit.
Flexible heavy-duty service cord, type SO, may be used between fixed car wiring and
switches on car doors for door reversal devices.
All conduit terminating in steel cabinets, junction boxes, wire-ways, switch boxes, outlet
boxes and similar locations shall have approved insulation bushings. If the bushings are
constructed completely of insulation material, a steel locknut shall be installed under the
bushing. At ends of conduits not terminating in steel cabinets or boxes, the conductors
shall be protected by terminal fittings having an insulated opening for the conductors.
Conduit fittings and connections using set screws or indentations as a means of
attachment are not permitted.
Connect motors and other components subject to movement or vibration, to the conduit
systems with flexible conduit.
The Contractor shall furnish all materials and completely wire all parts of the electrical
equipment of the elevators including electrical devices on hatch doors.
The conduits shall be of such size that the wires or cables can be readily installed and
replaced, if necessary. No conduit or raceway shall be less than 3/4" trade size, except
that for small devices such as door switches, interlocks, etc., 1/2" conduit may be used.
The total overall cross sectional area of the wires contained in any conduit shall not
exceed 40 percent of the internal area of the conduit.
Conduits shall be neatly and systematically run. All exposed conduit and boxes shall be
supported by approved and substantial straps, hangers or clamps to the structural steel,
reinforced concrete, or other approved supports. Riser conduits in hoistway shall be
supported at each floor level.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 27
Guide Specification
8.
B.
Conductors
1.
2.
3.
C.
All screws used for terminal connections of all wiring (control room, machine area,
hoistway and pit) shall be provided with "star washers" of proper size and type.
No joints or splices shall be permitted in wiring except at outlets. Tap connectors may be
used in wire-ways provided they meet all UL requirements.
All wiring shall test free from short circuits or grounds. Insulation resistance between
individual external conductors and between conductors and ground shall be not less than
one meg-ohm.
Provide all necessary conduit and wiring between all remote control rooms, machine
areas and hoistway.
Traveling Cables
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Shall be Type EO, rated for a maximum of 300 volts, and shall comply with the
requirements of UL Standard #62 and Articles 400 and 620 of ANSI/NFPA No.72
Travel cables shall include separate coaxial cable shielded for the communications
system.
Provide 10 percent spares, but not less than 6 spare conductors in each traveling cable.
Provide four pairs of CAT 6A cables for communication, CCTV and security.
Provide separate traveling cables for car lighting and fan control circuits.
Provide traveling cable for telephone in the elevator car. Cable shall extend from
junction box in hoistway to telephone box in car.
Provide traveling cable for car work lights.
All insulated wiring, control wiring and wiring in traveling cables shall be tag coded at
their terminals in the motor room or controller location and hoistway junction box,
elevator cab junction box, and push-button stations within the cab, and shall agree with
the approved wiring diagrams.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 28
Guide Specification
9.
All cabinets containing motor drives, filter boxes, transformers and power reactors shall
be supported on rails and isolated from the base building structure with elastomer pads
having a minimum static deflection of 3/8" (Mason Type N, or equivalent). All
connections to and from the cabinetry shall be flexible in order not to compromise the
isolation system. Use non-rigid conduit for the final electrical connection, with all other
conduit supports and clamps provided on a neoprene sponge insert.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Prior to commencing with the installation of elevator equipment, examine the following and
verify that no irregularities exist that would affect the quality of execution of work specified.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.2
3.3
Hoistway size and Plumbness
Anchor brackets
Sill Support
Pit depth
Overhead clearance
INSTALLATION
A.
Install elevator in accordance with the OEM’s installation procedures and approved Shop
Drawings. Install equipment so it may be easily removed for maintenance and repair. Install all
equipment to afford maximum accessibility, safety, and continuity of operation.
B.
Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with the OEM’s submittal.
C.
Erect all items square, plumb, straight and accurately fitted with tight joints and intersections.
D.
Coordinate with the General Contractor to ensure that the installation of the elevators is not in
conflict with the work performed of other trades.
E.
Isolate non-compatible, dissimilar materials from each other by providing vibration isolation,
gaskets or insulating compounds.
F.
Provide protective coverings for finished surfaces.
G.
Upon completion, touch up and restore damaged or defaced factory finished surfaces. Touch up
any marred finishes and replace as directed.
H.
Remove protective coverings and clean exposed surfaces after completion.
I.
Welding shall comply with AWS D1.1. Identify field welds with welder’s identification stamp.
FIELD TESTING
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 29
Guide Specification
A.
General: After installation, the Installer shall inspect and test each elevator and related
equipment to Owner’s satisfaction that operation of every part of the equipment complies with
this specification and with applicable requirements of ANSI A17.1 including sound level
criteria specified herein. Elevator will be inspected in accordance with the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Installer shall notify Owner seven (7) days prior to each scheduled test Installer shall
perform testing in the presence of the Owner’s representative. This test is in addition to
those performed by The City of Los Angeles Elevator Inspector.
Installer shall notify the appropriate local authorities having jurisdiction a minimum of
seven (7) days in advance of final acceptance tests.
Installer shall provide all instruments, materials, and labor required for tests specified
herein.
Acceptance Testing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Inspect and test the elevator and related equipment to the Owner’s satisfaction that
operation of every part of equipment complies with applicable requirements of
ASME/ANSI A17.1 and local codes.
Notification Requirements: Notify Owner a minimum of five (5) working days prior to
each scheduled test.
Full Load Run Test: Run elevator continuously a minimum of four (4) hours with full
specified rated load, during which time car shall be stopped at top and bottom landings
with a minimum standing period of 10 seconds at each landing.
Speed Test: Make tests before and after full load tests. Using a tachometer on guide rail,
determine actual speed of car in both directions of travel, both with full-specified rated
load and no load in car. Tolerances for determining if car speeds meet the specified
requirements are as follows:
a.
b.
c.
5.
6.
7.
Ascending and Descending Car Speed not more than 10 percent above or more
than 10 percent below required speed.
Car Leveling Test: Determine accuracy of floor landing tests both before and after
full load run tests. Minimum of 1/4 inch leveling must be maintained. Test
accuracy of landing at all floors with full load and no load in car, in both directions
of travel.
Electrical Tests: Ensure elevator wiring system is free of short circuits and
accidental grounds. Test ground resistance of elevator structure, equipment, and
raceways for continuity. Using meg ohm-meter, determine that insulation
resistance of each circuit is more than one (1) meg ohm or higher as required by
the cable manufacturer. Insulation resistance for motors shall be determined under
actual conditions after installation.
Acceptance: Elevator acceptance will be based upon elevators meeting requirements of
Contract Documents and upon evidence of passing specified acceptance tests and
inspections. Final testing will be after elevators are connected to permanent power.
Test Reports: Within five (5) days after completion of a test, submit a test report stating
type of test, test requirements, failures, or problems, and name of certifying Engineer and
Title. Safety device failure or defective equipment shall be identified, with description of
cause and corrective action taken.
Failures for any reasons shall be identified with cause(s) and corrective action taken.
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 30
Guide Specification
C.
Re-Inspection: If any equipment is found to be damaged or defective, or if the performance of
the escalators does not conform to the requirements of the contract specifications or the Safety
Code, no approval or acceptance of escalators shall be issued until all defects have been
corrected. When the repairs and adjustments have been completed and the discrepancies
corrected, the Owner and Owner’s representative shall be notified and the escalators will be reinspected. Rejected escalators shall not be used until they have been re-inspected and approved.
D.
The certificate of inspection for operational use will be issued to LAWA by the enforcing
inspection agency. The certificate shall be posted in the elevator control room and in the car
operating station.
3.4
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train LAWA's maintenance personnel to
operate, adjust, and maintain escalators.
B.
Check operation of escalators with LAWA's personnel present and before date of Completion.
Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.
C.
Check operation of escalators with LAWA personnel present not more than one month before
end of warranty period. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.
END OF SECTION 14 21 00
HEAVY DUTY TRANSIT TYPE MACHINE ROOM-LESS ELEVATORS
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
14 21 00 - 31
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
SECTION 14310
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT TYPE ESCALATORS
PART 1
1.01
1.02
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.
B
Contractor should refer to General and Supplementary Conditions for
requirements specific to conducting work at LAWA facilities, including but not
limited security issues, training, certifications, workforce requirements,
coordination requirements not contained herein, expected hours of work,
schedule limitations and other restrictions and constraints pertaining to this
project.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A
Provide all engineering, equipment, labor and permits required to satisfactorily
complete design, fabrication, demolition, installation, and testing of _______
heavy-duty transit escalators as required by contract documents at various
locations at Los Angeles International Airport.
B
Work performed under this Section may include removal of ALL existing
escalator components (if replacing existing equipment) in the various Los
Angeles International Airport locations and provide new escalators complete and
ready for use in compliance with all applicable Codes at all the locations
specified in the Contract Drawings.
1.
C
The contract drawings included with these specifications provide
dimensional information on the existing equipment. The new equipment
to be provided are to meet the requirements of these specifications with
the understanding that a concurrent design is being developed that will
provide the modifications necessary to the existing locations in order to
accommodate the new equipment. The selected equipment supplier will
be required to provide information pertaining to their equipment to the
Engineer to assist the concurrent design development. As stated
elsewhere in these specifications, there may be instances where LAWA
and the Engineer may deem structural modifications unfeasible and the
equipment supplier will be required to fabricate the new escalator(s) to
meet the existing dimensional conditions.
Demolition of the existing escalators includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1.
Complete removal of the existing escalators including the removal of
existing escalator truss, cladding on sides and beneath existing
escalators.
14310 - 1
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
2.
D
Installation of the new escalators includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1
2
3
4
Installation of new heavy duty escalators.
Installation of flashing and closure elements required to coordinate new
escalators with existing structural and architectural elements.
Installation of new controllers in remote controller rooms for all escalators.
New truss decking and cladding to complete all sides and surfaces of the
escalators.
E
Provide all required staging, protection, hoisting, hoist/safety beams, and
equipment necessary for the movement of equipment.
F
Transportation and Handling: Materials, products and equipment shall be
properly packaged and protected from damage during transportation, storage
and handling. Coordinate delivery and movement of large items in the Los
Angeles International Airport facilities with the Engineer.
G
Product Delivery, Storage and Handling:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.03
Removal of existing flashing and closure elements provided between
existing escalators and existing structural and architectural elements.
Protect equipment and exposed finishes from damage and stains during
transportation, erection and construction.
Available storage space at the site is limited. Any additional off site space
required, including cost, is responsibility of the Vertical Transportation
Equipment Supplier.
Allocate available site storage areas and coordinate their use with LAWA
and the work of other contractors.
Provide suitable temporary weather-tight storage facilities as may be
required for materials that will be stored in the open.
Deliver material in manufacturer’s original, unopened protective
packaging.
DEFINITIONS
A
Heavy-duty escalator: An escalator designed specifically for transit system
usage. Substantially different from commercial units in the design of truss,
machine, step chain, step chain tensioning device, steps, brake, and other
components/equipment.
B
Flat steps: Number of flat steps shall be measured from edge of comb plate in
horizontal direction to first exposure of a riser, at upper and lower landings.
C
Working points: Points of intersection of step nosing line and the horizontal line
of the top and bottom landing plates at finish elevation.
D
Special tools: Tools designed specifically for tasks associated with escalator
examinations, maintenance, and repair, or those which are required for these
tasks and are not readily available through normal purchasing channels.
E
Step width: The horizontal distance between skirt panels.
14310 - 2
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
1.04
1.05
F
Escalator support: These are the upper, lower, and intermediate supports
needed to support the total loads of the escalator.
G
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier: The Vertical Transportation
Equipment Supplier is the contractor, or subcontractor, responsible for demolition
and removal of the existing escalators and furnishing and installing the new
escalators.
TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT ELECTRICAL POWER SERVICES TO BE
PROVIDED
A
For the escalator drive systems: 480 volts, 3 phase, 3 wire, 60 Hertz terminating
in at a primary disconnect switch located in the new remote controller rooms and
an auxiliary disconnect switch will be required in the upper escalator pit. Vertical
Transportation Equipment Supplier must coordinate with the Engineer.
B
For escalator lighting: 120 volts, 1 phase, 3 wire, 60 Hertz terminating at the
escalator controller as a basis of design, however, Vertical Transportation
Equipment Supplier must coordinate with the Engineer for specific requirements
for lighting systems provided.
C
For pit lighting and receptacles: 120 volts, 1 phase, 3 wire, 60 Hertz terminating
at a disconnect switch in the upper escalator pit as a basis of design, however,
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier must coordinate with the Engineer.
APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS, AND PUBLICATIONS
A
Escalator designs and installations: Heavy-duty, public transit service type in
accordance with APTA standards and are to comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
ASME A17.1 – 2004 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.
ASME A17.2 - Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators, and Moving
Walks; applicable edition.
ASME A17.5 – Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment; applicable
edition
European Norm – EN 115
Local Fire jurisdiction
Life Safety Code, NFPA 101, and CCR Title 19
Uniform Federal Accessibility Standard (UFAS)
California Code of Regulations Title 8 and California Building Code Title
24
2002 City of Los Angeles Elevator Code
ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel;
applicable edition
ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat
Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; applicable edition
ASTM A 325M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for
Structural Steel Joints (Metric); applicable edition
ASTM A 490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel,
Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; applicable edition
14310 - 3
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
ASTM A 490M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts,
Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural Steel Joints (Metric); applicable
edition
ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes;
applicable edition
ASTM A 501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; applicable edition
ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, ZincCoated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the
Hot-Dip Process; applicable edition
ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked
Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; applicable
edition
ASTM B 138/B 138M - Standard Specification for Manganese Bronze
Rod, Bar, and Shapes; applicable edition
ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate; applicable edition
ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and AluminumAlloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); applicable edition
ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; applicable edition
ASTM B 221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and AluminumAlloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); applicable
edition
ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind
HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass; applicable edition
AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel; applicable edition
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; applicable edition
UL (ECMD) - Electrical Construction Materials Directory; current edition
ANSI Y14.3 Multi and Sectional View Drawings
IBC 2007 – International Building Code
Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities (ADAAG)
American Public Transit Association (APTA) Heavy Duty Escalator
Design Guideline
AFBMA (Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association) - Std. 9 and 11
B
Specifications and references contained within this section are not to be
construed as supplanting any code requirements governing the design,
fabrication, installation or operation of the equipment.
C
The most stringent requirement shall take precedent in case of a conflict between
codes, regulations or standards incorporated into this section.
D
Any specific provision cited herein and/or shown on the contract drawings shall
govern for the specified application.
E
The Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall be licensed and strictly
governed by local and governmental authorities of this area in order to perform
this work.
14310 - 4
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
1.06
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A
B
C.
General:
1
Design escalators with provisions for thermal expansion and contraction
of complete escalator assemblies due to changing ambient conditions as
well as any movement of the facility. Escalators shall be of the heavyduty type for use in transit systems, modified per these specifications to
meet the requirements at the LAX facilities.
2
No wood or wood products shall be permitted in escalator systems.
3
Escalators shall be designed per the minimum indicated transition radii
and number of flat steps based on vertical rise as per the contract
drawings.
Operational Requirements:
1
Hours of operation shall be considered as twenty-four (24) hours per day,
seven (7) days per week.
2
Direction of travel shall be considered as either direction, and unit shall be
reversible.
3
Speed of operation shall not exceed 100 feet per minute. The no-load to
full-load speed shall not exceed 4% of the rated speed.
Structural Requirements:
1
For the escalators to be provided, Vertical Transportation Equipment
Supplier shall provide escalator truss mounting angles and intermediate
truss supports with attachments, sized as required to install escalators,
for lengths and vertical rise as indicated on contract drawings, into
existing well way structural support system without structural modification
to the building unless required to accommodate increase in transition
radius and/or increase in flat steps.(it is assumed that all well ways will
require modification to meet the dimensional requirements of the new
escalators.)
2
Loads shall be indicated on shop drawings and shall be provided by the
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier to the Engineer. These
reaction loads shall include the dead weights of the escalators machinery,
structure and truss cladding.
3
Special design loads shall be computed by the Vertical Transportation
Equipment Supplier for heavy-duty, transit system type escalators as
specified herein.
4
Escalator intermediate support points shall be provided by Vertical
Transportation Equipment Supplier where required and shall be
coordinated with existing structural bearing locations for intermediate
supports. Details and calculations shall be submitted by the Vertical
Transportation Equipment Supplier for coordination and record by the
Engineer.
14310 - 5
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
5
Escalator truss design shall have a maximum deflection of 1:1000 of the
spans between supports as depicted in the contract drawings using the
design loads specified.
6
Foundations: Additional room for escalator controllers will be provided for
all escalators as noted on the drawings.
7
Design load shall be 320 pounds per 40 inch exposed step for all truss,
machinery, chains, motors and brakes and 256 pounds per 32 inch
exposed step.
8
Escalator Installations shall be designed to meet Seismic zone 4 criteria
per ASME A17.1 requirements and requirements of the local code
authorities.
9
Escalator components shall be designed based on the following applied
duty cycle during operation:
Three (3) Hours with 100% Rated Load
Six (6) Hours with 50% Rated Load
Fifteen (15) Hours with 25% Rated Load
D.
E.
F.
Environmental Operations Requirements
1
General: Escalators shall be capable of operating with full specified
performance capability while exposed to the following climatic and
environmental conditions.
2
For Exterior Escalators:
a.
Escalators will be designed to operate while exposed to the
natural elements of weather, including direct sunlight, rain, and
airborne dust; all conditions of relative humidity while exposed to
airborne dust, and debris; and in dry bulb temperature range of
minus ten (-10) to plus one hundred and five (+105) degrees
Fahrenheit. Escalators shall be provided with drains. The
location of the drain shall be coordinated with LAWA and the
Engineer.
3.
For Interior Escalators (those within a climatically controlled space):
a.
Escalators shall be designed to operate in a temperature range of
plus five (+5) to plus one hundred four (+104) degrees Fahrenheit,
dry bulb; and all conditions of relative humidity while exposed to
airborne dust and debris.
Fire Protection
1
Contractor shall provide escalators constructed of non-combustible
materials throughout, with the exception of handrails, handrail rollers,
chain step wheels, and electrical equipment, as defined in ASTM E 136.
Handrails shall have a flame spread rating of seventy-six (76) to two
hundred (200), when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2
Fire protection shall comply with requirements as defined in ANSI A17.1
and all applicable codes and regulations.
Performance Requirements:
14310 - 6
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
G.
1.07
1
Escalator rated Speed shall not exceed 100 feet per minute (FPM).
Deviations in speed between no passenger load and full passenger loads
shall not exceed 4% of the rated speed.
2
Sound Level: Escalators shall be designed to operate at or below a sixtyfive (65) decibels sound level, measured five (5) feet above the escalator
at any location, with the escalator operating normally, either free-running
or under load. For multiple escalator installation, the noise
measurements shall be made with only one (1) escalator unit in
operation, but with the entire installation complete and in operating
condition. An ambient level not to exceed forty-nine (49) decibels shall be
maintained prior to units being turned on.
3
Bearings shall be rated for an AFBMA L10 life as specified, under
fluctuating bearing load. All bearings shall have basic dynamic load
ratings.
Labeling Requirements: Every escalator shall be clearly marked with rated load
and speed, braking torque, manufacture serial number, and the designated
LAWA identification.
JOB CONDITIONS
A
Protection: During installations and until escalator systems are fully operative;
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall make necessary provisions to
protect systems from damage, deterioration, and environmental conditions.
B
Coordination Requirements
1.
Alterations required to accommodate escalator: Vertical Transportation
Equipment Supplier shall coordinate any alterations with LAWA and the
Engineer.
2.
Demolition and Installation: The Vertical Transportation Equipment
Supplier will be required to demolish the existing escalators as specified
herein. Upon completion of demolition work, the Vertical Transportation
Equipment Supplier will be required to demobilize from the job site so that
a General Contractor under separate LAWA contract can prepare the
existing well way to accept the new escalator. Once the General
Contractor has completed the required modifications, the Vertical
Transportation Equipment Supplier will be required to re-mobilize and
install the new escalator system. Vertical Transportation Equipment
Supplier shall coordinate directly with LAWA in order to properly execute
this work sequence.
3.
Cladding: Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall coordinate
with the Engineer the proposed methods of securing cladding to truss
utilizing no exposed fasteners. Drawings are to be submitted for approval
indicating the connection points to be utilized for securing cladding. The
new escalators shall have cladding attached to match the existing units
they are replacing.
14310 - 7
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
C
1.08
4.
Decking: Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall coordinate with
the Engineer and review any and all appropriate design drawings dealing
with escalator decking. No exposed fastenings are to be provided and
decking shall consist of one-piece widths and extend to the finish walls.
Drawings are to be submitted for approval.
5.
Floor finish at landing plates and newels: Vertical Transportation
Equipment Supplier shall coordinate with LAWA and the Engineer.
6.
Lock and key requirements: Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier
shall coordinate with the Engineer and LAWA.
7.
Pit Drainage: Provide a means to prevent water from accumulating in the
pit for exterior escalators.
Site Conditions
1.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall design and fabricate
escalators to fit within existing structures unless otherwise indicated in the
contract documents or required to meet code required minimum of flat
steps and transition radius specified in these contract documents.
2.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall review site conditions
and measure as-built dimensions for escalator well way(s) prior to
construction of equipment and delivery of equipment to the site.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A
Regulatory agencies: escalator design, materials, construction clearances,
workmanship, and tests shall conform to the requirements of the codes and
regulations listed in Part 1.05.
B
Welding: Welding shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of
AWS or CWB, and City of Los Angeles Department of Building and Safety.
Welders shall produce evidence of current certification by City of LA; and AWS or
CWB.
C
Dimensions
1.
Each escalator shall be forty (40) inch (1000mm), or thirty-two (32) inch
(800mm) nominal step width as specified and designed for a maximum of
30 degrees.
2.
Escalator widths shall not exceed those indicated on contract drawings.
3.
Structural dimension requirements:
a.
Contract drawings indicate the dimensions of the existing
escalators. It is to be understood that Vertical Transportation
Equipment Supplier shall design and fabricate escalators to the
requirements of the contract specifications and make every
attempt to minimize the modifications to the existing structures. It
is understood that modifications will be required in order to
accommodate the new escalators due to the increase in transition
14310 - 8
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
b.
D.
E.
radius and increase in flat steps, and LAWA will have this work
performed by another contractor. Locations where Vertical
Transportation Equipment Supplier’s equipment will be required to
fit within the existing well way will be identified by LAWA and the
Engineer. Modifications in the form of truss reductions or
extensions may be required for these locations and Vertical
Transportation Equipment Supplier is to provide a price on the bid
form to address truss reductions and extensions.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall verify dimensions
of well ways and access points prior to manufacturing trusses. A
California PE licensed surveyor shall be employed by the Vertical
Transportation Equipment Supplier to verify all existing wellway
dimensions prior to design and fabrication of the escalators.
These PE sealed survey results shall be provided to LAWA and
the Engineer for approval.
4.
In the event of a discrepancy, Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier
shall notify LAWA and the Engineer immediately, and shall not proceed
with installation in the areas of discrepancy, until the discrepancy has
been fully resolved, and LAWA has instructed Vertical Transportation
Equipment Supplier to proceed. Failure of Vertical Transportation
Equipment Supplier to report discrepancies shall constitute an
acceptance of existing work as fit and proper for the execution and
completion of Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier’s work.
5.
Minimum Transition radii and number of flat steps shall be as indicated on
the contract drawings unless otherwise specified.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
1.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall obtain and pay for all
necessary permits, and perform such tests as may be required for
acceptance and approval of moving walks by jurisdictional agencies.
2.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall notify the proper
inspectors to witness required testing.
Factory Visit
1.
The Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall provide for the costs
of up to three of LAWA’s representatives, including the Engineer to visit
the factory where the escalators are being manufactured, per contract, for
each unit type.
2.
The escalator shall be tested and inspected with its own designated
controller. The Engineer and LAWA shall observe the testing of the
controller operation and the testing of the safety devices in the escalator.
The balustrade and handrails do not need to be assembled for these
tests. The escalator shall otherwise be fully assembled and capable of
operating with all steps installed, at either a 30 degree angle or horizontal
in the factory, whichever is feasible.
14310 - 9
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
3.
1.09
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Packing, Shipping Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading:
1.
B.
C.
D.
Accept equipment, materials, and other Products on site in factory
containers, bundles, and shipping skids.
Delivery and Acceptance at Site:
1.
Deliver material in original packages, containers, skid loads, or bundles
bearing brand names and identification of source of manufacture or
supply.
2.
Inspect deliveries for damage.
Storage and Protection:
1.
Store materials inside under cover and in a dry location.
2.
Protect from weather, direct sunlight, surface damage, corrosion, and
construction traffic and activity.
3.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall make necessary
provisions to protect systems from damage, deterioration, and
environmental conditions during installations and until escalator systems
are fully operative.
Handling:
1.
1.10
The Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall not ship the
escalators without the approval of the Engineer and LAWA after the
conclusion of the factory visit.
Handle material to prevent damage to edges, ends, surfaces, and
finishes.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submittal shall contain sufficient detail to show full compliance with
Contract Documents.
B.
Product Data:
1.
Submit manufacturer's product data for each product and material
2.
Indicate manufacturer, trade names, and model numbers, components,
arrangement, optional and accessories being provided.
3.
Include applicable literature, catalog material or technical brochures.
4.
Include material and equipment specifications, sizes, types, dimensions,
weights, rated capacities, and performance curves.
5.
Include utility requirements for wiring, piping, and service connection
data, motor sizes complete with electrical characteristics.
14310 - 10
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
C.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Seven (7) copies of the layout and shop drawings shall be provided by
the contractor for review within thirty (30) days of notice to proceed.
2.
California PE sealed civil surveys demonstrating that the Vertical
Transportation Equipment Supplier has confirmed the dimensional
requirements of the new escalators to be installed, including but not
limited to, vertical rise, locations from columns, well way lengths and
widths, pit depths, and location of intermediate supports shall be
provided.
3.
All drawings, views and details shall be developed and presented in
accordance with ANSI Y14.3 Multi and Sectional View Drawings.
4.
Drawings shall clearly reflect dimensional data for escalator well ways
including cross references to building column lines and finish elevations
depicted in the Contract Drawings.
5.
Escalator layout shall be shown in three orthogonal views and shall
include key dimensions, support details, power connection locations and
power connection terminal points. General layout shall include a cross
section taken through the escalator between the escalator work points.
Step nosing radii at the upper and lower transitions shall be clearly
dimensioned.
6.
Bolt torque settings, including thread lubricant specifications, for all field
critical connections and adjustments shall be clearly indicated on the
layout drawings. Bolt torques shown shall include, but not be limited to,
the following:
a.
End support leveling set screws/jack bolts
b.
Intermediate support leveling set screws/jack bolts, as required
c.
Truss split connection systems, as required for multiple section
trusses
7.
Submit detail drawings, including sizes, tolerances, materials and part
numbers for the following systems and/or components:
a.
Escalator truss structure
b.
Step and step chain guidance track system and supports
c.
Escalator drive machine assembly including drive chains and/or
gear transmission details
d.
Escalator service brake assembly, including brake torque data
and curves
e.
Emergency and main shaft brake systems including brake torque
data and curves
f.
Step chain assembly including pitch, link plates, pins, bushings
and rollers
g.
Step assembly including axle(s), step tread, step riser, frames and
rollers
h.
Handrail system including drive, cross section of profile, guides
and tensioning devices
i.
Escalator supports including end supports, intermediate supports,
fixed supports and slip supports as required.
14310 - 11
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
j.
8.
9.
10.
11.
D.
Demolition Plans:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Balustrade system including decking, interior panels, skirt panels
and related connections.
k.
Operating stations including emergency stop button, direction
selection switches and labeling.
l.
Floorplates and floor plate frames, including adjustment details.
m.
Ceiling intersection and apex guards, where applicable.
n.
Electrical layout showing placement of lighting, light switches,
receptacles, light fixtures, disconnect switches, and convenience
outlets in machinery spaces, truss envelope, and pits.
o.
Safety Devices including, but not limited to, the following:
1)
Comb impact devices
2)
Handrail entry guards
3)
Broken drive chain switches, as applicable
4)
Broken step chain switches
5)
Skirt obstruction devices
6)
Missing step devices
7)
Missing and Deteriorated roller devices.
Shop drawings shall include complete schematic and connection
diagrams for each controller and all electrical devices including a legend
for components.
Controller information should include complete I/O list.
Remote controller room layout drawings shall be provided.
All drawings shall reflect existing field measured conditions and be
provided electronically in AutoCAD 2008 format.
Seven (7) copies of the demolition plans shall be provided by the Vertical
Transportation Equipment Supplier for review no later than six (6) weeks
prior to start of demolition.
Demolition plans shall include both a narrative description of the
demolition sequence and sketches illustrating the path of egress from the
facility.
All loads imparted on the structure shall be shown including rigging
elements and loads required for removal.
Details shall be provided clearly depicting proposed connections of
rigging equipment to the existing structure and means proposed to protect
existing adjacent finishes.
Restrictions pertaining to demolition work including work hours, cutting
and burning, removal of demolished escalators, LAWA salvage rights
shall be per General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions of this
contract.
All demolition plans as required per contract documents.
Installation and Rigging Plans:
14310 - 12
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Seven (7) copies of the installation and rigging plans shall be provided by
the contractor for review no later than six (6) weeks prior to start of
installation.
Installation and rigging plans shall include both a narrative description of
the installation sequence and sketches illustrating the path of egress
through the facility. Sizes of openings in the facility shall be clearly
indicated.
All loads imparted on the structure shall be shown.
Details shall be provided clearly depicting proposed connections of
rigging equipment to the existing structure and means proposed to protect
existing adjacent finishes.
Samples:
1.
2.
Submit [6] samples for the following:
a.
Handrail – 6 lineal inch length of proposed handrail
b.
Decking – 6 inch square sample of proposed decking material
c.
Skirting – 6 inch square sample of proposed skirting material
d.
Floor Plate – 6 inch square sample of proposed floor plate
material
Samples shall be clearly labeled to reflect:
a.
Project Name
b.
Contract Number
c.
Description of Sample
G.
Maintenance programs: within sixty (60) days after notice to proceed, and prior to
installation, Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall submit detailed
interim and revenue service maintenance programs, showing functions to be
performed and their scheduled frequency.
H.
Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Prior to installation, Vertical Transportation
Equipment Supplier shall submit seven (7) complete sets of operation and
maintenance manuals for approval. After LAWA approval and prior to the
beginning of acceptance testing, twelve (12) sets of the approved manuals shall
be provided by the Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier. The manuals
shall include the following:
1.
Complete table of contents.
2.
Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of
equipment, including disassembly and assembly of drive system, handrail
drive assembly, and track system. Included will be complete illustrated,
exploded views of all assemblies, and a complete, illustrated, exploded
view for identifying all system parts.
3.
Complete nomenclature of replaceable parts, part numbers, current cost,
and warehouse location. If product source is another vendor, Vertical
Transportation Equipment Supplier shall include name and address of
other vendor.
14310 - 13
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
I.
4.
Sample copies of a proposed preventive maintenance chart.
5.
Descriptions of safety devices.
6.
Safety rules, tests, and procedures, including testing of all systems and
subsystems.
7.
Procedures for adjusting brake, handrail tension, handrail chain drive
tension, step chain tension, track system, and mechanical components,
including pictorials.
8.
Instructions for removing floor plate, replacing comb segments, and
removing and installing steps, and interior panels.
9.
Troubleshooting techniques.
10.
Detailed lubrication and cleaning schedule indicating weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual lubrication; and a description of each
lubrication point, lubrication type, and specification.
11.
Control and schematic electrical wiring diagrams of controller, including
wiring of safety devices to connections with remote indication and control
panels for each escalator and group of escalators. Complete I/O list shall
also be provided.
12.
Electrical layout showing placement of lighting, light switches,
receptacles, light fixtures, disconnect switches, and convenience outlets
in remote controller room, truss envelope, and pits.
13.
Complete detailed drawings and wiring diagram of escalator fault-finding
device and connection to annunciator panel.
14.
As built drawings for final escalator installation, controller and truss wiring.
Also provide As built drawings in electronic format in AutoCad 2008 or
other electronic format required by LAWA.
Certification
1.
The Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall be required to
provide certification, in writing and signed by an officer of the
organization, that LAWA of the escalator(s) shall be provided with copies
of any and all information, correspondence, bulletins, newsletters,
manuals, techniques, procedures, drawings, sketches and any other
documents related to maintenance, safety, operations, design changes,
modifications, retrofits, etc., which relate to any part, component,
equipment, system, subsystem, or material and services applicable to the
escalator provided.
2.
All of the above referenced shall be provided as it pertains to the original
installation and for a period of ten (10) years after final acceptance of the
last escalator provided under any contract.
3.
The referenced material shall be provided within thirty (30) days of
publication or internal distribution by the Vertical Transportation
Equipment Supplier. The material, even if labeled PROPRIETARY, shall
be delivered to the Engineer without prejudice or delay and at no
additional cost.
14310 - 14
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
4.
J.
1.11
The entire manual shall be also provided in an electronic format on CDROM that is acceptable to LAWA.
Quality Assurance/Control Submittals
1.
Design Data reflecting compliance with referenced Codes and Standards
along with the custom requirements of this specification shall be
submitted.
2.
Engineering Calculations
a
Motor Sizing Calculations
b
Truss Deflection Calculations
c
Step Chain Tensile Stress Calculations, including factor of safety
d
Step Chain Pin Pressure Calculations
e
Truss Support Point Reactions
3.
Test Reports
a
Step Fatigue Test certificates
4.
Certificates
a
Welding certifications to AWS D1.1
b
Step Chain Certificate of Breaking Strength
5.
Manufacturers Instructions and Field Reports
6.
Senate Bill 1886 Submittals: Provide copies of all Code Authority/permit
submittals to LAWA.
INSTALLATION CONTRACT ACCEPTANCE, WARRANTY, INTERIM SERVICE
AGREEMENT AND SERVICE AGREEMENT
A.
Warranty:
The Contractor shall warrant in writing that all equipment manufactured and
installed under this Contract be free of defects in design, materials, and
workmanship, under normal use and service (“Warranty”) for a period of twelve
(12) months (“Warranty Period”) from Milestone No. 2 for each Group of units
(per Section 01310 and General Provisions, Section 10). Defects in design,
materials, and workmanship shall be repaired or replaced with all materials and
labor at no additional cost to LAWA (“Warranty Work”). (Defects shall include,
but not be limited to, noisy, rough, or substandard operation; failures; loose,
damaged, and missing parts; and fluid leaks.)
B.
In addition to the Warranty:
1.
Contractor shall provide, concurrently with each Warranty Period, a 1Year Preventative Maintenance (“PM”) service for all units;
2. Immediately upon conclusion of each PM Period, and continuing until one
year after the Contract Completion Date, the Contractor shall provide
Interim Extended Preventative and Routine Maintenance Service
(“Interim”) for all units. The Interim Extended Preventative and Routine
Maintenance Service Period shall continue until it is replaced by the 5-
14310 - 15
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
Year Extended
Agreement; and
C.
Preventative
and
Routine
Maintenance
Service
3.
Beginning one year after the Contract Completion Date, the Contractor
shall provide a 5-Year Extended Preventative and Routine Maintenance
Service Agreement (“SA”), per Exhibit A, for all units installed in this
Contract. 4.
The 5-year SA period shall be executed in strict compliance with all of the
terms and conditions set forth in Exhibit A (“Exhibit A”). Upon conclusion
of the SA, the parties may mutually agree to extend the SA for an
additional sixty (60) months, via a renewable option (“Option”).
The Contract/Warranty, PM, Interim and SA services shall include all services
necessary to maintain the equipment in proper working order for use at a major
international airport including, but not limited to.
1.
2.
“Tasks”:
a.
Inspection of completed installation and periodic testing to maintain
escalators in completely operable, like new condition.
b.
Provide preventative maintenance on escalators for a minimum of
four (4) hours each two weeks (Total On-Site Time). Provide monthly
documentation of the same to LAWA.
c.
Periodic lubrication of parts and equipment components as per
OEM’s recommendation. Charts are to be provided for each
escalator indicating when services are provided.
d.
Perform work without removing escalators from service during peak
traffic periods determined by LAWA as 7:00 a.m. to 10:30 p.m. daily.
e.
Provide twenty (24) hour emergency service during the maintenance
period consisting of a prompt response (within 30 minutes) to
emergency request by telephone or otherwise from LAWA or
designated representative if an escalator is inoperable or in case of
injury, entrapment, or potential injury to persons.
f.
Unlimited regular time callbacks are included with a required
response time of one (1) hour. Regular time will be Monday through
Friday, 8:00am to 4:30pm, exclusive of holidays. Overtime\Premium
time call backs originating from an operational error related to the
performance requirements of the equipment shall be borne by the
Contractor
g.
Annual clean down of the escalators, drip pans, pits, pallets, and all
interior parts is required. Make necessary arrangements with LAWA
in order to minimize any inconvenience.
h.
All other services as required by Exhibit A.
“Reporting”: Detailed monthly records of tasks performed including names
of individuals performing the tasks, date and time performed, and other
pertinent data in conformance with Exhibit A.
14310 - 16
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
D.
1.12
1.13
EXTENDED PREVENTATIVE AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE SERVICE
AGREEMENT
A
The Contractor shall perform the SA (including all tasks listed herein and in
Exhibit A) for a period of sixty (60) months from the date of Group 10 Escalator
Warranty expiration, or one year after the Contract Completion Date, whichever
is later. A Faithful Performance Bond and a Payment Bond (“SA Bonds”), each
for 100% of the contract price for the SA (as set forth in Line Item Number 2 of
the Contractor’s Schedule of Work and Prices) shall be submitted for LAWA
approval no less than 30 days prior to Contract Completion Date. The SA Bonds
shall be submitted to the City Attorney for approval as to form
B
Optional Second 5-year SA: No less than six (6) months prior to the conclusion
of the 60 month SA, the parties may mutually agree to extend the SA (“Extended
SA”) for a single, additional 60 month period at a cost no greater than 9% more
than the amount of the initial SA. Should the parties mutually agree, a Faithful
Performance Bond and a Payment Bond, each for 100% of the contract price for
the Extended SA shall be submitted for LAWA approval no less than one (1)
month prior to the conclusion of the initial 60 month SA.
C
All Contract Provisions, Appendices and Addenda, as well as the Conditions of
Exhibit A shall govern the SA and the Extended SA.
GUARANTEES
A.
1.14
Contractor’s performance of the Tasks and Reporting (as defined in Section
1.11-C) shall conform to the highest professional standards for said activities in
the State of California.
Notwithstanding the Specifications forming a part of this Contract, any inspection
or approval of the Work by LAWA, or the existence of any patent or trade name,
the Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier nevertheless unconditionally
guarantees that the equipment furnished and installed hereunder shall be of the
best quality, shall be fully fit for the purpose for which it is intended, and shall be
of the heavy duty transit type in compliance with APTA guidelines and
augmented per these contract documents.
LAWA INSTRUCTION / DEMONSTRATION AND COORDINATION
A.
The Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall provide eight (8) hours of
off-site demonstration and instructions to a total of six (6) LAWA and/or existing
service personnel upon completion of the escalator installation. Instructions are
to include safety procedures, proper operation of all equipment, and routine
maintenance procedures. All instructions and demonstrations are to be video
recorded and remain the property of LAWA. All costs associated with this off-site
14310 - 17
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
training shall be the responsibility of the Vertical Transportation Equipment
Supplier.
B.
PART 2
2.01
Check operation of all the escalators with LAWA’s personnel or designated
representative present not more than one month before end of warranty period.
Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.
PRODUCTS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall furnish and install heavy-duty
escalators that shall comply with the requirements of these contract documents.
B.
All escalators supplied under this contract shall be the product of a single
manufacturer.
C.
Escalators shall comply with the following Basis of Design requirements:
1.
Vertical Rise: Shown on contract drawings
2.
Inclination: 30 degrees
3.
Nominal Step Width: 40 inches (to replace existing 40 inch step
escalators) or 32 inches (800mm) (to replace existing 32 inch escalators
and 24 inch step escalators, if possible based on site conditions)
4.
Speed: not to exceed 100 FPM
5.
Number of Flat Steps:
a.
Rises at or under 15’-0”: 2 top, 2 bottom
b.
Rises over 15’-0”: 3 top, 3 bottom
6.
Minimum Transition Radii:
a.
Upper Landing: 2.6m (8’-6”)
b.
Lower Landing: 2.0m (6’-6 ¾”)
7.
Head Dimensions: As required to fit modified structures.
8.
Static Brake Load: The load per step the total number of exposed steps
on the incline:
a.
1000mm step: 306 kg (674lbs)
b.
800mm step: 245kg (540lbs)
9.
Dynamic Brake Load: The load per step running in down direction on
exposed steps on the incline:
a.
1000mm step: 145 kg (320lbs)
b.
800mm step: 116 kg (256lbs)
10.
Motor Duty Load: Continuous operations with a minimum step load per
step (on incline only) as follows:
a.
1000mm step: 145 kg (320lbs)
b.
800mm step: 116 kg (256lbs)
14310 - 18
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
11.
Step Chain Load: is to be based on the step loads as follows:
a.
b.
D.
1000mm step:145 kg (320lbs)
800mm step: 116 kg (256lbs)
Controls and Safety Devices
1.
Operating Controls:
a.
Escalators shall have key operated switches, accessible at both
upper and lower landings, located on the exterior deck above the
newel base. Operating controls for glass balustrade escalators
may be mounted on posts in lieu of lower exterior decking subject
to full conformance with governing Codes and acceptance of
submitted designs from the supplier by the Engineer.
b.
Each keyed switch shall be clearly and permanently labeled,
including starting and direction selection.
c.
Interlocks shall be provided to bring the escalator to a smooth
stop, in either direction of travel, before a change of direction may
be made.
2.
Safety Devices:
a.
Safety devices required by ANSI/ASME A17.1 - 2004 shall be
provided on each escalator.
b.
Safety devices shall be mounted in locations accessible for
maintenance within escalators, and these devices shall be
designed for ease of adjustment or reset. Devices shall be
located so that operation is not affected by direct moisture and
debris.
c.
If escalators are equipped with braking system dependent upon
activation of springs, then springs shall be of guidance
compression type. The use of weights or self-excitation of the
brake release shall not be allowed.
d.
Disconnect switches capable of being locked in the "off" position
shall be provided in both escalator pits, and at the drive of each
escalator to prevent the starting of escalator from any other
location.
e.
Comb plate switches that detect the vertical tripping force shall be
independent of the switches that detect the horizontal tripping
force.
f.
A disconnect switch shall be provided in the top and bottom
escalator pits which will, when used, stop the escalator or prevent
starting.
g.
Deteriorated and Missing Roller Detector: Provide a device for
detecting deteriorated and/or missing step and axle rollers on the
left and right sides while the escalator is running with or without
passengers or load. The roller detector shall be integrated into the
safety circuit. The device shall be manually reset.
h.
In addition, a fault-finding device (diagnostic equipment) shall be
provided, capable of producing indications of the following data:
1.)
Date, time, and cause of all escalator stoppages and
failures.
14310 - 19
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
2.)
3.)
E.
F.
A monitoring of drive motor temperature.
Have a digital readout visible at the key start switch area.
Operating Controls / Emergency Stop Button:
1.
Provide vandal resistant device(s) manufactured by PTL or approved
equal.
2.
Operating switches shall comply with Paragraph 2.01.D.1.
3.
One (1) vandal resistant emergency stop button shall be located at each
landing, accessible on the exterior deck cover for solid balustrade
escalators and mounted in the upper newel quadrant or in a pedestal for
glass balustrade escalators.
Balustrades, Skirt Panels, and Decking
1,
Solid Balustrades for High Deck Escalators shall comply with the
following: Balustrade panels shall be a minimum of 3mm solid type 316
Stainless Steel. Backing panels, where used, shall be noncombustible,
and subject to approval by the Engineer. Stiffeners, brackets, attachment
angles and other concealed ferrous metal framework shall be galvanized
or constructed of equivalent, corrosion-resistant materials for exterior
units.
2.
Glass Balustrades for Low Deck Escalators shall comply with the
following:
Constructed of 3/8” (10 mm) minimum clear tempered safety
glass.
3.
Skirt panels with rounded joints shall be of type 316 Stainless Steel, solid
construction, and shall be in conformance with A-17.1 Code. There shall
be no laminations nor square joints allowed.
4.
Provide Recessed type Skirt Brushes along both sides of the skirt panel.
Skirt brush must be installed at least one (1) inch above the nose of the
step line. Brush material is to be flame retardant. Skirt brushes shall
incorporate two (2) rows of bristles and intermediate sections shall be
capable of being removed independently of the rest of the brush
installation for access to motors or other sections of the truss interior.
5.
Panels on exterior escalators shall have edges sealed against moisture.
6.
Panels shall be constructed, when practical, in equal lengths for
interchangeability.
7.
Panels shall be attached to permit easy removal for inspection,
lubrication, and adjustment of safety devices.
8.
Panels shall be sized so that not more than two (2) persons shall be
required to remove a panel, and without the aid of special handling
equipment.
14310 - 20
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
G.
H.
9.
Panel fastener requirements: Panels shall be fastened to their respective
supports or mating portions with tamper-proof, flathead machine screws.
10.
When framework to which panels are fastened is less than one-quarter
(1/4) of an inch thick, steel backup plates with a minimum one-quarter
(1/4) of an inch thickness shall be added which have tapped holes or
clearance holes where necessary.
Decking and Cladding:
1.
Shall be type 316 stainless steel, identical to balustrade, with minimum of
2mm thickness.
2.
Decking between escalators shall be designed to support a live load of
one hundred and seventy-five (175) pounds per square foot, without
surface deflection.
3.
Paneling, decking, and other enclosures shall be supported on steel
framework. (galvanized framework shall be provided for exterior units.)
4.
All decking is to be extended to finish walls and in one-piece widths.
5.
All decking and cladding is to be provided with no exposed fasteners.
Submit drawings for approval by the Engineer.
6.
All stainless steel cladding shall be supplied and installed as part of this
contract. All stainless steel cladding shall be 2mm thick with sound
deadening backing. Detail drawings shall be submitted indicating
fastening locations to accommodate the cladding. All connection points
shall allow the attachment of cladding without the need of additional
fastening brackets. All installations shall be free of loose, sharp, or
protruding edges. Stainless steel cladding shall have a #4 directional
finish. Cladding locations on the new escalators shall match those of the
existing units.
Escalator Lighting Fixtures:
1.
Step demarcation lights (located below steps at both landings) shall be
provided in accordance with code requirements. Each landing shall have
a minimum of three (3) lighting elements, (and be either NEMA 4 rated of
IP 56 rated for exterior escalators in accordance with local electrical code
requirements.)
2.
Combplate lighting fixtures shall be provided by LED type fixtures (and be
either NEMA 4 rated or IP 56 rated for exterior escalators, labeled in
accordance with local electrical code requirements.)
3.
Contractor shall furnish and install all maintenance lighting with quick start
type PL compact fluorescent lamps as required for complete illumination
of working spaces and specified areas within the interior of the escalator
and its immediate surroundings. Upper and lower pits shall have internal
lighting of 15-foot candles as a minimum. A main light switch shall be
14310 - 21
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
located at the entry to each wellway and/or pit. Vertical Transportation
Equipment Supplier shall coordinate location with the Engineer and
LAWA.
I.
4.
Solid Balustrade / High Deck Escalators shall be provided with skirt band
lighting that shall be of the LED type.
5.
Glass Balustrade / Low Deck Escalators shall be provided with under
handrail lighting that shall be of the LED type.
Electrical Equipment
1.
J.
Motors
a.
The driving motors shall be A.C. induction motors with solid-state
starters. Voltage-480 V.A.C., 3 phase, Frequency - 60 Hertz.
b.
The motors shall be totally enclosed with external cooling fins.
c.
The motor protection class shall be equivalent to IP 55 Insulation
group: F or higher.
d.
Driving motors and motor switchgear shall provide a smooth start.
e.
The motor shall be designed for operation(s) under a load as
follows:
1.)
1000mm wide step: 145kg per step on the incline
2.)
800m wide step: 116kg per step on the incline
Escalator Control System: Escalator controller shall be located in a remote
controller room. Location of the remote controller room shall be coordinated with
LAWA and the Engineer.
1.
The escalator control equipment shall contain diagnostic capabilities as
required for the ease of complete maintenance. The diagnostic system
shall be an integral part of the controller and provide user-friendly
interaction between the service person and the controls. All such
systems shall be free from decaying circuits that must be periodically
reprogrammed by the manufacturer.
2.
Controllers for exterior escalators shall be mounted in NEMA 4X cabinets
with labeled terminal strips. NEMA 2 cabinets with labeled terminal strips
shall be provided for interior units.
3.
The main controller shall be a non-proprietary programmable automation
controller (PAC) based on a SCADA compliant Allen Bradley
CompactLogixTM 1769-L32E, or equal, to control and monitor the status of
the escalator. The PAC shall be designed to communicate in TCP/IP
format over an Ethernet or approved equal.
4.
The PAC racks shall provide space for two (2) future single slot modules.
5.
The PAC shall store the last 99 faults, accessible via laptop connection,
panel view or remote communications.
6.
Provide a copy of all working programs on approved computer medium as
well as a printed program listing.
14310 - 22
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
K.
L.
7.
The Programmable Controller shall have one dedicated serial port, which
supports RS-232-C signals. It shall be accessible in ladder logic and
provide support for Point to Point and Slave SCADA communication
protocol systems. Alternatively, it must be usable for programming
purposes or for access to remote programmers via modems.
8.
Controller shall include soft start system to manage escalator drive
startup. Soft start system shall be solid state and shall include provisions
for adjustment of starting ramp rate.
Solid State Reduced Voltage Starter
1.
The solid state reduced voltage shall provide microprocessor controlled
starting for standard three-phase squirrel cage induction motors. The
following features shall be built in the controller Motor Protection,
Metering, Scan-port communication, LCD Display, Keypad programming,
three-programmable auxiliary contacts. The controller shall connect to the
PAC via DeviceNet networking.
2.
Power Monitoring parameters include:
a.
Three-Phase current
b.
Three-Phase voltage
c.
Power in kW
d.
Power usage in kWh
e.
Power factor
f.
Motor thermal capacity usage
g.
Elapse time
h.
A serial interface port is provided as standard.
Maintenance Receptacles
1.
M.
Electric power receptacles shall be furnished and installed in the upper
and lower pits by the General Contractor. Each receptacle shall be of the
duplex-type, waterproof (for exterior escalators), GFI grounded, and rated
for one hundred and twenty (120) volts at twenty (20) amperes. The
receptacles in the pits will be surface-mounted on the walls, not less than
thirty (30) inches from the floor. Vertical Transportation Equipment
Supplier shall coordinate location with the Engineer and LAWA.
Maintenance Drive Unit
1.
The included variable frequency drive (VFD) shall provide a means for
reduced speed maintenance operation that shall be controlled by a
manual handset. When operated, the escalator shall run in the direction
selected, at a speed of not more than 25% of rated speed. This speed
shall be maintained when steps are removed for servicing. Escalator
operation shall be continuous so long as an up or down button on the
handset is being pressed. The handset shall have a ten (10) foot
retractable cord with a plug connector. When plugged into receptacle,
there shall be no means of operating or running the escalator except by
14310 - 23
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
the service handset. Receptacles shall be located in both the upper and
lower pits. Receptacles for exterior escalators shall be NEMA 4 rated.
This system must be sized for full operation of the motor at all speeds.
N.
O.
2.02
Sleep Mode Operation shall comply with the following:
1.
The acceleration and deceleration rates of the escalators shall not exceed
1/0 ft/sec2 (0.3 m/s2)
2.
The rated speed is not exceeded.
3.
The minimum speed of escalators shall not be less than 10 ft/min (0.5
m/s).
4.
The speed of the escalator shall not automatically vary during inspection
operation mode.
5.
Passenger detection means shall be provided at both landings of the
escalator such that:
a.
Detection of any approaching passenger shall cause the escalator
to accelerate to, or maintain the, full escalator speed in
compliance with paragraphs 1 thru 4 above.
b.
Detection of any approaching passenger shall occur sufficiently in
advance of boarding to cause the escalator to attain full operation
speed before a passenger walking at a typical speed of 270 fpm
(1.35 m/s) reaches the comb plate.
c.
Passenger detection means shall remain active at the egress
landing to detect any passenger approaching against the direction
of escalator travel and shall cause the escalator to accelerate to
full rated speed and sound an alarm bell at the approaching
landing before the passenger reaches the comb plate.
d.
Redundant sensors below each handrail return are provided.
Passenger Detection Means
1.
Escalators shall be provided with four sets of angled infrared photoelectric
proximity detectors install per Paragraph N. They shall be installed in the
lower newel cladding at both ends of the escalator in the vicinity of the
handrail entry points. They shall be Telco Sensors LT transmitters and
LR receivers, Series 110 with stainless steel housings, or approved
equal. Each escalator end shall be provided with 2-channel multiplexed
photoelectric amplifiers, Telco Sensors model PAB20, or approved equal.
2.
Means shall be provided to detect failure of the passenger detection
means and shall cause the escalator to operate at full rated speed only.
MATERIALS
A.
Stainless Steel
1.
Shapes and Bars: ASTM A-276, type 316, A-554 for tubes.
2.
Plate, Sheet, and Strip
14310 - 24
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
a.
b.
B
2.03
Over one-eighth (1/8) of an inch: ASTM A264 with ASTM 240.
Type 316 on A36 base.
Under one-eighth (1/8) of an inch: ASTM 167, Type 316.
Fasteners
1.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall provide nuts, bolts,
washers, screws, and other fastenings necessary for proper erection and
assembly of work.
2.
Fasteners shall be compatible with materials being fastened. Fasteners
shall be furnished with self-locking nuts or retaining rings (spring washers,
toothed disks).
3.
Fasteners shall be equal to or of greater corrosion resistance than the
most corrosion resistant metals being fastened.
FINISHES
A.
Stainless Steel: Directional # 4 finish ASTM A-480.
B.
Aluminum Castings and Extrusions: Commercial mill finish.
C.
Galvanizing
1.
2.
Sheet Steel: ASTM A446, or A526, as applicable. Coating designation
G185.
Other galvanizing: ASTM A123, ASTM A153, ASTM 385, or ASTM 386,
as applicable.
D.
Galvanizing Touch-up: Zinc dust coating, MIL-P-21035 or MIL-P-26915.
E.
Paint and Corrosion Protection: Each escalator shall have the following
minimum corrosion protection:
1.
After welding, the truss shall be hot-dipped galvanized with a coating in
accordance with ASTM A90. A 100% zinc thermal spray coating to
ASNI/AWS C.18-93 is an acceptable alternative. (Exterior Escalators
only)
2.
Cast metal parts such as gear housings, chain sprockets and return
station half circles, shall be painted with a rust-inhibitive primer, zinc
chromate coat after preparation by sandblasting.
3.
Steel parts which are not specified to be galvanized shall be painted as
follows:
a.
Primer coat - two (2) mil (dry film thickness), minimum thickness.
b.
Second finish coat - two (2) mil (dry film thickness), minimum
thickness.
4.
Bright or uncoated axles, shafts, etc. shall be protected by zinc chromate,
or chrome plating.
14310 - 25
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
2.04
5.
Oil collector chutes and collection trays shall be fabricated of galvanized
steel.
6.
All shims shall be manufactured from stainless steel.
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
A.
B.
Tracks
1.
Design and fabrication of tracks shall retain steps and running gear safely
under load requirements and at the highest design speeds specified.
2.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall assemble and secure
sections of track together for easy removal and replacement of defective
sections. The system shall be adjustable, and welding of the tracks is not
acceptable.
3.
Design of the mechanical components shall provide for easy installation
and removal without the dismantling of parts of the structure.
4.
Track joints shall be smooth and free of burs and sharp edges.
5.
Tracks shall be properly supported on trusses to provide correct
alignment and smooth transition to return stations. The rolling surface of
the track shall be a minimum thickness of 3mm.
6.
The track radius shall be determined in conformance with these
specifications and the following constraints:
7.
The requirement for requisite number of flat steps shall be met.
8.
Track loading and wheel size shall be such that interaction force between
each wheel and track shall permit escalator to meet requirements
specified.
9.
The guiding system for the step chains and step wheels shall be of zinc
plated or galvanized steel profiles with smooth and even running
surfaces, and with the joints cut diagonally to the running direction. The
guide profiles shall not be welded together at the joints.
10.
A second, continuous guiding profile shall be provided above the step
chain rollers so that the step chains are positively guided in the area of
the escalator open to passengers
11.
Transition radii shall be based on 2.6m for the upper landing and 2.0m for
the lower landing for steps on the passenger side of the escalator.
12.
Systems including step chain rollers outside the step chain links and
relying on stress relieving curves through the transitions shall include
stress reliving curves on both the passenger and return sides of the track
system at the transition curves.
Steps
14310 - 26
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
1.
The entire step assembly shall be treated with not less than one (1) coat
of zinc chromate primer or iron phosphate and one (1) coat of powder
coated enamel for corrosion-resistance.
2.
Steps and their various attachments shall permit removal of steps without
disturbing balustrades.
3.
Sound deadening shall be applied to the underside of the steps.
4.
Step rollers shall have polyurethane tires on hubs, sealed roller bearings,
and diameter of no less than four (4) inches. Step rollers shall not require
any additional lubrication and must be rated for severe, heavy-duty
service.
5.
Steps shall be constructed so as to be driven by step linkages to step
rollers.
6.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall provide washers and
nuts as follows:
a.
Tap bolts: Lock washers
b.
Through bolts: Lock nuts or Engineer approved equal.
Rated Loads:
a.
In addition to the minimum requirements given in the Codes,
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall design the Steps
for a minimum load of three hundred and twenty (320) lbs. (145
Kg) per forty (40) inch step or two hundred and fifty six (256) lbs
(116 Kg) per thirty two (32) inch step with a safety factor of eight
(8).
b.
The steps shall carry the load under maximum concentric and
eccentric loading conditions without distortion.
7.
C.
Step Chain
1.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall provide endless, rollertype step chains; one (1) on each side of step.
2.
Step chains shall be of heat-treated steel construction, supported at
intervals by linkage wheels.
3.
A means to prevent steps from coming into physical contact with each
other and to prevent chains from sagging or buckling shall be provided.
4.
A means to maintain constant distance between step axles shall be
provided.
5.
An automatic tensioning device to maintain tension under load and to
compensate for wear shall be provided. The device shall be located
within the truss at the lower end.
6.
A means for individual fine adjustment of tension for each linkage shall be
provided.
7.
Step chains shall be constructed to permit removal of segments as may
be required for replacement purposes at a minimum of every 6 axle
section. Each escalator shall have at least two one axle sections.
14310 - 27
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
D.
E.
8.
Support wheels spaced to distribute load and to guide linkage throughout
run shall be provided. Rollers shall be constructed of polyurethane
material, with diameter sufficient to provide reliability, maintainability,
smoothness of motion, and to operate within noise level requirements
specified. The chain rollers shall have polyurethane tires on metallic
hubs, sealed bearings, a diameter of not less than four (4) inches, must
require no additional lubrication, and be mounted outside the chain link.
9.
Wheels shall be affixed to permit rapid replacement.
10.
Each pair of step chains shall be a matched set within manufacturing
tolerances. Only precision, roller-fishplate chains of high-grade, heattreated steel shall be used as step chains. The pins, axles, bushing, and
rollers shall be hardened and ground.
11.
Step chain and chain pins shall have a minimum diameter of at least fiveeighths (5/8) of an inch. In addition, the diameter will be of a size so that
surface pressure at engaging points will not exceed 30N/mm2 (3,450 psi).
This is to be based on the step loads as follows:
a.
1000mm wide step: 145Kg (320 lbs.) per step on the incline.
b.
800mm side step: 116Kg (256 lbs.) per step on the incline.
12.
The safety factor shall be 6.
13.
A test certificate for the chain-breaking load shall be provided.
14.
A shielding device shall be provided to protect chain, track guides, and
rollers against water, dirt, and debris.
Floor Plates
1.
Shall have type 316 stainless steel frames at floor openings, designed to
be supported on truss heads.
2.
Shall be designed to cover entire area of upper and lower landings.
3.
Shall be reinforced, as necessary, to be rigid and able to withstand a live
load of two hundred and fifty (250) pounds per square foot with minimal
deflection.
4.
Shall be extruded aluminum in a ribbed pattern transverse to the
escalator axis. Ribs shall be designed to provide maximum traction, and
will be finished in the same manner as the comb plates.
5.
Shall be lightweight and removable for ease of access to machinery and
maintenance areas; must be fabricated in sections of a size and weight
less than allowed by applicable codes. Fastening system shall be an
integral part of the floor plate design and shall not require special tools for
removal.
Drive Machinery
14310 - 28
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
F.
1.
Motor and drive mechanism shall be mounted within the truss envelope at
the upper end. Shafts shall be designed for ease of assembly or
disassembly using square keyways of proper sizing.
2.
Gear Box Requirements:
a.
Gear bearings shall be rated with an AFBMA L10 life of 200,000
hours and housed in an oil-tight, dust-proof case provided with a
sight glass or dipstick method of determining oil level in the case.
The case shall provide a convenient method of draining the oil.
b.
Lubricant compartment shall contain lubricant heaters for exterior
installations unless synthetic lubricants, subject to Engineer’s
approval, are used.
c.
The assembly shall have no openings in order to minimize
accumulation of dust and debris.
d.
Rotating parts shall be provided with a means for lubrication and
retention of lubricants.
e.
Sealed bearings shall be used in those environmental conditions
where entry of water or dust may adversely affect bearing
performance.
f.
Exposed, moving, drive elements shall be protected by sealed
metal housings, which shall provide continuous lubrication to
components.
g.
Provide a low oil sensor to prohibit starting of the escalator on
automatic operation with low oil in the gear case.
3.
V-belt and tooth belt drives shall not be considered acceptable. If chain
drives are used, they shall be protected against dirt and water by sealed
housings (for exterior escalators) or protective cover (for interior
escalators), and shall have an automatic lubricating device and a means
of taking up any slack in the chain.
4.
Main drive bearings shall be rated for AFBMA L10, 200,000 hours.
Drip Pans
1.
Galvanized, 3 mm steel, watertight drip pans for the entire length and
width of trusses shall be provided. Drip pans shall be of sufficient
strength to support a concentrated weight of five hundred (500) pounds at
any place in the drip pan. They shall also be sloped for proper drainage
and collection of spent lubricants as well as any moisture or water which
may enter the escalator. They shall be constructed to prevent oil from
leaking below the truss.
2.
Oil water separators shall be provided on the exterior escalators.
3.
Drip pans of sufficient size to collect and maintain, within truss areas, oil
and grease drippings from step linkage and all forms of loose debris that
may be deposited in drip pans from steps at turn-around points at upper
and lower portions of truss shall be provided. This system shall be
separate from the water drain in order to prevent the discharge of spent
lubricants.
14310 - 29
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
4.
G.
Access to drip pans at lower landings of escalators for the purpose of
cleaning drain catch basins shall be provided.
Handrails
1.
General
a.
Handrails shall receive their motion from main escalator drive
through direct gearings and drive shaft or drive chains, so that
handrail and steps operate at the same speed in each direction of
travel. Driving and guiding wheels for solid balustrade escalators
shall have a groove to accept the wedge on the underside of the
handrail.
b.
A means to take up handrail slack using a tensioning device,
where required, shall be located within escalators. In addition, an
approved method of releasing the device for repair or removal of
handrails shall be provided.
c.
Newels meeting the following requirements shall be provided:
1.)
Newels shall be designed and constructed so that handrail
shall return into newel end at a point inconspicuous and
difficult for passengers to reach.
2.)
Newel sheaves shall be provided at upper and lower
newels and shall be of cast metal construction. Newel
sheaves are not required for the glass balustrade
escalators.
2.
Handrails, handrail drive system, and guides shall be so designed and
installed that handrail cannot be thrown off or disengaged while running,
and special design attention shall be given to area where handrail passes
from drive system to guides.
3.
Handrail rollers shall have sealed bearings rated at AFBMA L10, 100,000
hours and have provision for retention of lubricant to ensure satisfactory
lubrication and operation. Additional lubrication shall not be required.
4.
Friction drive sheaves and idlers shall be designed and positioned so that
lubricant cannot reach surface of handrail. Marking and spotting of
handrail by drive equipment shall not be permitted. Provide sealed
bearings rated at AFBMA L10, 100,000 hours.
5.
Handrails shall be constructed of laminated, steel, wire mesh, or steel
cable reinforced, flexible elastomer material vulcanized into an integral,
seamless, smooth handrail resistant to environmental conditions. A Vshaped underside design shall be used for solid balustrade escalators.
Flat handrails are permitted for use for glass balustrade escalators which
do not utilize newel sheaves.
6.
Handrail color shall be black.
7.
Handrail guides shall be continuous on exposed portion of handrails,
constructed of 316 stainless steel which shall not subject to corrosion nor
pitting, and shall have a polished or specially coated, permanent finish to
minimize frictional wear to under surface of handrail. On the unexposed
14310 - 30
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
portion, guiding shall be by adjustable rollers having sealed bearings, and
set in a way so as not to cause wear on the handrail.
H.
8.
Provide synthetic slider material.
9.
Handrail gearbox, if provided, shall have bearings rated at AFBMA L10,
200,000 hours.
Braking Requirements
1.
2.
I.
Motor Brake
a.
Brake shall be capable of stopping and holding a descending
escalator with a load on the exposed steps in the incline area of:
1)
1000mm wide step 145kg (320 lbs.) Per step
2)
800mm wide step
116kg (256 lbs.) Per step
b.
The brake coil shall be insulated to class F.
c.
A monitor shall be provided, and if brake lining becomes
insufficient for safe usage, restart of escalator shall be prevented.
Step Band Lock
a.
Shall be manually applied and mechanically engaged to prevent
movement of linkages, while escalator is disconnected from its
power supply.
b.
Electrical interlock that shall prevent escalator drive motors from
starting while step band lock is engaged shall be provided.
Trusses
1.
General
a.
Trusses shall be sufficient total length to provide minimum number
of flat steps required per code along with the transition radii
indicated in the contract documents. The truss shall span the
distance between the support points as indicated.
b.
Trusses shall be sufficient width to accommodate the width of the
finished escalator.
c.
Trusses shall be designed to rest on the top and bottom support
beams, and intermediate supports provided for each location.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall use 316 stainless
steel shims for installation with a maximum shim height of 2
inches.
d.
Trusses shall be of ample strength to maintain alignment of tracks
and moving parts, and so designed that they shall safely retain
steps and running gear, and in case of failure of track systems,
retain step mechanism within guides and envelope of the truss.
e.
The truss shall be designed to support the dead weight of the
escalator and a full passenger load.
f.
The deflection of the loaded truss shall not exceed one onethousandths (1/1000) of the free supporting distance of not less
than fifty (50) feet under full load.
g.
The slip joint slide bearings shall be fabricated using three thirtyseconds (3/32) of an inch thick glass filled TFE bearing surface,
14310 - 31
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
h.
J.
K.
one sliding on the other. The expansion joint filler shall be rubber
cork composition or neoprene strip.
After welding, the truss shall be hot dip galvanized with a coating
in accordance with ASTM A90. A 100% zinc thermal spray
coating to ANSI/AWS C.18-93 is an acceptable alernative. (For
Exterior Escalators only)
2.
Field Splices and Connections
a.
Field splices shall be rigid, non-deforming, and shall maintain
alignment.
b.
Holes for attaching balustrade securing brackets shall be
punched.
c.
Field modification shall not compromise the paint and corrosion
protection specified in the contract documents.
3.
Access Panels
a.
Access panels for access to escalator parts for inspection and
maintenance shall be provided.
4.
Intermediate Supports (where indicated on contract drawings and verified
by the Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier)
a.
Support shall be stub column and beam type bolted to wellway
structure. Stub columns may be welded or bolted to the truss.
b.
Support trusses using intermediate supports described above
shall be provided. No other attachments to structure shall be
permitted. Truss mounts, including bolts, angles, shims, bearing
pads, and spring supports, as required to align and install
escalators shall be provided.
5.
Provisions are to be made, if required, within the truss for attaching any
finish required to enclose the same.
Step Chain Tensioning Device
1.
An automatic tensioning device to maintain tension under load and to
compensate for wear shall be provided. The device shall be located
within the truss at the lower end.
2.
A means for individual fine adjustment of tension for each linkage shall be
provided.
3.
Bearings: if used, shall be rated: AFBMA L10, 200,000 hours.
Lubrication System Requirements
1.
Step Chain
a.
All parts, other than sealed items, requiring lubrication shall be designed
for an automatic or remote lubricating system. The system shall operate
only when escalator is running and the amount of lubrication shall be fully
adjustable. A reservoir with a low oil signal to the controller, and a
minimum capacity of six (6) liters shall be provided.
b.
System shall be positive acting, located in escalator pit.
14310 - 32
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
L.
c.
Reservoir level indications shall be provided where lubricants are
contained within housings, supply tanks and larger filler cups.
2.
Miscellaneous Lubrication
a.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall furnish and
mount near the lubricating system in the escalator pit, a framed
lubrication chart for each escalator. The chart shall show the
location of each lubrication point, type of lubricant to be used, and
the frequency of lubrication.
b.
Bearings
1.)
Sealed bearings shall be used where possible.
2.)
Bearings requiring manual lubrication shall be furnished
with fittings to accommodate the use of a pressure gun for
lubrication. Contractor shall furnish appropriate pressure
gun to LAWA.
3.)
Self-lubricating bearings or material other than ball or roller
type bearings may be used where practical.
3.
Manual Lubrication
a.
Location of manual lubrication points shall be easily accessible
and available.
Annunciator
1.
M.
PART 3
3.01
Escalators shall be provided at both ends with Adams “Escalator Voice”
model 205 with customizable message provisions, when indicated on the
plans.
Lock Cylinders
1.
All locks and keys shall be as per Engineer approval and shall
accommodate LAWA Standard cores.
2.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall verify with the Engineer
that the requirements for hardware have not been amended or
superseded.
3.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall provide the Engineer
with length, finish, and camming requirements of each cylinder required.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall install complete and operating
escalators in accordance with manufacturer's instruction and approved shop
drawings.
B.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall provide all special tools to
LAWA.
14310 - 33
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
3.02
FIELD TESTING
A.
B.
General: After installation, the Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall
inspect and test each escalator and related equipment to the Engineer and
LAWA’s satisfaction that operation of every part of the equipment complies with
this specification and with applicable requirements of ASME/ANSI A17.1
including sound level criteria specified herein. Escalators will be inspected in
accordance with the following:
1.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall notify the Engineer
seven (7) days prior to each separate scheduled test. Vertical
Transportation Equipment Supplier shall perform testing in the presence
of the Engineer. This test is in addition to those performed by The City of
Los Angeles Elevator Inspector.
2.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall notify the appropriate
local authorities having jurisdiction a minimum of seven (7) days in
advance of final acceptance tests.
3.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall provide all instruments,
materials, and labor required for tests specified herein.
Acceptance Testing Requirements
1.
Testing shall be performed in accordance with ASME A17.2.3 procedures
with the following additions or adaptations.
2.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall perform the following
tests on each escalator without load:
a.
Comb impact devices shall be tested and calibrated with an
appropriate scale at both ends of the escalator in both the
horizontal and vertical direction.
b.
Brakes: Measure deceleration rate with no load over 5
consecutive stops in the down direction using test equipment
designed to obtain this information.
c.
Escalator shall produce no noise louder than sixty-five (65)
decibels measured five (5) feet above the floor or stair level at the
entrance combs at both ends with the escalator operating
normally, either free running or under load. For multiple escalator
installations, the noise measurements at each group shall be
made with only the one (1) escalator unit under evaluation in
operation. Ambient noise level shall not exceed forty-nine (49)
decibels.
3.
Vertical Transportation Equipment Supplier shall perform the following
tests on each escalator under full load:
a.
Each escalator shall have a full field load as specified in 2.01 B
brake test performed on it. The stopping distance in the down
direction shall meet all requirements of ASME A17.1.
14310 - 34
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
ESCALATORS SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATIONS AT LOS ANGELES
INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
Los Angeles World Airports
b.
4.
Forty hour test: the escalator shall operate continuously for 40
consecutive hours after the acceptance test with no faults. If any
fault occurs that shuts the escalator down, the fault must be
corrected and a new 24 hour test will begin.
Re-Inspection: If any equipment is found to be damaged or defective, or if
the performance of the escalators does not conform to the requirements
of the contract specifications or the Safety Code, no approval or
acceptance of escalators shall be issued until all defects have been
corrected. When the repairs and adjustments have been completed and
the discrepancies corrected, the Engineer shall be notified and the
escalators will be reinspected. Rejected escalators shall not be used until
they have been reinspected and approved.
END OF SECTION
14310 - 35
HEAVY-DUTY TRANSIT
TYPE ESCALATORS
Guide Specification
SECTION 14 32 00 - MOVING WALKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes moving walks.
1.
B.
1.2
BMS components will be incorporated into the moving walk work. Coordinate with the
BMS component contractors to incorporate BMS components during the course of the
Work.
Single Subcontract Responsibilities: Refer to Section 14 20 00 Vertical Transportation, General
for the requirements of single subcontract responsibilities for moving walks.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Definitions in the latest version of ASME A17.1 apply to work of this Section.
B.
Defective Moving Walk Work: Operation or control system failure, including excessive
malfunctions; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or
aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; the need for excessive maintenance; abnormal
noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions.
C.
Reference to a device or a part of the equipment applies to the number of devices or parts
required to complete the installation.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Operational Requirements: The moving walk systems shall:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Be capable of operating under full load conditions, at full contract speed, in either
direction, and designed to operate quietly and smoothly without bounce.
Have a rated speed of 100 ft./min. (0.51 m/s) or the metric equivalent. The no load to full
load speed shall not vary more than 4% from the contract speed.
Hours of operation shall be considered as twenty-four (24) hours per day, seven (7) days
per week.
Handrail speed shall be consistent with pallet speed.
B.
Structural Performance of Balustrades: Per ASME A17.1-2004. Provide balustrades designed
to resist the simultaneous application of a static lateral force of 40 lbf/ft and a vertical load of 50
lbf/ft, both applied at the top of the handrail stand.
C.
Environmental Requirements: Moving walks shall be capable of operating with full-specified
performance capability while exposed to the design climatic and environmental conditions:
Climatic and environmental design conditions are available from the mechanical engineer.
MOVING WALKS
14 32 00 - 1
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Refer to Section 14 20 00, Vertical Transportation, General.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Refer to Section 14 20 00, Vertical Transportation, General.
C.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: Professional Engineer Qualifications: Refer to Section
14 20 00, Vertical Transportation, General.
D.
Standards: The following standards shall govern the moving walk work. Where standards
conflict, the standard with the more stringent requirements shall be applicable.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Moving Walk Code: In addition to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction,
comply with the latest edition of ASME A17.1, "Safety Code for Elevators and
Escalators", ASME A17.2 “Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators and Moving
Walks”, and ASME A17.5 “Requirements for Elevator and Escalator Electrical
Equipment”, including supplements, as published by the American Society of Mechanical
Engineers. Wherever “Code” is referred to in the moving walk specification, the ASME
A17.1 Code shall be implied.
Electrical Code: For electrical work included in the moving walk work, comply with the
National Electric Code (NFPA 70), ASME A17.5, all applicable local codes, and the
authorities having jurisdiction.
Welding: Comply with AWS standards.
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
Building Code of the City of Los Angeles and the following:
a.
b.
California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 8.
City of Los Angeles Elevator Code.
E.
Electrical Devices and Equipment: Refer to Section 14 20 00, Vertical Transportation, General.
F.
Manufacturer: Provide all moving walks components from a single source. Where equipment
or operation varies from those described, the manufacturer shall provide a complete description
of those variations as required under Section 14 20 00, VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION,
GENERAL, Article QUALITY ASSURANCE, paragraph 'Contractor Statement'.
G.
Testing and Inspections: Refer to Section 14 20 00, Vertical Transportation, General.
NOTE: The intent of this Guide Specification is to specify the robust equipment with the
maintainability features required by APTA. Compliance with other APTA Guideline
requirements that do not apply to escalators in an interior airport environment is not necessary.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Refer to Section 14 20 00, VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION, GENERAL.
MOVING WALKS
14 32 00 - 2
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
B.
Warranty and Maintenance Agreement: Warranties and maintenance agreements are required,
refer to Section 14 20 00, VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION, GENERAL and Exhibit A.
C.
Maintenance and Operating Manuals: Maintenance and operating manuals are required, refer to
Section 14 20 00, VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION, GENERAL.
D.
Shop Drawings: Submit complete information for all components for review prior to the
fabrication of the moving walk work. Items which shall be detailed shall include the following:
1.
Fully dimensioned layout for moving walks in plan, elevation, and section at a scale of
¼” = 1’-0”. Indicate component locations, structural supports, access spaces, and points
of entry. Indicate the interface of the moving walk work with adjacent work, including
but not limited to, the following:
a.
2.
Load assumptions for maximum loads imposed on trusses requiring load transfer to
building structural framing, individual weight of principal components and their dead and
live load reactions at points of support, electrical characteristics and connection
requirements, and any other information requested by the Architect.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Structural Calculations: Submit, for information only, copies of structural
calculations indicating load assumptions. Calculations shall be signed, and sealed
by the qualified Professional Engineer responsible for their preparation.
Pallet linkage details for material, configuration, arrangement, and lubrication
requirements.
Drive motor, controller, safety devices, and switches including brakes.
Complete layout of electrical system including motor, control panel; disconnect switches;
panelboards, truss lighting, light fixtures and light switches; receptacles; and safety,
surveillance and control devices.
Complete single line wiring diagrams of all circuits in the moving walk systems. Show
component location within each system, terminals with numbers, connection between
components, conductor identification, interface connections with remote surveillance and
control system, include an explanation of basic operation.
a.
E.
Finished flooring surrounding landing plates.
Provide a record set of drawings with all changes made during the installation of
the work. At the completion of the job, submit to the Owner for the Owner's use a
complete set of "AS INSTALLED" plans and wiring diagrams.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers design data, material specifications, installation
instructions, and other data pertinent to the components used in the moving walk work.
1.
Provide the Owner with special tools, solid state microprocessor tools, including
appropriate programs relative to the specific type of microprocessor or computer controls
installed on this project, necessary to trouble shoot, service, test and maintain the moving
walks. Special tools become the property of the Owner. Tools provided shall be useable
throughout the life of the equipment.
MOVING WALKS
14 32 00 - 3
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
a.
F.
Tools may be hand held or built into the control system and may be factory
programmed to operate only with this project’s equipment.
Samples: Submit samples as follows:
1.
For exposed finishes, 3-inch- (75-mm-) square samples of sheet materials, and 4-inch
(100-mm) lengths of running trim members. Acceptable low and high range of variation
in color and finish shall be governed by the control samples in the Architect's office.
G.
Certificates and Permits: Refer to Section 14 20 00, VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION,
GENERAL.
H.
Rigging: Installer shall submit a rigging plan for approval. Any use of existing building
structures shall be reviewed and approved by a structural engineer.
I.
Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Prior to completion of the installation, contractor shall
submit six complete sets of Operation and Maintenance manuals for approval. After LAWA
approval and prior to the beginning of acceptance testing, six (6) sets of the approved manuals
shall be provided by the Contractor. The manuals shall include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Complete table of contents.
Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of equipment, including
disassembly and assembly of drive system, handrail drive assembly, and track system.
Included will be complete and illustrated exploded views of all assemblies as well as a
complete and illustrated exploded view for identifying all system parts.
Complete nomenclature of replaceable parts, part numbers, current cost, and warehouse
location. If product source is another vendor, contractor shall include name and address
of the other vendor.
Sample copies of a preventive maintenance chart.
Descriptions of safety devices.
Safety rules, tests, and procedures, including testing of all systems and subsystems.
Procedures for adjusting brake, handrail tension, handrail chain drive tension, pallet chain
tension, track system, and mechanical components, including pictorials.
Instructions for removing floor plate, replacing comb segments, and removing and
installing pallets, and interior panels.
Troubleshooting techniques.
Detailed lubrication and cleaning schedule indicating weekly, monthly, quarterly,
semiannual, and annual lubrication; and a description of each lubrication point,
lubrication type, and specification.
Control and schematic electrical wiring diagrams of controller, including wiring of safety
devices to connections with remote indication and control panels for each moving walk
and group of moving walks.
Electrical layout showing placement of lighting, light switches, receptacles, light fixtures,
disconnect switches, and convenience outlets in machinery room, truss envelope, and
pits.
Complete detailed drawings and wiring diagram of moving walk fault finding device and
connection to annunciator panel.
MOVING WALKS
14 32 00 - 4
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
J.
Certification:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The moving walk manufacturer shall provide certification that the purchaser of the
moving walks shall be provided with copies of all documents related to maintenance,
safety, operations, design changes, modifications, retrofits, etc.; which relate to any part,
component, equipment, system subsystem, or material and services applicable to the
moving walk provided.
All of the above referenced shall be provided as it pertains to the original installation and
for a period of twenty (20) years after final acceptance of the last moving walk provided
under any contract.
The referenced material shall be provided within thirty days of publication or internal
distribution by the moving walk manufacturer. The material, even if labeled
PROPRIETARY, shall be delivered to the Authority without prejudice or delay and at no
additional cost.
Provide all material on CD-ROM in a format approved by the Authority.
K.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): MSDS and product data sheets shall be submitted with
an index listing each product, along with the application method of the product, approximate
quantity of product per moving walk, and the component the product is applied to or associated
with. The contractor shall allow six (6) weeks for review of MSDS.
L.
Spare parts and replacement parts list - Contractor shall maintain, at a minimum, a local on site
parts inventory for use solely on this Contract. Parts not listed below, including balustrades,
decks, skirt panels, handrails and signage shall be available via overnight air delivery.
Inventory shall include lubricants, light bulbs, etc. necessary to maintain equipment in original
operating condition. The parts listed below shall be made available for inspection by LAWA or
its designee. Part storage shall be as directed by LAWA.
1.
Parts required for equipment listed under Section 14 31 00: Parts inventory shall be
maintained throughout the Warranty Maintenance period and five year contract
maintenance period after which parts will become the property of LAWA.
a.
Moving Walks
5 Complete Pallets
10 each – Left, Right and Center Pallets
Treads Inserts
15 Comb plate Segments – each kind
17 Pallets Rollers and Flanges
7 Pallets Axel Sets
1 Matched Pair Pallets Chains (Longest
Unit)
2 Sets Gear Box Gaskets and Shims
1 Automatic Lubrication Reservoir
2 Sets Skirt and Emergency Switches
2 Sets Start Contacts, each size
3 Stop Switches
MOVING WALKS
14 32 00 - 5
4 Stop Switch Covers with hardware
2 Key Switches – each kind
1
2
2
1
Motor Starters, each size
LH Electric Interlocks, each size
RH Electric Interlocks, each size
Circuit Breakers, each size
1
1
2
2
7
Reverse Phase Relays
Transformers
Pallets Chain Oilers
Handrail Inlet Brushes
Handrail Tension Rollers
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
1.6
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
General: Refer to Section 14 20 00, Vertical Transportation, General, Section 14 21 00 and
Exhibit A.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
General: Refer to Section 14 20 00, Vertical Transportation, General and 14 31 00, Escalators.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Comply with requirements in Section 14 20 00, 3.7.2, Vertical Transportation, General.
MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel:
1.
2.
Rolled Steel Sections, Shapes and Rods: ASTM A36.
Tubing:
a.
b.
3.
B.
Sheet, Plate and Strip: ASTM A 666 or ASTM A240, Type 304.
Shapes and Bars: ASTM A276, Type 304.
Finish: No. 4 satin finish. Brush marks shall run parallel with the moving walk travel.
Aluminum Castings and Extrusions:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Sheet Steel: ASTM A446, grade B, zinc coated.
Stainless Steel:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Cold Formed: ASTM A500.
Hot Formed: ASTM A501.
Castings: ASTM B108 alloy and temper as required to meet the strength and
performance requirements.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221, Alloy 6061 or 6063, T6.
Finish: Commercial mill finish:
Clear Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type 1 (transparent
glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing, select), Kind FT (fully tempered), 12.0 mm
thick. After tempering, heat soak 100% of all fabricated glass units to European Union
Standard EN14179 to eliminate inclusion related glass breakage. Statistical heat soaking shall
not be permitted. Comply with ASME A17.1, Section 6.1, Rules 6.1.3.3.2 and 6.1.3.3.3.
MOVING WALKS
14 32 00 - 6
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
E.
Fasteners: Provide bolts, nuts, washers, screws, rivets, and other fasteners necessary for the
proper erection and assembly of the moving walk work. Fasteners shall be compatible with
materials being fastened.
F.
Welding Materials: Comply with AWS D1.1.
G.
Sealants, Joint Fillers and Primers: Sealants, joint fillers and primers internal to the moving
walk systems shall be as selected by the moving walk manufacturer. Perimeter sealants, joint
fillers and primers are specified under Section 07920, JOINT SEALANTS.
H.
Paint and Corrosion Protection: Each moving walk shall have the following minimum corrosion
protection.
1.
2.
Cast metal parts such as gear housings, chain sprockets, shall be painted with a rust
inhibitive primer coat after preparation by sandblasting.
Steel parts which are not specified to be galvanized shall be painted as follows:
a.
b.
3.
4.
2.3
Primer coat two (2) mil (dry film thickness), minimum thickness.
Second finish coat two (2) mil (dry film thickness), minimum thickness.
Bright or uncoated axles, shafts, etc. Shall be protected by zinc chromate, or chrome
plating.
Oil drip pans shall be fabricated of factory primed carbon steel.
COMPONENTS
A.
General: Provide moving walks complying with requirements. Each moving walk shall be a
self-contained unit consisting of trusses, center supports, tracks, pallet drive units, pallets, pallet
chains, comb plates, handrails, driving machine, controller, safety device, balustrades, and all
other parts required to provide a complete operating moving walk or ramp.
B.
Trusses: The moving walk trusses shall be fabricated of welded structural steel components and
be designed and constructed so as to safely carry the passenger capacity load and machinery
components, including the weight of the balustrade. A drive machine shall be located in the
terminal end truss pit at one end of the wellway and the reversing station shall be located in the
terminal end truss pit at the opposite end of the wellway. Provide a machinery space covered
with removable landing plates all within the outline of the trusses in the terminal end truss pits.
The trusses shall have a factor of safety in accordance with the requirements of the ASME
Code. The trusses shall come in sections in sizes that can be installed without disturbing the
building structure as detailed.
1.
2.
The center supports of each walkway shall be constructed using stanchions typically
spaced 36” apart. Each stanchion shall be designed to carry a portion of the weight of the
passenger load, pallets, and track system, and balustrades. The center supports shall rest
on and be firmly secured to supporting framing members provided in the wellway
structure. Center supports shall be ample strength to rigidly maintain the alignment of
moving parts. All center supports, including bolts, angles, shims, and bearing pads shall
be provided and installed for a complete installation.
Provide isolation, designed of rubber and steel, at all moving walk support locations.
MOVING WALKS
14 32 00 - 7
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
C.
Oil Drip Pan: Provide factory primed, 3mm thick, steel drip pans under full width and length of
moving walks to collect and hold oil and grease drippings from lubricated components. Design
and fabricate drip pan to sustain a load of 250 lbf (1.1 kN) on a 1.0-sq. ft. (0.9-sq. m) area at any
location.
1.
D.
Drip pans shall be of a sufficient size to collect and maintain, within the truss area, all oil,
water and grease droppings from the pallet linkage and all forms of loose debris that may
be deposited in the drip pans from the pallets in the turn around point at the terminal
portions of the moving walks. An access shall be provided to the drip pans at the lower
landings of all moving walks for cleaning the drain catch basin. The drip pans in the
wellways shall be removable for cleaning, or otherwise be accessible for easy cleaning.
Balustrades: Profile as indicated and arranged with moving handrails on guide rail that is
supported by 12 mm thick clear tempered glass panels without mullions between panels, with
stainless steel deck covers, skirts, trim, and accessories.
1.
Handrails:
a.
The handrail drive shall be of the traction type and provided with tension device.
The handrails shall receive their motion through gear or chain, from the treadway
chain drive mechanism to obtain the same ratio of speed and direction of travel as
the moving pallets on the treadway.
All handrail rollers shall be provided with sealed ball or roller bearings rated at
L10, 100,000 hours and have provision for retention of lubricant to ensure
satisfactory lubrication and operation. The color of handrails shall be black.
Friction drive sheaves and idlers shall be designed and positioned so that lubricant
cannot reach surface of handrail. Marking and spotting of handrail by drive
equipment shall not be permitted. Provide sealed bearings rated at L10, 100,000
hours.
The handrails shall be constructed of laminated, steel, wire mesh, or steel cable
reinforced, flexible elastomer material vulcanized into an integral, seamless,
smooth handrail resistant to environmental conditions. Each handrail shall operate
on formed guides except when in contact with the driving sheaves. A specially
coated finish to minimize frictional wear on the underside of the handrail shall be
provided. The formed guides shall be fabricated from a material not subject to
corrosion or pitting and having a polished or specially coated permanent finish to
minimize the frictional wear on the under surface of the handrail.
The handrail rollers and guides shall be so arranged that the handrail cannot be
easily thrown off or` disengaged while running. Handrails shall be provided with
substantially square edges at points of contact with the balustrading.
The extending newels shall be so designed and built that the handrails will
disappear into the balustrading at a point difficult to reach.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
NOTE: In areas, such as, but not limited to Ticketing, glass balustrades are susceptible to breakage from luggage carts and therefore are not permitted.
MOVING WALKS
14 32 00 - 8
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
2.
3.
E.
Comb Plates: Fabricate comb plate assemblies from wear resisting, non-corrosive metal
material, with exposed anti slip surfaces. Plastic comb plates will not be acceptable. Provide
comb plate sections at the end truss landings of moving walks and at the top and bottom
landings of ramps and meeting the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Deck Covers, Skirts, and Trim: Minimum 3 mm thick, satin stainless steel or black with
clear Teflon coating at skirt panels. Skirts shall be fastened to the truss with hidden
fastenings. Skirt panels shall be installed without overlapping joints or requiring trim
pieces to cover where two skirt panels meet. Inner decks shall attach to the upper edge of
the skirt and shall extend to the glass inner surface. The inner deck shall be attached to
the skirt with oval head stainless steel screws. Outer decks shall be attached with
concealed fasteners and shall extend outward from the outer glass surface with a turn
down at the finished width and either capture the adjacent wall finish or be concealed
behind it as accepted on the shop drawings.
During construction, exposed metal finishes shall be protected as recommended by the
moving walk manufacturer. Upon completion of the balustrades, the exposed work shall
be cleaned and polished.
Removable to permit ease of replacement.
Yellow in color for safety/demarcation.
Have not less than three (3), nor more than seven (7), comb plate sections per comb plate
assembly.
Provisions for lateral and vertical fine adjustments shall be provided so that cleats of
pallet treads pass between comb teeth with minimum clearances.
Comb teeth shall be designed so as to withstand a load of two hundred and fifty (250)
pounds applied in an upward direction at the tip of any one (1) tooth.
Pallet Treads: One-piece, unpainted, die-cast aluminum with demarcation grooves at front and
rear of tread surface. The pallet treads shall be cleat type, designed to insure a secure foothold
and comfortable tread surface; the cleats shall be fabricated to meet code requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Cleats shall be so spaced that the ends are flush with the side of the pallet treads. The
tread surface shall be adjacent to adjustable skirt guards on each side of the pallet tread
and the overall width of the pallet tread shall be machined to accurate limits to maintain a
minimum clearance between the skirt guards and the pallet tread.
Pallet treads and their various attachments shall permit removal of pallet treads without
disturbing balustrades or dismantling any part of the chains.
The design shall permit the running of the drive without pallet treads for convenience in
cleaning and inspection.
Pallet Rollers: Pallet rollers shall have polyurethane tires on a sealed hub and bearing and
be manufactured for quiet operation. Bearings shall be of the ball or roller type, be
factory sealed. Rollers shall not require any additional lubrication and must be rated for
severe, heavy-duty service. Rollers shall be mounted so as to prevent tilting and rocking
of the pallet treads.
Pallet treads shall be constructed so as to be driven by chain linkages.
MOVING WALKS
14 32 00 - 9
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
G.
Landing Floor Plates and Frames: Landing floor plates shall be provided to cover the full width
of the truss at each terminal end truss pit, extending from the comb plate and the floor line of
the balustrade, to the end of the truss. Exposed portions of the landing floor plates shall be of
finish metal matching pallet and comb plate. Plates shall be die cast aluminum in a ribbed
pattern transverse to the moving walk axis. Ribs shall be designed to provide maximum traction,
and shall be finished in the same manner as the comb plates. Landing plates shall be removable.
Plates shall be reinforced, as necessary, to be rigid and able to withstand a live load of two
hundred and fifty (250) pounds per square foot with zero permanent deformation. Landing
plates shall be installed flush with the elevation of the finished floor. Provide a frame around the
floor openings to receive the landing floor plates fabricated from metal matching the plates. The
upper edge of the frames shall be flush with the elevation of the finished floor.
1.
H.
Pallet Chains:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
I.
In cases where two moving walks are installed side by side, landing plates shall be
designed to allow the adjacent moving walk to remain operational while work is being
performed on the in-operable moving walk.
Chain shall be endless, roller type chains specifically designed for moving walk
application; one (1) on each side of pallet. The chains shall be made of high grade, heat
treated, flat steel links with hardened pins and accurate rollers designed to accurately
engage the drive sprockets to insure smooth operation. Each pair of pallet chains shall be
a matched set.
Provisions shall be made to prevent sagging or buckling of the linkages, to prevent the
pallets from coming in physical contact with one another, and to maintain a constant
distance between the pallet axles. Automatic tensioning devices shall be provided to
maintain tension under load and to compensate for wear.
A means for individual fine adjustment of tension for each linkage shall be provided.
Pallet chains shall be constructed to permit removal of segments as may be required for
replacement purposes.
Support rollers shall be spaced to distribute load and to guide linkage throughout run.
Rollers shall be constructed of polyurethane material, with diameter sufficient to provide
reliability, maintainability, smoothness of motion, and to operate within noise level
requirements specified. Rollers shall be affixed in a manner that ensures positive roller
retention but allows for replacement.
Pallet chain and chain pins shall have a minimal diameter of at least five-eighths (5/8) of
an inch and have a tensile strength suitable for the application. The chains shall have a
factor of safety of not less than six (6).
A test certificate for the chain breaking load shall be provided.
Tracks: The tracks shall be constructed of continuous structural steel sheet, strip or plate
throughout the truss, incline and transition curves at the landings in order to restrain the lateral
displacement of the pallets, ensure the rollers are retained in their proper position on the track
and to provide a smooth ride without discernible vibration.
MOVING WALKS
14 32 00 - 10
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
J.
Pallet Driving Machines: The driving machines shall be of the electric motor driven, worm gear
type, especially designed for moving walk service, provided with precision cut and matched
ground steel worms and worm gears; ball thrust bearings and roller shaft bearings and driven by
single speed motors. Run gearing in oil bath in an oil tight housing with appropriate shaft seals.
Mount the driving machine within and to the truss and connect the main drive shaft to the pallet
drive sprocket assembly, with a gear and chain driven by the driving machine. Design driving
motor and motor switch gear to provide a smooth start, and prevent undue strain on drive
components. The motor shall be of sufficient size, to operate the moving walk at full rated
capacity, per Code without exceeding the rated horsepower. The motor shall be AC, polyphase,
induction type continuous rated with a temperature rise not exceeding those in the NEMA and
IEEE Standards.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
K.
A reservoir with a low oil signal to the controller, and a minimum capacity of two and
one half (21/2) gallons shall be provided.
Reservoir level indications shall be provided where lubricants are contained within
housings, supply tanks and larger filler cups.
Provide a sight glass or dipstick method of determining oil level in the case. The case
shall provide a convenient method of draining the oil.
The sprockets shall be precision machined to distribute the load evenly on the sprocket
teeth and on the chain rollers and shall be designed for smooth operation.
Shafts shall be designed for ease of assembly or disassembly.
Main drive bearings shall be rated for L10, 200,000 hours
Sprocket Assemblies:
1.
2.
3.
4.
L.
Design and fabrication of tracks shall retain pallets, rollers, and running gear safely under
load requirements and at the highest speed specified.
Contractor shall assemble and secure sections of track together for easy removal and
replacement of defective sections. The system shall be adjustable, and welding of the
track sections is not acceptable.
Design of the mechanical components shall provide for easy installation and removal
without the dismantling of parts of the truss or building structure.
Tracks shall be properly supported on trusses to provide correct alignment and smooth,
even operation of running gear. The rolling surface of the track shall be a minimum
thickness of 3 mm.
The guiding system for the chains and rollers shall be fabricated from zinc plated or
galvanized steel profiles with smooth and even running surfaces. The guide profiles shall
not be welded together at the joints.
Attach the main sprocket assembly rigidly to the truss, at both sides, to ensure and
maintain proper alignment.
Mount the take up sprocket assembly on rollers, operating on tracks, rigidly attached to
the truss at both sides, to automatically maintain proper tension on the pallet chains, by
means of weights or compression springs.
Provide roller type main drive shaft bearings.
Design chain sprockets to accurately distribute the load evenly on the sprocket teeth and
chain rollers.
Brake:
MOVING WALKS
14 32 00 - 11
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
1.
2.
3.
Provide each moving walk with a permanent magnet ceramic brake, located on the high
speed shaft which, when activated, shall stop the moving walk or ramp in the event of a
normal stop control, activation of stop button, activation of any safety device, o upon loss
of power.
Provide a load compensating brake system capable of automatically stopping a moving
walk or ramp quickly but gradually, and able to hold the moving walk or ramp stationary
under full load whenever the power is interrupted. The brake shall be "fail safe" and
electrically released. When a stop is initiated, the system shall maintain a relatively
constant deceleration independent of the load. The brake shall not cause the moving walk
or ramp to come to an abrupt stop. It shall be designed to meet ASME A17.1 Code for
deceleration requirements without adjustment. Design of brake shall provide ease of
access for inspection.
Controller: Wire to identified terminal block studs. Identifying symbols or letters
identical to those on wiring diagrams permanently marked adjacent to each component on
the controller. Enclose all components in steel cabinet removable from machine room for
ease of access to switches and wiring. Provide mainline circuit breaker and means to
protect against overload and single phasing. Controller shall be labeled with rated load
and speed, braking torque, manufacturer serial number and LAWA numbers. Locate
controller remove if available space is not sufficient in upper and lower ot.
a.
The moving walk control equipment shall contain diagnostic capabilities as
required for the ease of complete maintenance. The diagnostic system shall be an
integral part of the controller and provide user-friendly interaction between the
service person and the controls. All such systems shall be free from decaying
circuits that must be periodically reprogrammed by the manufacturer.
b.
Switch gear shall be mounted in NEMA 4X cabinets with labeled terminal strips.
c.
The main controller shall use an Allen Bradley SLC5/03 Programmable Logic
Controller (PLC) or approved equal, to control and monitor the status of the
moving walk. The PLC shall be designed to communicate over Ethernet or
approved equal.
d.
The PLC racks shall provide space for two future single-slot modules.
e.
The PLC in the remote control panel shall also have hardware and firmware
provisions to communicate with interactive operator interface (monitor).
f.
The PLC shall store the last 99 faults, accessible via laptop connection, panel view
or remote communications.
g.
Provide a copy of all working programs on approved computer medium as well as
a printed program listing.
h.
The Programmable Controller shall have one dedicated serial port, which supports
RS-232-C signals. It shall be accessible in ladder logic and provide support for
Point to Point and Life-Net/Slave SCADA communication protocol systems.
Alternatively, it must be usable for programming purposes or for access to remote
programmers via modems.
i.
The main control switchgear of an moving walk shall contain at least the following
devices:
1)
2)
MOVING WALKS
14 32 00 - 12
Lockable main switch thermal and magnetic motor protection starter, hour
counter, auxiliary contactors, phase failure device, phase sequence monitor,
and ground fault monitor.
The controller cabinet shall contain a permanently mounted fault indicator
board with indicator lights. Fault data shall also be displayed in the newel.
Each group of safety devices shall be connected to one signal lamp.
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
j.
k.
M.
The indication shall be locked automatically. Reset shall be done by a
separate switch installed in the controller. The emergency stop shall not be
locked.
All terminals shall have identification markings and all cables shall be
provided with cable markers.
The controller shall be equipped with an AC induction motor reduced
voltage starter; installed in line between the standard type contactor and the
drive motor. The starter shall be solid state, capable of starting motors
smoothly and gradually, reducing inrush current and mechanical shock upon
start up. Adjustable settings for accelerating time and starting torque shall
be provided. The starter shall also contain auxiliary contacts and a thermal
overload relay for motor protection.
Maintenance Receptacles: Electric power receptacles shall be furnished and
installed in the upper and lower pits. Each receptacle shall be of the GFCI
duplex type, waterproof, grounded, and rated for one hundred and twenty
volts at twenty amperes. The receptacles in the pits shall be surface
mounted on the walls, not less than thirty inches from the floor.
Relays shall be provided with visual indication that they are energized.
Adjustable settings for accelerating time and starting torque shall be
provided. The starter shall also contain auxiliary contacts and a thermal
overload relay for motor protection.
Monitoring System Interface: Provide controller with serial data link through RJ
45 Ethernet connection and install all devices necessary to monitor items outlined
in Section 2.15. Moving Walk Contractor responsible to connect monitoring
system interface to machine room monitoring compartment and LAN. Wiring
from LAN to the machine room monitoring compartment by others.
Remote Monitoring and Diagnostics: Equip each controller with standard ports,
interface boards, and drivers to accept maintenance, data logging, fault finding
diagnostic, and monitoring system computers, keyboards, modems, and
programming tools. The system shall be capable of driving remote color CRT
monitors that continually scan and display the status of each moving walk. System
shall be Lift-Net, or equal ready/compatible. System shall be compatible with
other building management systems. Monitoring system shall not be proprietary to
any individual control. Provide features described in Section 14 31 00, Escalators.
Control Station: Provide a control station at both the drive end and return end, located near the
handrail inlet, include a key actuated direction starting switch at each station. Restarting shall
require first positioning the key to "normal" (center position), and then selecting the appropriate
direction. Restarting with the key in the “normal” position shall be prevented by the controller.
MOVING WALKS
14 32 00 - 13
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
N.
1.
Per Reference Standard RS-18 the right side position for starting the moving walk in the
upward direction shall be marked “start-up”, and the left side position for starting the
moving walks in the downward direction shall be marked “start-down”. The starting
devices shall be protected by a locked, transparent cover plate that can be opened by the
starting key and clearly marked “For Start Only”. Starting devices shall be located at the
top and bottom of the moving walk or ramp on the right side facing newel.
2.
Provide a manual reset switch adjacent to each control station at top and bottom landings.
MOVING WALK POWER SAVING CONTROL
1.
CERTIFICATIONS
a.
2.
PERFORMANCE
a.
b.
3.
The supplier shall provide documented proof that the motor controlling device has
been tested on a moving walk by at least one electric utility in the United States of
America and shown positive energy savings test results. Furthermore, the supplier
shall provide documented proof that the electric utility approved the motor
controlling device for an energy efficiency rebate (if applicable).
The motor controlling device shall continually monitor motor and be able correct
energy requirement within 8ms and be able to respond to a 50% change in load
within 1 second without changing the speed of the motor by over 0.5%. The motor
controlling device shall be able to provide full power to a motor without using
more than 0.5% more energy that an electrical mechanical motor starter.
EQUIPMENT MANUFACURER ACCEPTANCE
a.
4.
The motor controlling device shall be certified to meet US elevator / escalator /
moving walk code (ASME-A A17.5 and CSA B44.1) standard for industrial
control equipment as well as CE for the European Standard.
The supplier shall show broad industry acceptance of the motor control device by
documenting that all major moving walk service providers, including Otis
Elevator, KONE Inc. Schindler, ThyssenKrupp, and Mitsubishi Electric, have
experience installing such device on a moving walk.
FUNCTIONS
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
MOVING WALKS
14 32 00 - 14
The motor controlling device must include the following functions:
Overload Current Protection
Over Voltage Protection
Under voltage Protection
Over Current
Under Current
Phase Loss
Reverse Direction
S.C.R. Failure
Fault logging capability
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
k.
5.
MOUNTING HARDWARE
a.
6.
The supplier shall provide an installation and user's manual.
WARRANTY
a.
O.
The supplier shall provide motor controlling device drawings including schematic
wiring diagram and mounting dimensions.
DELIVERABLES
a.
12.
The motor controlling device shall utilize a metal heat sink material to dissipate
operating heat without requiring external cooling devices.
SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
a.
11.
The motor controlling device shall provide a timed soft start with a start up time
range of 0 to 10 seconds or more, to appropriately integrate with other motor
starters and reduce the mechanical stress on the moving walk system during the
starting of the motor.
HEAT SINK MATERIAL
a.
10.
The motor controlling device shall have one input connection that controls the
starting and stopping of the motor. The motor controlling device shall have two
output contacts to provide the run and fault status of the motor controlling device.
MOTOR CONTROL FUNCTIONALITY
a.
9.
The motor controlling device shall not require an external dedicated power source
to operate and shall operate based on existing line serving the moving walk.
DISCRETE INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
a.
8.
The mounting hardware and enclosure shall be rated NEMA - 1 for indoor
installations and NEMA 4 for exterior installations rated and specifically designed
for ease of installation in moving walk applications.
CONTROL VOLATAGE CONNECTION
a.
7.
Remote monitoring capability
The supplier shall warrant the motor controlling device for a period of two years
from the date of sale.
Additional Safety Devices: Provide all safety devices required by Code including, but not
limited to, the following. Design all safety devices to operate in accordance with the
requirements of the Code.
MOVING WALKS
14 32 00 - 15
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
1.
Emergency Stop Buttons: Emergency stop buttons shall be provided, designed so that the
momentary pressure of either button shall cut off the power supply to the motor and
brake to bring the moving walk or ramp to rest.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Broken Treadway, and Broken Drive Chain, Devices: Broken chain safety devices shall
be provided with a safety switch for each chain designed to cut off the current and bring
the moving walk to rest should either chain break.
Pit Stop Switch: Each moving walk shall be provided with an additional safety device, in
the pit that shall interrupt power within the moving walk or ramp and automatically apply
the brake to bring the moving walk or ramp to a smooth stop.
Reversal Stop Devices: The reversing device shall be designed to stop the moving walk
automatically, should the direction of travel be accidentally reversed while the moving
walk or ramp is operating in an ascending direction.
Pallet Level Devices: Moving walks or ramps equipped with pallets with trail wheels
shall be provided with pallet level devices shall be located at the each end of the moving
walk or ramp. These devices shall detect downward displacement of 1/8” or greater at the
trailing edge of the pallet at either side of the pallet. When activated, the device shall
cause the moving walk or ramp to stop prior to the pallet entering the combplate. The
device shall cause power to be removed from the driving machine motor and brake.
Handrail Inlet Safety Devices: A handrail inlet safety device shall be provided at the
handrail inlet in the newel. The electrical switch of this device shall be designed to cut off
the current and bring the moving walk to rest should either an object become caught
between the handrail and the handrail guard or an object approaches the area between the
handrail and handrail guard.
Comb Pallet Impact Devices: Per Reference Standard RS-18 two independent safety
devices, one at the side of the comb plate and the other at the center of the front edge of
the comb plate shall be provided at the drive end and return end comb plate which will
cause the opening of the power circuit to the moving walk or ramp drive machine motor
and brake if either:
a.
b.
8.
One emergency stop button shall be located at both the drive end and return end.
Location shall be in the upper quadrant, 45 degrees above horizontal, in order to
provide easy access. The stop button shall be red in color.
The button shall be housed under a clear, high impact resistant plastic cover, which
shall be self-closing. Instructions for operating the stop button shall be imprinted
on the cover in half-inch high letters. When the cover is lifted, an audible alarm
shall sound until the cover is returned to its closed position.
a horizontal force in the direction of travel is applied exceeding 112 lbf at either
side or exceeding 225 lbf at the center of the front edge of the comb plate; or,
b. a resultant vertical force in upward direction is applied exceeding 150 lbf at the
center of the front of the combplate.
Comb-Pallet Stop Device: Per Reference Standard RS-18 on every new moving walk a
comb-pallet stop device shall be provided at the entrance to and the exit from a moving
walk. Any obstruction exerting a pressure of 60 pounds for pallets over 32 inches in
width between the moving treadway and the comb pallet shall activate the comb pallet
stop device to cause the opening of the power circuit to the moving walk or ramp driving
machine motor and brake.
MOVING WALKS
14 32 00 - 16
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
P.
Remote Monitoring: Provide an interactive monitoring and diagnostic system tied to each
individual elevator, escalator, and moving walk ready for connection to the new building
management system (BMS). The BMS shall be centrally located in the BMS Control Room.
1.
Q.
Handrail Speed Monitoring Devices: A handrail speed monitoring device shall be
provided which will cause the immediate activation of the audible alarm required for the
emergency stop buttons whenever the speed of either handrail deviates from the pallet
speed by 15% or more. The device shall cause electric power to be removed from the
driving machine motor and brake if the speed deviation of 15% or more is continuous for
more than 2 seconds.
Missing Pallet Switch: This safety feature shall be provided to prevent the unit from
running if a pallet is missing.
Combplate Lights: Provide recessed light fixtures with flush lenses mounted in interior
balustrade panels at each side of combplates designed to illuminate treadway at
combplate.
Pallet Demarcation Lights: Pallet demarcation lights shall be furnished at the entrance to
and the exit from a moving walk. They shall consist of a light fixture installed just below
the track system where the pallet leaves or enters the comb plate. This fixture shall be
furnished with two independently operating green fluorescent lamps and shall be capable
of lighting the entire width of the pallet. The light shall be visible between the pallets.
The lamps shall be activated whenever the moving walk or ramp is in operation.
Safety Signs: Worded and pictorial signage meeting the requirements of the ASME Code
shall be provided at both the drive end and return end landings.
Lift-Net: Integrated Display Systems, Inc.
Energy-Saving Feature: Provide moving walk motors and controls designed for motors to run
on partial windings (at reduced power) when not under full load.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
General: Refer to Section 14 20 00, VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION, GENERAL.
MOVING WALK SCHEDULE
A.
Number Required:
B.
Unit Numbers:
C.
Location:
D.
Vertical Rise/Slope:
E.
Length:
MOVING WALKS
14 32 00 - 17
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
Guide Specification
F.
Width: 56" (1420 m)
G.
Speed: 100 feet/minute (.50 m/s).
H.
Power Characteristics: 480 Volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hertz.
I.
Maintenance Service: Provide 12-month maintenance for all moving walks with 24-hour
callback service, as-built wiring diagrams, operating instructions, and parts ordering
information, remote wiring to fire alarm panel.
J.
Warranty: Provide 12 month warranty beginning at date of acceptance by LAWA.
3.3
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train LAWA's maintenance personnel to
operate, adjust, and maintain escalators.
B.
Check operation of escalators with LAWA's personnel present and before date of Completion.
Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.
C.
Check operation of escalators with LAWA personnel present not more than one month before
end of warranty period. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.
END OF SECTION 14 32 00
MOVING WALKS
14 32 00 - 18
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
EXAMPLE
EXHIBIT A
FIVE YEAR EXTENDED
PREVENTATIVE AND ROUTINE
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
AGREEMENT
(SERVICE AGREEMENT)
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ELEVATORS, ESCALATORS, and MOVING
WALKS
AT THE
LOS ANGELES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
IN
Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks
THE CITY OF LOS ANGELES,
CALIFORNIA
Page 2 of 10
Vertical Transportation and Moving Walks
GENERAL CONDITIONS
GC-1. SCOPE OF WORK
1.01
The Contractor agrees to furnish all labor, materials and equipment in strict compliance with the Work
requirements, conditions and specifications identified in the Contract Documents.
1.02
It is expressly understood and agreed that the Contractor shall perform all incidental work required to fulfill
the requirements of the Contract Documents. All such incidental work shall not be considered Change or
Extra Work for which additional compensation can be claimed by the Contractor.
GC-2. NOT USEDAUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF THE CITYThe Engineer and/or Director of
Maintenance, represents LAWA, the City, the Board and the Executive Director within the limits of the
City Charter and the administrative requirements of both the City on all matters relating to this Service
Agreement.
3.01
The Engineer and/or Director of Maintenance or designated representative has the final authority in all
matters affecting the Work and the authority to enforce compliance with the Service Agreement. The
Contractor shall promptly comply with the instructions of The Engineer and/or Director of Maintenance or
its authorized representative.
GC-4. INSURANCE
4.01
Contractor shall procure at its expense, and keep in effect at all times during the term of this Service
Agreement the following types and amounts of insurance:
COVERAGE TYPE
A. Worker’s Compensation
B. Automobile Liability including
i.
Any Auto
ii. ii. Hired Autos
iii. iii. Non-owned Autos)
POLICY LIMITS
Statutory
$10 Million Combined Single Limit (“CSL”)
C.
$10 Million CSL
Aviation/Airport Liability
OR
Commercial General Liability
(including the following coverages:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
D.
E.
4.02
$10 Million CSL
Premises and Operations
Contractual Liability (Blanket/Schedule)
Independent Contractors
Personal Injury
Products/Completed Operations)
Explosion, Collapse & Underground
Broad Form Property Damage
Professional Liability
Employer’s Liability
$1 Million CSL
$1 Million CSL
The specified insurance (except for Workers’ Compensation, Employers’ Liability and Professional
Liability) shall also, either by provisions in the policies, by City’s own endorsement form or by other
endorsement attached to such policies, include and insure City, its Department of Airport, the Board, and
Page 1 of 10
Vertical Transportation and Moving Walks
all of its officers, employees and agents, their successors and assigns, as insureds, against the areas of risk
described in Section 4.01 hereof as respects Contractor’s acts or omissions arising out of the performance
of this Agreement, Contractor’s acts or omissions in its operations, use and occupancy of the premises
hereunder or other related functions performed by or on behalf of Contractor at the Airport.
4.03
Waiver of Subrogation. For commercial general liability insurance, workers' compensation insurance, and
employer's liability insurance, the insurer shall agree to waive all rights of subrogation against City for
Losses arising from activities and operations of Contractor insured in the performance of Services under
this Service Agreement.
4.04
Sub-Contractors. Contractor shall include all of its Sub-Contractors as insureds under its policies or shall
furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each Sub-Contractor. All coverages for Sub-Contractors
shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Executive
Director and approved as to form by the City Attorney.
4.05
Each specified insurance policy (other than Workers’ Compensation and Employers’ Liability and
Professional Liability) shall contain a Severability of Interest (Cross Liability) clause which states, “It is
agreed that the insurance afforded by this policy shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim
is made, or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the company’s liability.” Additionally,
Contractor’s Commercial General Liability policy (“Policy”) shall provide Contractual Liability Coverage,
and such insurance as is afforded by the Policy shall also apply to the tort liability of the City of Los
Angeles assumed by the Contractor under this Service Agreement.
4.06
All such insurance shall be primary and noncontributing with any other insurance held by City’s
Department of Airports where liability arises out of, or results from, the acts or omissions of Contractor, its
agents, employees, officers, invitees, assigns, or any person or entity acting for, or on behalf of, Contractor.
4.07
Such policies may provide for reasonable deductibles and/or retentions acceptable to the Executive
Director, based upon the nature of Contractor’s operations and the type of insurance involved.
4.08
City shall have no liability for any premiums charged for such coverage(s). The inclusion of City, its
Department of Airports, its Board, and all of its officers, employees and agents, and their agents and
assigns, as additional insureds, is not intended to, and shall not; make them, or any of them, a partner or
joint venturer of Contractor in its operations at the Airport.
4.09
In the event Contractor fails to furnish City evidence of insurance, or to maintain the insurance as required
under this Section, City, upon ten (10) days’ prior written notice to Contractor of its intention to do so, shall
have the right to secure the required insurance at the cost and expense of Contractor, and Contractor agrees
to promptly reimburse City for the cost thereof, plus fifteen percent (15%) for administrative overhead.
4.10
At least thirty (30) days prior to the expiration date of any of the above policies, documentation showing
that the insurance coverage has been renewed or extended shall be filed with the City. If any such coverage
is cancelled or reduced, Contractor shall, within ten (10) days of such cancellation or reduction of coverage,
file with City evidence that the required insurance has been reinstated, or is being provided through another
insurance company or companies.
4.11
Contractor shall provide proof of all specified insurance and related requirements to City either by
production of the actual insurance policy(ies), by use of City’s own endorsement form(s), by broker’s letter
acceptable to Executive Director in both form and content in the case of foreign insurance syndicates, or by
other written evidence of insurance acceptable to Executive Director. The documents evidencing all
Page 2 of 10
Vertical Transportation and Moving Walks
specified coverages shall be filed with City prior to the Contractor performing the services hereunder. Such
documents shall contain the applicable policy number(s), the inclusive dates of policy coverage(s), the
insurance carrier’s name(s), and they shall bear an original or electronic signature of an authorized
representative of said carrier(s). Such insurance shall not be subject to cancellation, reduction in coverage
or non-renewal, except after the carrier(s) and the Contractor provide written notice (by Certified Mail) to
the City Attorney of the City of Los Angeles at least thirty (30) days prior to the effective date thereof.
4.12
City and Contractor agree that the insurance policy limits specified in this Section shall be reviewed for
adequacy annually throughout the term of this Service Agreement by the Executive Director, who may
thereafter require Contractor to adjust the amount(s) of insurance coverage(s) to whatever amount(s)
Executive Director deems to be adequate. City reserves the right to have submitted to it, upon request, all
pertinent information about the agent(s) and carrier(s) providing such insurance.
GC-5. CITY HELD HARMLESS
5.01
To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless City and any
and all of City’s Boards, officers, agents, employees, assigns and successors in interest from and against
any and all suits, claims, causes of action, liability, losses, damages, demands or expenses (including, but
not limited to, attorney’s fees and costs of litigation), claimed by anyone (including Contractor and/or
Contractor’s agents or employees) by reason of injury to, or death of, any person(s) (including Contractor
and/or Contractor’s agents or employees), or for damage to, or destruction of, any property (including
property of Contractor and/or Contractor’s agents or employees) or for any and all other losses alleged to
arise out of, pertain to, or relate to the Contractor’s and/or Sub-Contractor’s performance of the Service
Agreement, whether or not contributed to by any act or omission of City, or of any of City’s Boards,
officers, agents or employees; Provided, however, that where such suits, claims, causes of action, liability,
losses, damages, demands or expenses arise from or relate to Contractor’s performance of a “Construction
Contract” as defined by California Civil Code section 2783, this paragraph shall not be construed to require
Contractor to indemnify or hold City harmless to the extent such suits, causes of action, claims, losses,
demands and expenses are caused by the City’s sole negligence, willful misconduct or active negligence.
5.02
In addition, Contractor agrees to protect, defend, indemnify, keep and hold harmless City, including its
Boards, Departments and City’s officers, agents, servants and employees, from and against any and all
claims, damages, liabilities, losses and expenses arising out of any threatened, alleged or actual claim that
the end product provided to LAWA by Contractor violates any patent, copyright, trade secret, proprietary
right, intellectual property right, moral right, privacy, or similar right, or any other rights of any third party
anywhere in the world. Contractor agrees to, and shall, pay all damages, settlements, expenses and costs,
including costs of investigation, court costs and attorney’s fees, and all other costs and damages sustained
or incurred by City arising out of, or relating to, the matters set forth above in this paragraph of the City’s
“Hold Harmless” agreement.
5.03
In Contractor’s defense of the City under this Section, negotiation, compromise, and settlement of any
action, the City shall retain discretion in and control of the litigation, negotiation, compromise, settlement,
and appeals there from, as required by the Los Angeles City Charter, particularly Article II, Sections 271,
272 and 273 thereof.
5.04
Survival of Indemnities. The provisions of this GC-5 shall survive the termination of this Agreement.
GC-6. STANDARD OF CARE
6.01
Contractor’s professional services rendered in the performance of this Service Agreement shall conform to
the highest professional standards for said designated professional fields in the State of California.
Page 3 of 10
Vertical Transportation and Moving Walks
GC-7. NOT USED
GC-8. CONTRACT BONDS
8.01
All provisions of Vertical Transportation General Provisions, Section 14 20 00 shall apply.
8.02
The Faithful Performance Bond and the Payment Bond shall each be for one hundred percent (100%) of the
Service Agreement price. The Contractor shall submit both the Faithful Performance Bond and Payment
Bond no less than thirty days prior to the expiration of the Warranty Period, with receipt and approval by
LAWA and the City Attorney a condition of Final Acceptance of the Procurement and Installation
Contract. Both bonds shall be maintained by the Contractor in full force and effect until the Service
Agreement term is complete, and until all claims for materials and labor are paid, and shall otherwise
comply with Section 3248 of the Civil Code.
8.03
Should any bond become insufficient, the Contractor shall renew the bond within 10 days after receiving
notice from The Engineer and/or Director of Maintenance.
8.04
The mutually agreed optional second 5-year Extended Preventative and Routine Maintenance (EPRM)
Service Agreement period shall maintain all bond requirements set forth herein.
GC-9. NOT USED
GC-10. ASSIGNMENT OR TRANSFER PROHIBITED
10.01 Contractor shall not, in any manner, directly or indirectly, by operation of law or otherwise, hypothecate,
assign, transfer or encumber this Service Agreement, or any portion thereof or any interest therein, in whole
or in part, without the prior written consent of the Executive Director. The names of Subcontractors or
others whom Contractor intends to employ to perform services as part of the Work shall be submitted to
Executive Director for prior approval.
10.02
For purposes of this Service Agreement, the terms “transfer” and “assign” shall include, but not be limited
to, the following: (i) if Contractor is a partnership or limited liability company, the transfer of fifty percent
(50%) or more of the partnership interest or membership or the dissolution of the Contractor; and, (ii) if
Contractor is a corporation, any cumulative or aggregate sale, transfer, assignment, or hypothecation of
fifty percent (50%) or more of the voting shares of Contractor.
GC-11. NOT USED
GC-12. NOT USED
GC-13. NOT USED
GC-14. NOT USED
GC-15. NOT USED
GC-16. NOT USED
GC-17. NOT USED
GC-18. NOT USED
Page 4 of 10
Vertical Transportation and Moving Walks
GC-19. WAIVER
19.01 The waiver by City of any breach of any term, covenant, or condition herein contained shall not be deemed
to be a waiver of any other term, covenant, or condition, or of any subsequent breach of the same term,
covenant, or condition.
GC-20. NOT USED
GC-21. NOT USED
GC-22. TERMINATION
22.01 If, at any time, City, for any reason, decides to terminate the Service Agreement, or any part thereof, City
may: 1) require Contractor to terminate the performance of all, or a portion, of its services; and/or 2)
terminate this Service Agreement, or any part thereof, upon giving Contractor a thirty (30) day written
notice prior to the effective date of such termination, which date shall be specified in such notice.
22.02
In the event this Service Agreement, or any portion hereof, is terminated by the City, City shall pay
Contractor as set forth in Section GC-22.03 the amount due to the Contractor for Basic Services as set forth
in the Service Agreement.
22.03
City shall not be liable for the cost of work performed or expenses incurred subsequent to the date specified
by City in the thirty (30) day written notice to terminate, and in no event shall any payments to be paid by
City to Contractor, exceed the amount(s) specified, without the prior approval of the City, and unless this
Service Agreement is first amended in writing. Any such payments shall be made by City within a
reasonable time following receipt of Contractor's invoice(s) therefor.
22.04
City may, at any time, upon written order to Contractor, require Contractor to stop all, or any part, of the
services called for by this Service Agreement for a period of thirty (30) days. Said thirty (30) day period
shall commence on the day the written order is delivered to Contractor, and shall extend for any further
period to which the parties may agree. Any such order shall be specifically identified as a "Stop Work
Order" issued pursuant to this clause. Upon receipt of such an Order, Contractor shall forthwith comply
with its terms. Within a period of thirty (30) days after a Stop Work Order is delivered to Contractor, or
within any extension of that period to which the parties have agreed, City shall either:
a.
Cancel the Stop Work Order; or
b.
Terminate the services as provided in the Service Agreement. If a Stop Work Order issued under
this Section is canceled or expires, or the period of any extension thereof is canceled or expires,
Contractor shall resume work. An equitable adjustment will thereafter be made in Contractor's
time of performance, Contractor’s compensation, or both, consistent with the provisions of this
Service Agreement, if:
1.
2.
Page 5 of 10
The Stop Work Order results in an increase in the time required for, or in Contractor's cost
properly allocable to, the performance of services pursuant to this Service Agreement; and
Contractor asserts a claim for such adjustment within thirty (30) days after the end of the
period of work stoppage; provided, however, that City may investigate any facts relating to
such claim.
If a Stop Work Order is not canceled, and the services covered by such order are terminated
for the convenience of City, the reasonable costs resulting from said Stop Work Order shall
be allowed.
Vertical Transportation and Moving Walks
22.05
It is understood and agreed that should City decide that any portion of Service Agreement, and/or
Contractor's services, shall be suspended or terminated, this Service Agreement shall continue to apply to
that portion or those portions not suspended or terminated, and that such suspension or termination of a
portion of Service Agreement or services shall in no way make void or invalid this Service Agreement.
22.06
At the termination of this Service Agreement, the Contractor shall deliver to LAWA all records and
documentation, including, but not limited to manuals, operations manuals, service records, drawings,
computer programs (including applicable software source codes), procedures, and records which the
Contractor has used to maintain the equipment. All such records and documents shall remain the sole
property of LAWA. The system shall be returned to LAWA in the same or better condition as it was
delivered to the Contractor with the exception of reasonable wear and tear.
GC-23. PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS
23.01 The Contractor shall conduct the operations in a manner that avoids injury or damage to adjacent property
and improvements. If damaged or removed due to the Contractor's operations, they shall be restored or
replaced in as nearly the original condition and location as is reasonably possible. When ordered by
LAWA, the Contractor shall provide and install suitable safeguards to protect any object from injury or
damage.
GC-24. PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY
24.01 All provisions of the Contract Documents shall apply.
24.02
The Contractor shall be liable for any damage caused to such premises. The Contractor shall restore areas
used for operations or for storage, and all areas adjacent to the construction to their original condition.
GC-25. RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR
25.01 All provisions of the General Provisions shall apply.
25.02
The Contractor's employees shall be restricted to immediate work areas at the Site, and shall not go beyond
work limits or access routes, except as otherwise approved by LAWA.
25.03
All employees must have a LAWA security badge with a Customs Seal and insurance as required for
unescorted access to the Airport’s Security Identification Display Area (SIDA).
25.04
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and maintaining all tools and all necessary vehicles,
including, but not limited to scissor lifts, fork-lift trucks, golf carts, etc. that will be used under this Service
Agreement. There will be no additional costs to LAWA for these items, and shall be included as part of
Contractor’s rates.
25.05
Before starting work, the Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have complete
authority to act on the Contractor's behalf.
25.06
LAWA reserves the right to:
a.
Disapprove any candidate named as the Contractor's representative or alternate who fails to meet
the provisions set forth herein.
b.
Remove, without any right to work on the work site, either the Contractor's representative or
alternate, who in the sole opinion of LAWA has demonstrated incompetence, lack of ability, or
Page 6 of 10
Vertical Transportation and Moving Walks
other unsuitability to perform supervision of the Work; and that individual shall not, without
permission of LAWA, be re-employed on this Service Agreement.
25.07
If the Contractor's representative or alternate leaves the employment of the Contractor, the Contractor will
be required to replace the individual(s) within fifteen (15) days.
25.08
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining, at its own expense, all necessary licenses and permits.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to persons or property that occur as a result of the
Contractor’s negligence and shall take proper safety and health precautions to protect the work, workers,
the public and the property of others.
GC-26. RESPONSIBILITIES OF LAWA
26.01 LAWA will designate its representative whom the Contractor shall coordinate all operational requirements
and activities, concerning, but not limited to rules and regulations, safety, enforcements, notifications to
stakeholders and airlines.
26.02
LAWA shall pay the reasonable cost of utilities (electric, gas, etc.) used in the course of performing the
Service Agreement activities. LAWA will be the exclusive judge of the reasonableness of claimed utility
charges.
26.03
LAWA shall reimburse the Contractor for approved work performed on the units that is required due to
damage caused to the units by others. The Contractor will be reimbursed in accordance with the agreed
upon rate for such work.
GC-27. INTERFACE
27.01 The Contractor shall conduct all operations in a manner that will cause no interference with airplane traffic,
passenger flow or normal operation of the Airport. In all operations, the Contractor shall be governed by
the regulations and rules of LAWA and shall cooperate fully with LAWA.
27.02
Contractor shall also comply with all applicable laws and regulations and shall hold all necessary
consultations and conferences with personnel of any and all City, County, State, or Federal agencies,
including, but not limited to the City of Los Angeles, FAA, DHS, TSA, USCBP, LAXTEC, which may
have jurisdiction.
GC-28. SAFETY
28.01 During the term of this Service Agreement, The Contractor shall provide all materials, resources, training
and any and all services required to ensure that the systems can be safely operated and maintained in
conformance with LAWA and the approved documents developed by the elevator/escalator OEM in
conformance with industry standards.
28.02
Contractor shall at all times conduct all operations under the Service Agreement in a manner to avoid the
risk of bodily harm to persons or risk of damage to any property. Contractor shall promptly take all
precautions which are necessary and adequate against any conditions which involve a risk of bodily harm
to persons or a risk of damage to any property. Contractor shall continuously inspect all Work, materials
and equipment to discover and determine any such conditions and shall be solely responsible for discovery,
determination and correction of any such conditions.
28.03
Contractor shall submit their written Safety Program, with detail commensurate with the Work to be
performed, for LAWA’s review within 30 days of expiration of the 1-year warranty period. Such review
and approval shall not relieve Contractor of its responsibility for safety, nor shall such review be construed
Page 7 of 10
Vertical Transportation and Moving Walks
as limiting in any manner Contractor’s obligation to undertake any action which may be necessary or
required to establish and maintain safe working conditions at the facility.
28.04
Contactor shall maintain accurate accident and injury reports and shall furnish LAWA a monthly summary
of injuries and man hours lost due to injuries as well as a statement of total man hours worked.
28.05
Material usage by the Contractor shall be accomplished with strict adherence to California Division of
Industrial Safety requirements and all manufacturer warnings and application instructions listed on the
material Safety Data Sheet and on the product container label.
28.06
The Contractor shall notify LAWA if a specified product cannot be used under safe conditions.
28.07
Worker Protection: In all cases involving exposure of personnel to toxic/hazardous materials and/or
elements, the City of Los Angeles Personnel, Occupational Safety Office, shall have field review authority
over the Contractor's operations.
GC-29. ADVERTISING
29.01 No use of information related to the Work is permitted without the written approval of LAWA.
29.02
All signage, logos, placards, displays, etc. are subject to written approval by LAWA.
GC-30. AUDITS AND RECORDS
30.01 LAWA shall have access to all records and documents of the Contractor directly relating to labor and
materials used for the performance of the work in this Service Agreement.
GC-31. PAYMENT
31.01 It is agreed that, regardless of any other provision of this Service Agreement, unless amended, the total
amount to be paid to Contractor by City shall not exceed the amount indicated in the Contractor’s proposal.
31.02
Each month, during the term of this Service Agreement, Contractor shall submit a Request For Payment for
1/60 of the amount specified in 31.01.
31.03
Each Request For Payment shall contain documentation acceptable to LAWA that include applicable
employee and subcontractor time sheets, identification of the scope of work completed, billing by job
classifications and the applicable approved billing rates. Each Request For Payment shall also contain a
cumulative total of all monthly billings, and balances. Subject to the provisions of this Service Agreement,
LAWA shall pay Contractor based on Contractor’s monthly payment requests. Payment will be withheld
for any Work not completed in the billing period.
GC-32. NOT USED
GC-33. CONTRACTOR STAFFING
33.01 If LAWA at its sole discretion is dissatisfied with the performance of any of Contractor’s personnel,
including personnel of Contractor’s sub-Contractors, assigned to the Work, and so notifies Contractor, in
writing, Contractor shall replace the person(s) to whom objection has been made within five (5) working
days of the written notice. City, in exercising its rights may also, in its sole discretion direct Contractor to
terminate one or more its sub-consulting agreements.
Page 8 of 10
Vertical Transportation and Moving Walks
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
SC-1. INTRODUCTION
1.01
The general scope of work is to provide complete Extended Preventative and Routine Maintenance
(EPRM), services for the elevators, escalators and moving walks (equipment) installed as part of this
Procurement and Installation Contract at LAX. Services include repairs, adjusting, cleaning and lubrication
of equipment.
1.02
Any other incidental services that the Contractor determines to be required to assume complete
responsibility for EPRM of the new equipment that are not described herein shall be included as part of the
Service Agreement costs.
1.03
The Contractor shall have contractual agreements with each of its sub-contractors whose services the
Contractor may secure to perform work under this Service Agreement and is in compliance with all of the
terms of this Service Agreement. In the event that the Contractor subcontracts certain portions of the work,
the term “employee” as used herein shall be deemed to include such subcontractors and their employees.
SC-2. SITE SPECIFIC WORK PROCEDURES AND PROGRAMS
2.01
The Contractor is solely responsible for obtaining any procedures from LAWA prior to commencement of
Work and hereby releases LAWA from any and all claims based upon its failure to either become familiar
with the governing procedures and programs or its failure to comply with them.
2.02
Contractor is responsible for obtaining copies of any and all approved O&M manuals, drawings, updates,
and other documents required to perform all services to the referenced systems called for in this Service
Agreement.
2.03
Contractor shall have hardcopy prints of all manuals, drawings, etc. at all times, and update as needed to
reflect operation of new or modified systems.
2.04
Any document referenced in this Service Agreement shall become part of the Service Agreement
documents.
SC-3. SUBMITTALS
3.01
Contractor shall submit the following documentation at the time specified during the term of the Service
Agreement and in accordance with the following submittal deadlines. Prepare all documents in the English
language.
a.
Contractor’s Safety Plan and Drug Policy – Prior to start of any work.
b.
Problem Reports - On a monthly basis
c.
Maintenance Reports - On a monthly basis
d.
Invoices – No later than 10 days from the first day of each following calendar month
SC-4. TERM OF SERVICE AGREEMENT
4.01
The term of this Service Agreement shall be for the five year period commencing immediately upon
expiration of the 1-year Warranty for each unit.
Page 1 of 10
Vertical Transportation and Moving Walks
SC-5. WORKING HOURS
5.01
Unless restricted elsewhere in the Service Agreement Documents, or directed by LAWA in writing, the
normal working hours for services performed while the units remain in service are 8 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., 7
days a week for the term of the Service Agreement.
5.02
Normal working hours for services requiring the units to be taken out of service are 10:30 p.m. to 6:30
a.m., 7 days a week for the term of the Service Agreement. All units shall be returned to service and opened
to the public by 6:30 a.m. following the maintenance or repair services. It is anticipated that 85% of the
mandated PM hours will fall during this time period.
SC-6. SERVICE CALLS
6.01
The Contractor shall have staff to respond to and provide emergency services twenty-four (24) hours a day,
seven (7) days a week. The Contractor shall respond within 30 minutes when the emergency call includes
equipment failure, personal injury, entrapment, or potential for personal injury.
6.02
The Contractor shall also maintain an Emergency Service Call Log containing the following:
−
−
−
−
Name and telephone number of caller.
Description of problem and location within the Terminal where problem exists.
Time and date call was received.
Description of action taken to resolve the problem and time and date action was taken.
SC-7. WORK RESPONSE TIME
7.01
Response time for work requirements is dependent upon work priority and shall be in accordance with the
standards noted below. Any non-compliance with the specified standards and requirements may result in
the Contractor being issued a written notification by LAWA.
7.02
Emergency Work: The Contractor shall have available personnel to take action at the emergency location
within thirty (30) minutes following notification by LAWA or other designated official.
a.
Emergency Work is defined as any mechanical, electrical or controls issue that cannot be
resolved within ten (10) minutes or any mechanical problem in which the vertical transportation
device is not usable by LAWA. It also includes breakdown, stoppage or loss of critical system or
equipment which, if not repaired, could endanger life, safety or health of personnel or might
result in the damage to LAWA property, or any condition that they may exist which LAWA
determines requires immediate response.
SC-8. NOT USED
Page 2 of 10
Vertical Transportation and Moving Walks
SC-9. OPERATION OF VEHICLES
9.01
Contractor's ability to park at Terminals is controlled by LAWA. LAWA shall permit the Contractor and its
personnel, during the effective period of Service Agreement to purchase parking pass cards to park motor
vehicles used by it exclusively in its operations hereunder in the designated parking lots. The Contractor
shall comply with such existing rules, regulations and procedures as are now in force and such reasonable
future rules, regulations and procedures as may hereafter be adopted by the LAWA for the safety and
convenience of persons who park automotive vehicles in any parking area at the airport or for the safety
and proper identification of such vehicles, and the Contractor shall also comply with any and all directions
pertaining to such parking which may be given from time to time and at any time by the Airport Manager.
LAWA shall have no responsibility of any kind whatsoever, including, without limitation thereto, the loss,
theft, destruction or damage to said vehicle or any contents therein, in connection with the permission
granted to the Contractor to park its motor vehicles. No other rights or privileges in connection with
parking of motor vehicles at the Airport are or shall be deemed to be granted to the Contractor under
Service Agreement.
9.02
Each vehicle or unit of equipment that travels, operates or delivers materials in any restricted area of the
Airport shall comply with the regulation set forth in Appendices B, C and D.
SC-10. UNIFORMS
10.01 The Contractor shall provide its personnel with all necessary distinctive uniforms and identification badges
and woven identification insignia of a type and style which shall be subject to the prior and continuing
approval of C&M. Contractor's employees shall wear these uniforms and identification badges or insignias
at all times while performing the operations hereunder. The Contractors’ employee shall be neat, clean, and
professional in appearance.
SC-11. WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS
11.01 All repair and replacement materials, parts, and equipment furnished by the Contractor in the Work shall be
new, high grade, of the same manufacture and type as material and items being replaced and free from
defects. Materials and work quality not conforming to the requirements of the Specifications shall be
considered defective and will be subject to rejection. Defective work or material, whether in place or not,
shall be removed immediately from the site by the Contractor, at its expense, when so directed by LAWA.
11.02
If the Contractor fails to replace any defective or damaged work or material within 10 days after reasonable
notice, LAWA may cause such work or materials to be replaced. The replacement expense shall be
deducted from the amount to be paid to the Contractor.
SC-12. OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
12.01
The Contractor shall maintain all required Spare Parts at all times with, at a minimum, quantities of spare
parts equal to or greater than that which are present at the start of the Service Agreement, and as specified
by the OEM O&M Manual, or as directed by LAWA. The cost of all Non-Warranty Spare Parts
replacement shall be invoiced back to LAWA in accordance with General Provisions.
12.02
The Contractor shall be responsible to accurately record spare parts purchases and inventory at all times.
Page 3 of 10
Vertical Transportation and Moving Walks
12.03
At time of acceptance of materials from LAWA, Contractor shall sign a receipt. Signing of such receipt
without reservation therein shall preclude any subsequent claim by the Contractor that any such items were
received from LAWA in a damaged condition and with shortages. If at any time after acceptance of any
such item from LAWA any such item is damaged, lost, stolen or destroyed, such item shall be repaired or
replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
12.04
Upon completion of the 5-year Service Agreement, Contractor shall, at its expense, return all surplus and
unused materials and parts to LAWA.
SC-13. CONTRACTOR SUPPLIES
13.01 The Contractor shall furnish all incidental supplies, materials, tools, and equipment necessary for the
performance of the work in the Service Agreement, unless otherwise specified. The costs for these
incidentals shall be inclusive of this Service Agreement.
SC-14. FACILITIES USED BY THE CONTRACTOR
14.01 General
a.
Limited facilities such as storage and workshop space may be furnished by LAWA. The
Contractor shall be fully responsible and liable for the facilities made available to it, to include
security, loss or damage thereto. This responsibility includes the observance of safety, security
and sanitary directives. Facilities built or installed by Contractor must be removed at termination
of the Service Agreement, unless the Contractor and LAWA agree to their presence. The
Contractor may not use any LAWA facilities other than those specifically provided. In case of
break-ins, the Contractor shall notify Airport Police immediately upon discovery and assist in
determining loss. Notwithstanding this paragraph, in no instance is the Contractor made liable
for loss or damage of LAWA furnished facilities when the loss or damage was not caused by
Contractor's negligence.
b.
Access to Premises: The Contractor shall not permit any unauthorized access to individuals to
the work area, and shall enforce all applicable LAWA orders, rules, regulations, and instructions.
These requirements shall also be applicable to all individuals with regard to access, removal,
and/or possession of classified data, materials, supplies, equipment and all LAWA owned
property at the locations designated in Service Agreement. Access to FIS areas is controlled by
the Federal Agencies and subject to their rules and restrictions. Contractors' employees working
in the FIS areas are subject to extensive background checks by these Agencies.
c.
Equipment and materials located on the Airport, but not being used, shall be left at locations to
be designated by LAWA. All other operations of the Contractor shall be confined to the areas
authorized or approved by LAWA. Areas adjacent to the work will be made available for
temporary use by the Contractor, without cost, whenever such use will not interfere with other
purposes. The Contractor shall be liable for any damage caused to such premises. The Contractor
shall restore areas used for operations or for storage, and all areas adjacent to the work, to their
original conditions.
Page 4 of 10
Vertical Transportation and Moving Walks
14.02
Cleaning of Site: The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the work site clean and neat. As
necessary, debris shall be removed to an approved disposal location. Areas used by the Contractor during
its work shall be cleaned daily before leaving the job site. Items saturated with combustible fluids shall be
stored in tightly sealed metal containers and removed from the Work location. Paints and thinners shall not
be poured into Terminal drains, lines or sewers. Paint, dirt and other stains on surfaces of Terminals, which
are caused by the Contractor's work, shall be carefully removed and the surfaces cleaned. All areas used by
the Contractor shall be left in a clean and neat condition.
SC-15. NOT USED
SC-16. NOT USED
SC-17. NOT USED
SC-18. BASIC MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
18.01 General
a.
The Contractor shall facilitate proactive preventive maintenance, maximize equipment life and
maximize beneficial usage of the vertical transportation equipment covered by this Agreement.
Contractor expressly acknowledges that City is relying on CONTRACTOR’S professional
expertise and knowledge of covered equipment in the performance of Services to achieve
desired results.
b.
The Contractor shall provide the EPRM of the vertical transportation systems installed in this
Service Agreement in conformance with the LAWA approved O&M Manuals. Services shall
strictly comply with all services necessary to maintain the equipment in proper working order for
use at a major international airport, and in coordination with LAWA.
c.
The Contractor shall be responsible to provide (employ) Senior / Supervising Maintenance
Technicians that are licensed elevator mechanics. The Contractor must also possess a valid C-11
Contractor’s License. The Contractor shall be responsible for all labor, personnel and employee
costs.
d.
The Contractor shall be capable of operation, maintenance, trouble-shooting, updating and
repairing the equipment computer systems and software.
e.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the procurement of all tools and equipment required to
perform preventative maintenance and repair functions. Any tools that are required to perform
specific maintenance tasks on OEM supplied equipment will be supplied by the OEM as part of
the equipment supply and installation. The Contractor shall be responsible for all contracted
goods and services.
f.
The Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate and cooperate in all respects with LAWA, the
user airline, and/or their representatives in the performance of the Contractor’s work. EPRM and
non-scheduled maintenance tasks shall be coordinated with and scheduled in concurrence with
LAWA. The Contractor shall be required to submit a preventative maintenance schedule to
LAWA for review.
Page 5 of 10
Vertical Transportation and Moving Walks
18.02
g.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the Contractor’s personnel follow Customs
and Border Protection (CBP) rules and requirements when working in Customs areas.
h.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all sundries and components, lubricants, supply and
inventory costs.
i.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all safety equipment costs.
j.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all license fees and expenses.
k.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all office supplies, equipment and expenses.
l.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all computers, printing, photographs, records, documents
and report expenses.
m.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all telephone, radio and communication expenses.
n.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all Contractor facility and utility expenses.
o.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all vehicle expenses.
p.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all travel time and travel related expenses.
q.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all excise taxes and fuel surcharges.
r.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all other payments, costs and expenses
associated with the Contractor’s complete fulfillment of the requirements and obligations as set
forth in this Agreement.
Basic Maintenance Requirements
a.
Service Agreement tasks include, but are not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Page 6 of 10
Inspection of completed installation and Periodic testing, as defined by ASME A17.1 and
at ASME A17.1-1996 intervals, to maintain each Moving Walk/Elevator/Escalator
(“Unit(s)”) in completely operable, like new condition.
Provide preventative maintenance on each elevator at least monthly for a minimum of four
(4) hours. (Total On-Site Time). Provide monthly documentation of the same to LAWA.
Provide preventative maintenance on each escalator and moving walkway at least a
minimum of four (4) hours each two weeks. (Total On-Site Time). Provide monthly
documentation of the same to LAWA. An external review of comb plates and skirt/step
clearances will be performed weekly.
Periodic lubrication of parts and equipment components as per OEM’s recommendation.
Charts are to be provided for each Unit indicating when services are provided.
Perform work without removing Units from service during peak traffic periods determined
by LAWA as 7:00 a.m. to 10:30 p.m. daily.
Unlimited regular time callbacks are included with a required response time of one (1)
hour. Regular time will be Monday through Friday, 8:00am to 4:30pm, exclusive of
holidays. Overtime\Premium time call backs originating from an operational error related
to the performance requirements of the equipment shall be borne by the Contractor.
Vertical Transportation and Moving Walks
7.
Annual clean down of the Units, drip pans, pits, hoistways, pallets, hydraulic pumps and
components, and all interior parts is required. Make necessary arrangements with LAWA
in order to minimize any inconvenience.
8. Annual tests and confirmations that the Controllers and control systems are functioning
properly for each Unit.
9. Reporting: Detailed monthly records of tasks performed including names of individuals
performing the tasks, date and time performed, and other pertinent data. Contractor is
required to conform to the requirements of LAWA’s maintenance system.
10. Five-year, full load, full speed tests of buffers ,governors and safeties.
11. Five year pressure tests on hydraulic elevators.
12. Monthly Testing of Phase I and Phase II Firefighter’s Service.
b.
Routine Maintenance - Activities such as routine inspections and tests designed to identify any
unusual or abnormal equipment condition.
c.
Preventative Maintenance (“PM”) - Activities required to keep the Units operating at the
prescribed levels of safety, efficiency and reliability as defined in the O&M Manuals and
installation specifications, which are performed on a regular basis at specified intervals.
Preventative measures shall also include cleaning the surrounding area as required to keep Units
free from any trash, dirt and/or debris.
d.
Non-Scheduled Maintenance - Any corrective measure or repair necessitated by an inspection, a
failure, or unusual circumstances adversely affecting the normal equipment operation. Nonscheduled maintenance may be required as a result of unsatisfactory conditions discovered
during an inspection.
e.
Ordinary Wear - Any corrective measure or repair that may be required because of ordinary
wear.
f.
Other Maintenance - Maintaining updated maintenance manuals, maintenance of testing
equipment and tools, maintaining wiring diagrams, cleaning of equipment and equipment areas.
g.
Hours Available for Maintenance Functions – shall be as stated in SC-5 and SC-18, or as
approved by LAWA.
h.
Repair and Replacement of Damaged Parts, Components or Materials
1.
2.
Page 7 of 10
Contractor shall promptly repair and/or replace damaged parts, components or materials,
regardless of the cause of such damage. Any and all replacement parts must be new and
unused. LAWA will reimburse the Contractor for the cost of such repairs and
replacements, in accordance with GP, where the need for the repairs did not result from:
i.
The routine operation and maintenance of the system.
ii. The careless or negligent acts or omissions of the equipment OEM, Contractor’s
employees, suppliers, agents or subcontractors. There shall be no separate
reimbursement for repairs or replacements for items covered by the warranties or
guarantees provided by the OEM.
iii. Normal wear and tear.
iv. Contractors negligence.
LAWA requires the Contractor to provide sufficient resources to promptly repair the
systems at all times.
Vertical Transportation and Moving Walks
3.
i.
Any additional costs not associated with this Service Agreement must be approved in
advance by LAWA.
Replacement of Materials
1.
j.
If it is necessary for the Contractor to replace any materials, parts or components under this
Service Agreement and LAWA is responsible for the cost, the Contractor shall first submit
to LAWA, for approval, the name of the item, identifying number and quantity required,
name of the proposed supplier and the proposed cost, and the amount that the Contractor
intends to bill LAWA. LAWA’s written approval is required before the purchase of any
parts, components or material shall commence unless, if in the Contractor’s opinion, it is
needed to keep the Units in operation or is required to comply with any LAWA, city, or
national safety requirements. Cost submittal shall be provided within 24 hours of
equipment shutdown.
Testing Required By Applicable Codes and Agreement Documents:
1.
The Contractor shall act as the City's agent for conducting or assisting in the conducting of
all Authority Having Jurisdiction and Consultant tests and inspections required for vertical
transportation equipment as part of this Agreement. Testing hours shall be at the sole cost
and expense of Contractor.
i.
Periodic tests:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
2.
3.
Page 8 of 10
Contractor shall perform periodic tests as required by the ASME A17.1-2007
Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators at intervals dictated by ASME
A17.1-1996, including compliance with the ASME A17.2.1 2007 Inspectors'
Manual.
Conduct monthly inspection and testing of the firefighters' service. Maintain
test log in each machine/control room. Conduct semi-annual testing of
emergency and standby power operation.
When testing is required during working (See SC-18) hours, CONTRACTOR
shall coordinate with the City and Code authorities as to minimize disruptions
of service to the Airport. City retains the right to have testing performed
during non-operating hours when possible.
When required by Local Code Authority or LAWA's Representative, assist in
Routine and Periodic inspections and audits of equipment at no additional cost
to City.
Provide Routine and Periodic inspections of escalators and moving walks per
ASME A17.1, Sections 8.6.8 and 8.11.4. Frequencies shall be as described in
ASME A17.1-1996.
Complete all repairs found to be necessary as a result of the above examinations,
inspections and tests.
Inspection and Approvals: The Services shall be subject to inspection and approval by City
or City's Representative and all applicable governmental authorities; provided, however, in
no event shall any such inspection and/or approval by City or Representative of the City
constitute an assumption of Contractor's duties and obligations or a waiver or release of
liability or a release of any other obligations whatsoever of Contractor with respect to the
Services performed by Contractor pursuant to this Agreement.
Vertical Transportation and Moving Walks
SC-19. REPORTS
19.01 Unless specified elsewhere in the Service Agreement, the following are minimum reports to be submitted
to LAWA monthly:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Completed PM tasks
Preventative Maintenance Inspection Sheets and Maintenance Logs
Emergency Service Call Log
All records of maintenance, repair, testing, alteration, callback, etc., required by this
Agreement, shall be kept in a computerized maintenance management system that can be
accessed by City at any time during the Agreement. Hard copies of documents shall be
made available within 48 hours of City’s request.
Conduct monthly operational examinations and provide a written report thereof with a copy
to the City.
SC-20. QUALITY CONTROL
20.01 The Contractor shall establish and maintain a complete QC program that is acceptable to LAWA and
assures the requirements of Service Agreement are provided as specified. The QC Program shall be
implemented on Service Agreement start date. A copy of the Contractor's QC Program shall be submitted
to LAWA prior to start of work.
20.02
The Contractor’s QC Program shall include the following:
a.
An inspection system covering all the tasks and services to be provided by the Contractor. It
shall specify areas to be inspected on a scheduled or unscheduled basis, the manner in which
inspections are to be conducted and the individual who will do the inspection.
b.
A method of identifying deficiencies in the quality of services performed before the level of
service becomes unacceptable.
c.
A file of all inspections or tests conducted by the Contractor, to include any corrective actions
taken. This file shall be subject to LAWA review at all times during the performance of Service
Agreement. The file shall be property of LAWA and shall be turned over to LAWA upon
completion or termination of Service Agreement.
d.
QC program shall be in compliance with Contractors, LAWA approved, Maintenance Control
Program. The Code required Maintenance Control Program shall be posted in each
machine/control room.
e.
Codes and Ordinances:
1.
Page 9 of 10
All the work covered by these specifications is to be done in full accord with the state and
local Codes, and ordinances as are in effect at the time of the execution of the contact and
the ASME A17.1-2007 elevator safety orders. All of the elevator/escalator/moving walk
related requirements of the local Building Department are to be fulfilled by the Contractor
except for inspection fees.
Vertical Transportation and Moving Walks
2.
f.
Certificate of Inspection/Permit To Operate:
1.
g.
State or City inspection fees shall be paid by the City. Fees for re-inspection due to failure
to eliminate deficiencies covered by this maintenance Agreement will be paid by the
Contractor.
City's Right To Inspect and Require Work:
1.
2.
h.
The Contractor shall also provide maintenance and/or repairs to comply with any violation
of the Governing Agencies and recommendations of casualty companies on due notice
from the City, provided that such violations or recommendations did not exist prior to the
date of the Agreement or after issuance by either party of any 30 or 90 day cancellation
notice. Upon award of this Agreement any pre-existing condition falling within the scope
of this Agreement will be covered. The requirement of any new attachments or parts on an
elevator, escalator or moving walk, in addition to those on the now existing equipment,
shall be the responsibility of the City.
City reserves the right to make such inspections and tests whenever necessary to ascertain
that the requirements of this AGREEMENT are being fulfilled. Deficiencies noted shall be
promptly corrected at Contractor's expense. In no instance shall CITY be liable for the
frequency or sufficiency of such inspections or tests.
If Contractor fails to perform the work required by the terms of this Agreement in a diligent
and satisfactory manner, City may, after ten (10) days' written notice to Contractor,
perform or cause to be performed all or any part of the work required hereunder.
Contractor agrees that it will reimburse City for any expense incurred therefore, and CITY
at its election may deduct the amount from any sum owing Contractor. The waiver by City
of a breach of any provision of this Agreement by Contractor shall not operate or be
construed as a waiver of any subsequent breach by Contractor. If the City so desires, a
qualified Elevator Consultant reasonably acceptable to both parties may be retained by City
to mediate any disputes.
Labor Laws:
1.
2.
Page 10 of 10
The Contractor performing work under this Agreement shall comply with applicable
provisions of all federal, state and local labor laws, and Union Labor Agreements.
Contractor hereby indemnifies and saves City and/or City's Representative from and
against any and all costs, liabilities, and actions arising out of the violation or alleged
violation of, or the non-compliance with or alleged non-compliance with, any Labor Laws
and or Union Labor Agreements.
Vertical Transportation and Moving Walks
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement